|
|
(64 intermediate revisions by 2 users not shown) |
Line 1: |
Line 1: |
| By [[IBM]]
| | {{IBM-Reprint}} |
| | ==Product Documentation== |
| | ;OS/2 Warp V3 |
| | *[[User's Guide to OS/2 Warp Version 3]] (Oct 1994) |
|
| |
|
| '''“Reprint Courtesy of International Business Machines Corporation, © International Business Machines Corporation”'''
| | [[Category:Books]] |
| | |
| ==Version Notice 1/1==
| |
| | |
| First Edition (October 1994)
| |
| The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country
| |
| where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
| |
| MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
| |
| KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
| |
| WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states
| |
| do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
| |
| transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
| |
| This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
| |
| Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
| |
| incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
| |
| and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
| |
| publication at any time.
| |
| It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information
| |
| about, IBM products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are
| |
| not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be
| |
| construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products, programming,
| |
| or services in your country.
| |
| Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM
| |
| authorized reseller or IBM marketing representative.
| |
| | |
| ==Contributors 2/1==
| |
| | |
| Authors c.
| |
| Linda S. Rogers
| |
| Lisa DeMeo
| |
| Karla Stagray
| |
| Contributing Authors c.
| |
| Su Hill
| |
| Val Enright
| |
| David Spicer
| |
| Marion Lindsey
| |
| Lana Meadows
| |
| Kathy Hancock
| |
| Editors c.
| |
| Elizabeth Jean
| |
| Tracey Marcelo
| |
| Roger Didio
| |
| Design c.
| |
| Brian Black
| |
| Jeff Lewis
| |
| National Language Support c.
| |
| Joseph Hunt
| |
| Mike Cress
| |
| Gene Ignatowski
| |
| Publications Manager c.
| |
| John D. Lloyd
| |
| Managing Editor c.
| |
| Dan Baker
| |
| Publishing Assistant Editor c.
| |
| Linda S. Rogers
| |
| Editorial Assistant c.
| |
| Victor Laird
| |
| Production Coordinator c.
| |
| Elyse Anchell
| |
| Tools Support c.
| |
| Gene Ignatowski
| |
| Rick Goldsmith
| |
| Usability Testing c.
| |
| Lynn VanDyke
| |
| Carol Righi
| |
| Alan Rose
| |
| John Tyler
| |
| | |
| ==Welcome 3/1+==
| |
| | |
| Hello and welcome to OS/2. You're about to begin using your computer in an
| |
| exciting new way-as a productivity aid that helps you get your work done quickly
| |
| and easily.
| |
| This book is for anyone who uses OS/2, whether you're just beginning, are
| |
| familiar with computers, or have lots of technical expertise. It contains all
| |
| the information you need to install and use OS/2 effectively, from the basics to
| |
| "know-how" information to expert tips and technical details.
| |
| o "Part 1: Installing OS/2" contains system preparation tasks and
| |
| installation instructions.
| |
| o "Part 2: Exploring OS/2" offers a self-paced, interactive guided tour of
| |
| the Desktop.
| |
| o "Part 3: Using OS/2" provides step-by-step instructions for using each
| |
| object on the Desktop.
| |
| o "Part 4: Troubleshooting" includes technical tips and techniques for
| |
| resolving problems and keeping your system running smoothly.
| |
| o "Part 5: Advanced Installation" is for technical users who want to
| |
| customize their installation.
| |
| o Appendix A describes techniques for using a mouse or a keyboard.
| |
| You'll find this book easy to use if you look for these simple conventions:
| |
| o Boldface type indicates the name of an item you need to select.
| |
| o Italics type indicates new terms, book titles, or variable information
| |
| that must be replaced by an actual value.
| |
| o Monospace type indicates an example (such as a fictitious path or file
| |
| name) or text that is displayed on the screen.
| |
| o uppercase type indicates a file name, command name, or acronym.
| |
| So why not get started right away? Here are some easy paths to follow,
| |
| depending on what you want to accomplish:
| |
| o To install OS/2, go to Part 1.
| |
| o If you're new to OS/2 or just want to explore, go to Part 2.
| |
| o To access the extensive online information, go to Part 2.
| |
| o To learn how to use OS/2, go to Part 3.
| |
| | |
| ==About OS/2 Version 3 4/2+==
| |
| | |
| OS/2* Version 3 is an advanced, 32-bit operating system that runs on 4MB systems
| |
| and provides excellent response time to both 16-bit and 32-bit applications.
| |
| OS/2 Version 3 is easier to install and to use and has better performance than
| |
| previous versions of the OS/2 operating system.
| |
| | |
| ==Installation Improvements in OS/2 Version 3 5/3==
| |
| | |
| OS/2 Version 3 includes an Easy Installation choice. You can choose Easy
| |
| Installation to install OS/2 from diskette or CD-ROM. Easy Installation lets
| |
| the system choose which options to install. After you select Easy Installation,
| |
| you don't have to make any more installation decisions.
| |
| In addition, OS/2 Version 3 has the following installation improvements:
| |
| o It takes less time and fewer diskettes to complete an installation.
| |
| o The system automatically installs the Dual Boot feature when you install
| |
| over DOS.
| |
| o You can install more than one printer during the initial installation.
| |
| o Multimedia installation is a part of the OS/2 installation.
| |
| | |
| ==Performance 6/3==
| |
| | |
| Performance improvements make OS/2 Version 3 faster at displaying objects on the
| |
| Desktop, moving from one window to another, and displaying information in the
| |
| Master Help Index and Glossary.
| |
| | |
| ==New Features 7/3==
| |
| | |
| OS/2 Version 3 has the following new features that make the system easier to
| |
| use:
| |
| o The LaunchPad provides a quick and easy way to get to commands and objects
| |
| that you use often.
| |
| o The Using OS/2 tutorial is a vastly improved and expanded learning tool
| |
| that provides basic, step-by-step information, including a Practice push
| |
| button that takes you to the Desktop to try the task for yourself, as well
| |
| as expert tips and special hints for Microsoft** Windows** users.
| |
| o Comet Cursor is a trail that follows your mouse pointer to help you see it
| |
| on portable computer screens.
| |
| o The Pickup and Drop choices on the pop-up menu for an object let you use
| |
| other Desktop functions while dragging and dropping objects.
| |
| o The Desktop page of the Desktop Settings notebook lets you arrange your
| |
| Desktop the way you like it and have the system restore that Desktop each
| |
| time you restart your system.
| |
| o The Archive page of Desktop Settings, together with the Recovery Choices
| |
| screen, lets you save different versions of your system files and choose
| |
| which version you want to use to restart your system.
| |
| o Undo Arrange now accompanies the Arrange feature available from the pop-up
| |
| menu for an object.
| |
| o A redesigned Desktop now has new three-dimensional icons and animated
| |
| icons.
| |
| o Two color palettes are available - Solid Color Palette and Mixed Color
| |
| Palette. The Solid Color Palette was designed for use with systems that
| |
| have VGA display support. The Mixed Color Palette was designed for use
| |
| with systems that have SVGA display support. The paint roller has been
| |
| changed to a paint bucket as an additional enhancement.
| |
| o An enhanced Scheme Palette with many new schemes to choose from.
| |
| o Newly designed mouse pointer options include the ability to change the
| |
| look and size of the mouse pointer.
| |
| o The new Fastload option improves application loading time.
| |
| o Enhanced PCMCIA support enables you to switch devices and automatically
| |
| reconfigures your system while you continue to work.
| |
| | |
| =Part 1- Installing OS/2 8/1=
| |
| | |
| | |
| ==As You Begin 9/1+==
| |
| | |
| This chapter contains preliminary information to get you ready to install OS/2*.
| |
| | |
| Complete all the procedures in this chapter. Then choose an installation
| |
| method.
| |
| | |
| The OS/2 operating system can be installed over the following products:
| |
| o OS/2 for Windows
| |
| o OS/2 Version 1.3
| |
| o DOS Versions 3.3 or later
| |
| o Microsoft Windows Versions 3.1 or 3.11
| |
| o Windows for Workgroups 3.1 or 3.11
| |
| Note: OS/2 does not enable the LAN connectivity function of Windows for
| |
| Workgroups. For information on how to use the network function after
| |
| installing OS/2, see the online book, Application Considerations.
| |
| | |
| If you do not need Windows function, you can install OS/2:
| |
| o Without Windows
| |
| o With an earlier version of Windows
| |
| However, you will not be able to run Windows programs.
| |
| | |
| ==Preparing Your System 10/2==
| |
| | |
| Before installing OS/2, check the following:
| |
| o If you are installing on a computer that has Windows on it, make sure you
| |
| have the diskettes or the CD that was used to install Windows.
| |
| Note:
| |
| 1. Some computer manufacturers preinstall Windows on your computer, and
| |
| then provide a utility program so you can create your own Windows
| |
| diskettes. If Windows was preinstalled on your computer, create the
| |
| Windows diskettes before you begin installing OS/2
| |
| 2. If you used device drivers, fonts, or specific language information
| |
| files different from those included on the Windows diskettes, or from
| |
| those that were preinstalled on your computer, you might overwrite
| |
| these files when installing OS/2. Reinstall those device drivers
| |
| after installing OS/2.
| |
| o Be sure the files on your hard disk are not compressed. If you are using a
| |
| DOS compression program, such as Stacker**, AdStor, or DoubleSpace,
| |
| decompress the disk on which DOS and Windows are installed. Refer to the
| |
| manual that came with the compression program for instructions.
| |
| Note: If the compression program you are using does not specifically
| |
| state that it works with OS/2, you will not be able to use the compression
| |
| program after OS/2 is installed.
| |
| o See updates to the Installation program in the README.INS file on the
| |
| Installation Diskette. Follow these steps:
| |
| 1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
| |
| 2. Turn on the computer. If your computer is already on, press
| |
| Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the system.
| |
| 3. When prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and insert
| |
| Diskette 1 into the drive; then press Enter.
| |
| 4. When the Welcome screen appears, press F3 to display a command
| |
| prompt.
| |
| 5. Remove Diskette 1 from drive A and reinsert the Installation
| |
| Diskette. Then do one of the following:
| |
| - To view the README file online, type tedit readme.ins and press
| |
| Enter. Press PF4 to quit the editor.
| |
| - To print a copy of the README file, type copy readme.ins > LPT1
| |
| and press Enter. (LPT1 represents the port to which your printer
| |
| is connected. If you are using another port, type the correct
| |
| port.)
| |
| o Make sure you have the minimum hardware and software required to install
| |
| OS/2:
| |
| - An Intel** 80386 SX (or higher) 32-bit microprocessor
| |
| - At least 4MB of random access memory (RAM)
| |
| - A hard disk with 35MB to 50MB of free space, plus an additional 10MB
| |
| of hard disk space for multimedia support (for example, for a sound
| |
| card)
| |
| - A 1.44MB diskette drive
| |
| - VGA video support
| |
| - An IBM-compatible mouse
| |
| Note: Both DOS and Windows provide programs that check and list your
| |
| memory and installed hardware. To view this information, do one of the
| |
| following:
| |
| - If you have PC DOS 6.1 or later installed on your computer, type
| |
| qconfig at the command line and press Enter.
| |
| - If you have Windows installed on your computer, select Run from the
| |
| File menu. Then type msd and press Enter.
| |
| o Refer to Special Hardware Considerations if you are using any of the
| |
| following equipment:
| |
| Gateway 2000**
| |
| A system with Phoenix**, AMI**, or Micronics** BIOS
| |
| ATI** Graphics Ultra** Pro display adapter
| |
| An EISA system with an Adaptec** 1742A controller card
| |
| IBM* PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette
| |
| IBM PS/2 Model 76
| |
| IBM ThinkPad* with a Docking Station
| |
| A system with an Aox upgrade
| |
| Quantum** II Hard Card
| |
| Sony**, Panasonic**, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips**, Mitsumi**,
| |
| BSR, or Tandy non-SCSI CD-ROM drive
| |
| Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM combination
| |
| IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter
| |
| Sound Blaster**
| |
| ProAudio Spectrum** 16
| |
| | |
| ==Choosing Easy or Advanced Installation 11/2==
| |
| | |
| Use Easy Installation to install OS/2 with preselected settings, based on your
| |
| current hardware and software. The Easy Installation program installs the
| |
| operating system in the same partition as your DOS and Windows (if you have DOS
| |
| and Windows installed on your computer), uses the File Allocation Table (FAT)
| |
| file system, and installs the following OS/2 features on your computer:
| |
| Documentation, including:
| |
| The OS/2 Tutorial
| |
| Command Reference
| |
| Windows in OS/2
| |
| Application Considerations
| |
| Performance Considerations
| |
| Printing in OS/2
| |
| Multimedia
| |
| All system fonts
| |
| Optional System Utilities, including:
| |
| Backup Hard Disk
| |
| Change File Attributes
| |
| Manage Partition
| |
| Restore Backed-Up Files
| |
| Sort Filter
| |
| Tools and Games, including:
| |
| Enhanced Editor
| |
| Seek and Scan
| |
| Chess
| |
| Solitaire
| |
| OS/2 DOS Support
| |
| Multimedia Software Support (if required capabilities are detected on your
| |
| computer)
| |
| REXX
| |
| Optional Bit Maps
| |
| Advanced Power Management (if required capabilities are detected on your
| |
| computer)
| |
| PCMCIA (if required capabilities are detected on your computer)
| |
| To use Easy Installation, go to Using Easy Installation.
| |
| Important
| |
| Use Advanced Installation only if you are an experienced computer user.
| |
| This method lets you customize how OS/2 will be installed on your computer,
| |
| including:
| |
| o Installing OS/2 on a drive or partition other than C
| |
| o Installing OS/2 in a logical drive
| |
| o Using the HPFS file system
| |
| o Selecting which of the OS/2 features you want to install
| |
| o Installing OS/2 so it can be used with Boot Manager
| |
| To use Advanced Installation, go to Using Advanced Installation.
| |
| | |
| ==Using Easy Installation 12/1+==
| |
| | |
| This chapter describes how to install OS/2 on your computer using the Easy
| |
| Installation method. Easy Installation was designed to help you install OS/2
| |
| without having to answer technical questions about your computer and its
| |
| attached hardware. Throughout the installation process, the program will search
| |
| and detect the type of hardware and software you are using on your computer.
| |
| Then, the Installation program will install a preselected set of the features of
| |
| OS/2.
| |
| If you would prefer to customize the installation of OS/2 on your computer, and
| |
| if you are experienced at installing operating systems, you might want to use
| |
| the Advanced Installation method. Refer to Using Advanced Installation for more
| |
| information about that method.
| |
| Easy Installation installs OS/2 using defaults (options that are preselected so
| |
| you don't have to make decisions or selections). If you use this method, OS/2
| |
| will be installed as follows:
| |
| o If DOS and Windows are in a primary, drive C partition, OS/2 will be
| |
| installed in that partition.
| |
| o The partition will not be reformatted.
| |
| o The Dual Boot feature will be automatically set up for you, so you can
| |
| start your computer from either DOS or OS/2.
| |
| o If you are installing OS/2 Version 3 over a previous version of OS/2, your
| |
| OS/2 Desktop will be preserved for you.
| |
| | |
| ==Preparing for the Installation 13/2==
| |
| | |
| During Easy Installation, you will be asked to insert diskettes (or a compact
| |
| disc (CD), if you are installing from a CD-ROM drive) and to remove diskettes.
| |
| Follow the directions you see on the screen. Be prepared to:
| |
| o Indicate the type of printer that is connected to your computer. If you do
| |
| not know the type of printer you are using, refer to the documentation
| |
| that came with your printer.
| |
| o Insert the original diskettes or CD that came with Microsoft Windows. Be
| |
| sure to have your Windows diskettes or CD handy before you install OS/2.
| |
| If you have any problems during the installation, press the F1 key to view the
| |
| online help that is available whenever you see F1=Help at the bottom of a
| |
| screen. If you have problems with any of your hardware or if you receive error
| |
| messages during the installation, refer to Solving Installation Problems.
| |
| | |
| ==Installing the Operating System 14/2==
| |
| | |
| To install OS/2 using the Easy Installation method, follow these steps:
| |
| 1. If your computer is on, close all running applications.
| |
| 2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
| |
| 3. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1. Then
| |
| press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
| |
| asking you to wait, followed by a black screen. Then the screen appears.
| |
| 5. If you are installing OS/2 from diskettes, go to step 6. If you are
| |
| installing from a CD, insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive; then press
| |
| Enter.
| |
| 6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Easy Installation. Then
| |
| press Enter.
| |
| 7. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from
| |
| diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
| |
| installation progresses. If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
| |
| any messages to remove diskettes.
| |
| After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
| |
| and then reinsert Diskette 1. Follow the instructions on the screen. After
| |
| you remove Diskette 1 and press Enter, you will see the System
| |
| Configuration screen.
| |
| 8. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
| |
| hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
| |
| Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
| |
| If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
| |
| click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name. A screen
| |
| will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
| |
| hardware device. If you are unsure about the hardware you are using, refer
| |
| to the documentation that came with it.
| |
| Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need more
| |
| information about any screen you see.
| |
| If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
| |
| OK.
| |
| A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
| |
| (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
| |
| program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
| |
| 9. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
| |
| or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
| |
| names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
| |
| o If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
| |
| PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
| |
| LPT3 button Then press Enter.
| |
| o If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
| |
| PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
| |
| COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.
| |
| If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
| |
| install default printer and press Enter or click on OK.
| |
| 10. If you received a Warning message at the beginning of the Installation
| |
| program telling you that you did not have enough free disk space to
| |
| install OS/2, but you decided to continue with the installation anyway,
| |
| you will see the OS/2 Setup and Installation screen. Go to step 11.
| |
| If you did not receive a Warning message at the beginning of the
| |
| Installation program, go to step 12.
| |
| 11. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
| |
| features you want to install. You will notice that some features have a
| |
| check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
| |
| The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
| |
| right of the feature.
| |
| Follow these steps:
| |
| a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
| |
| deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
| |
| b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
| |
| button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
| |
| c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections
| |
| 12. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. You will be asked to
| |
| remove and insert diskettes, including one or more Printer Driver
| |
| diskettes.
| |
| 13. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
| |
| Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on the
| |
| screen; click on Help if you need more information.
| |
| 14. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
| |
| of the OS/2 installation.
| |
| 15. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do one
| |
| of the following (if Windows was preinstalled on your computer when you
| |
| bought it, you can skip this step and go to step 18):
| |
| o If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:
| |
| a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
| |
| b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
| |
| c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as
| |
| requested.
| |
| o If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
| |
| a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
| |
| b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
| |
| c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD,
| |
| type the drive letter and directory name in the field provided.
| |
| For example:
| |
| e:\winsetup
| |
| where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where \winsetup
| |
| is the directory that contains the Windows files.
| |
| 16. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and press Enter.
| |
| 17. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
| |
| and restart your computer. Click on OK or press enter.
| |
| 18. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
| |
| View the Tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use your
| |
| Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the transition
| |
| from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
| |
| For more help on using the operating system, you can access the online help
| |
| system. Press F1 anytime to get help, or if you see a Help push button at the
| |
| bottom of a screen, you can click on it to get more information about that
| |
| screen.
| |
| | |
| ==Switching between OS/2 and DOS with Dual Boot 15/2+==
| |
| | |
| When you install OS/2 using the Easy Installation method, a Dual Boot feature is
| |
| automatically set up for you as well. Dual Boot lets you switch back and forth
| |
| between OS/2 and DOS (you might want to do this because some DOS programs do not
| |
| run under OS/2).
| |
| Dual Boot also keeps track of which operating system should start when you turn
| |
| on your computer. Each time you shut down and restart your computer, it will
| |
| start (boot) in whichever operating system was last being used. For example, if
| |
| you shut down your system while DOS is running, your system will start in DOS
| |
| the next time you turn on your computer.
| |
| | |
| ==Starting the Dual Boot Feature 16/3==
| |
| | |
| Use the Dual Boot function to switch from one operating system to another:
| |
| o To switch from OS/2 to DOS:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Open Dual Boot.
| |
| 4. When a message appears asking if you want your system to be reset,
| |
| type Y and press Enter.
| |
| Note: If you want to run your DOS programs while OS/2 is running, you
| |
| can use the DOS sessions that are part of OS/2 for most DOS programs.
| |
| By using these sessions, you don't have to use Dual Boot, which shuts
| |
| down your OS/2 session. To use a DOS session, open DOS Window or DOS
| |
| Full Screen from the Command Prompts folder.
| |
| o To switch from DOS to OS/2:
| |
| 1. At the DOS command prompt, type c:\os2\boot /os2
| |
| 2. Press Enter.
| |
| For more information about the BOOT command, refer to the Command Reference.
| |
| The Command Reference is located in the Information folder on your OS/2
| |
| Desktop.
| |
| | |
| ==Installing DOS after Installing OS/2 17/3==
| |
| | |
| If you installed OS/2 on drive C, formatted the drive with the FAT file system,
| |
| and you did not already have DOS installed, your system will still have the Dual
| |
| Boot capability. However, you must install DOS to use the Dual Boot feature.
| |
| To add Dual Boot after installing OS/2, follow these steps:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Open Dual Boot. A Warning box appears reminding you that DOS was not
| |
| installed and asking if you want to continue.
| |
| 4. Type Y and press Enter. You will see messages that your system is being
| |
| prepared, and then a warning that you must shut down your system. Press
| |
| Enter to close the window.
| |
| 5. Shut down your system:
| |
| a. Position the mouse pointer on a blank space on your Desktop and press
| |
| mouse button 2.
| |
| b. Select Shut down... from the menu that appears.
| |
| c. When a message appears telling you to turn off your computer, do so.
| |
| 6. Install DOS on your computer. Follow the instructions that came in your
| |
| DOS package.
| |
| 7. At the DOS command line, type c:\os2\boot /os2 and press Enter to return
| |
| to your OS/2 Desktop.
| |
| | |
| ==What to Do if Dual Boot Does Not Work 18/3==
| |
| | |
| If the BOOT command is unsuccessful when you try to switch from DOS to OS/2, you
| |
| might have programs running that take up too much of your computer's memory. If
| |
| so, close the programs before you use the BOOT command. If the programs are
| |
| loaded from your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, you must deactivate the programs before
| |
| using the BOOT command.
| |
| | |
| ==Using Windows Programs 19/2+==
| |
| | |
| When you install OS/2 on a computer that has Windows installed on it, all of
| |
| your Windows functions are still available. If you installed OS/2 with the Easy
| |
| Installation method, any Windows programs you had on your computer were
| |
| automatically placed in folders on your OS/2 Desktop. You can also use the
| |
| Windows Program Manager by opening a WIN-OS/2 command prompt from the Command
| |
| Prompts folder in the OS/2 System folder.
| |
| To use your Windows programs after installing OS/2, use the following
| |
| procedures:
| |
| o To run a Windows program from your OS/2 Desktop:
| |
| 1. Open WIN-OS/2* Groups, or Windows Programs or Additional Windows
| |
| Progams (whichever contains the program object you want to open).
| |
| 2. Open the program you want to use.
| |
| o To run a Windows program from the Windows Program Manager:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen or WIN-OS/2 Window.
| |
| 4. Open the program you want to use.
| |
| | |
| ==Installing Windows after Installing OS/2 20/3==
| |
| | |
| If you installed OS/2 on a computer that did not have Microsoft Windows on it
| |
| already, you can install Windows later if you have a partition formatted with
| |
| the FAT file system. Follow these steps:
| |
| 1. Start your computer with DOS. Do one of the following:
| |
| o Open Dual Boot in the Command Prompts folder.
| |
| o Select DOS from the Boot Manager menu.
| |
| Note: If you have not installed DOS, refer to the procedure in
| |
| Installing DOS after Installing OS/2.
| |
| 2. When a message appears asking if you want your system to be reset, type Y
| |
| and press Enter.
| |
| 3. Install Windows in a FAT-formatted partition or logical drive.
| |
| 4. Shut down your computer, and then restart it with OS/2.
| |
| 5. Open System Setup in the OS/2 System folder.
| |
| 6. Open Selective Install
| |
| 7. When the System Configuration screen appears, select OK.
| |
| 8. On the OS/2 Setup and Installation screen, select WIN-OS/2 Support. Then
| |
| select Install
| |
| 9. When the Advanced Options window appears, select OK to continue.
| |
| 10. When prompted to do so, insert and remove the numbered OS/2 installation
| |
| diskettes.
| |
| 11. When prompted to do so, insert and remove the numbered Windows diskettes.
| |
| 12. When prompted to do so, shut down and restart your computer so the changes
| |
| can take effect.
| |
| | |
| ==What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation 21/2==
| |
| | |
| The installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most
| |
| cases, you will not encounter any problems. However, if you do have problems
| |
| either during the installation process or immediately afterwards, refer to
| |
| Solving Installation Problems.
| |
| Problems you might encounter include:
| |
| o A blank screen after installation.
| |
| o An error message with a number and, sometimes, text.
| |
| o A hardware device that does not work. (This problem can occur if you are
| |
| using hardware that is not supported by OS/2.)
| |
| If these or other problems occur, refer to Solving Installation Problems.
| |
| | |
| =Part 2 - Exploring OS/2 22/1=
| |
| | |
| | |
| ==Exploring the Desktop 23/1+==
| |
| | |
| In this chapter you will learn about and explore computer terms you should know,
| |
| the OS/2 tutorial (Using OS/2), the icons (small pictures) that are displayed
| |
| on your Desktop, and the online information that is available. There will be
| |
| times when you are sent from this book to your computer so that you can explore
| |
| the Desktop. Be sure to have your computer on with the Desktop or the tutorial
| |
| displayed.
| |
| | |
| ==Understanding Terminology 24/2==
| |
| | |
| Before you begin your exploration of the Desktop, it's important to recognize
| |
| the terminology used in this book and in other OS/2 information. The following
| |
| terms are used in addition to click and double-click to describe mouse actions.
| |
| Select Point to an item and click mouse button 1. Instructions explain
| |
| which item to point to.
| |
| Open Point to an item and double-click mouse button 1. Instructions
| |
| explain which item to point to.
| |
| For more information about click and double-click, review the "Using the Mouse"
| |
| section of Using OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Using the Tutorial 25/2
| |
| | |
| Begin your exploration by going through the OS/2 tutorial (Using OS/2). The
| |
| Using OS/2 tutorial was created to teach you the basics of OS/2 step-by-step,
| |
| and to provide advanced hints and topics for experienced DOS, OS/2, or
| |
| Microsoft** Windows** users.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| If the tutorial is not displayed on the Desktop, you can find it on the
| |
| LaunchPad.
| |
| Use either of the following procedures to display the tutorial:
| |
| o If you don't know how to use a mouse:
| |
| 1. Press and release the Alt and Tab keys at the same time until you
| |
| highlight the LaunchPad, and then press Enter to open the LaunchPad.
| |
| 2. Use the Left or Right Arrow key to highlight the Using OS/2 (its the
| |
| icon with the question mark on it), and then press Enter.
| |
| o If you know how to use a mouse: c.
| |
| 1. Double-click on the LaunchPad icon if it is not already open on the
| |
| Desktop.
| |
| 2. Click on Using OS/2 (its the icon with the question mark on it),
| |
| located in the Front Panel, to display the tutorial on the Desktop.
| |
| Return to this book when the tutorial is displayed.
| |
| Look at the tutorial now. The information box at the bottom of the window
| |
| describes how to start the tutorial. To the right of the box are push buttons
| |
| that you can click on with your mouse. When the text or graphic on a button is
| |
| black, the button is active and available for use. When it is grey, the button
| |
| is not active and cannot be used.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| o If you don't know how to use a mouse, press the Spacebar on your keyboard
| |
| to start the "Using the Mouse" instructions in the tutorial.
| |
| These instructions explain mouse terminology and teach you how to use a
| |
| mouse.
| |
| o If you know how to use a mouse, press Enter or click on (select) the >
| |
| button to begin the tutorial.
| |
| Return to this book when you have completed this procedure.
| |
| After you have viewed "Using the Mouse" or if you bypassed that section, the
| |
| tutorial begins with the Introduction panel.
| |
| Move the mouse pointer around the window and read the text in the information
| |
| box to learn about the features in the tutorial.
| |
| The area on the left side of the tutorial window is the selection area. The
| |
| selection area contains twelve push buttons that you click on to select.
| |
| The tutorial topics are displayed on the first seven push buttons. Click on a
| |
| push button to display the tutorial contents list. Double-click on the topic
| |
| text to go directly to that topic, or click on the > button to continue
| |
| through the topics.
| |
| The eighth push button is the tutorial index, which provides a list of all
| |
| tutorial topics. The topics are organized in groups that relate to the main
| |
| topic push buttons. Corresponding subtopics are listed below. When you
| |
| double-click on a topic in the index, you go directly to that topic. This can
| |
| be helpful if you want to review a topic that you have already tried but are
| |
| unable to remember where it is listed.
| |
| The remaining four push buttons are available when you are within certain
| |
| tutorial topics. They provide the following information:
| |
| Practice Lets you to try a task for yourself. When you select Practice, the
| |
| tutorial window moves to reveal the Desktop. The window provides
| |
| instruction for a task you can perform on the Desktop. You will
| |
| navigate through folders and objects to perform the task as you would
| |
| from the Desktop.
| |
| OS/2 Provides tips for using OS/2. The OS/2 tips are displayed
| |
| automatically in the information box for each tutorial topic.
| |
| Windows Provides tips for the Microsoft Windows user. The Windows tips
| |
| compare OS/2 tasks to similar tasks in Windows.
| |
| Expert Provides advanced tips for the more experienced OS/2 user.
| |
| You can move throughout the tutorial at your own pace and review the topics in
| |
| any order.
| |
| | |
| Using the Desktop and Its Objects 26/2+
| |
| | |
| The icons that you see on the Desktop are called objects. Some of these objects
| |
| are folders. Folders are objects that contain other objects and folders. Think
| |
| of the Desktop as one big folder or the main folder that contains everything you
| |
| need to use OS/2. If you are familiar with DOS and Microsoft** Windows** you
| |
| can think of the Desktop folder as a directory and the folders it contains as
| |
| subdirectories. Other types of objects are data files, program files, or device
| |
| files.
| |
| Note: Throughout this book, the Desktop is also referred to as the Workplace
| |
| Shell*.
| |
| When you look at the Desktop, you will see the following objects:
| |
| The OS/2 System folder contains objects you can use to set up OS/2 the way you
| |
| want it. You can use these objects to change your mouse for left-handed use or
| |
| to speed up the click rate, as well as to change the colors and look of the
| |
| Desktop.
| |
| The Information folder contains online information, including Using OS/2 (the
| |
| online tutorial), and the Master Help Index, and online books, including
| |
| Command Reference, Glossary, Printing in OS/2, Application Considerations,
| |
| Windows Programs in OS/2, Performance Considerations,Using Multimedia, and REXX
| |
| Information. See Using the Information.
| |
| The Templates folder contains object models (templates) for the different types
| |
| of objects in OS/2. These templates make it easy for you to create new objects
| |
| for files, folders, programs, and other objects. See Using Templates.
| |
| The LaunchPad contains the objects you use most often. You can also add other
| |
| objects to the LaunchPad. For more information about using the LaunchPad, refer
| |
| to "Using the LaunchPad" later in this chapter.
| |
| During installation, if OS/2 recognizes that your computer has an audio card,
| |
| multimedia support is automatically installed and your Desktop also will
| |
| include the following:
| |
| The Multimedia folder contains the multimedia applications that are supported
| |
| by your computer. You can find out more about these Multimedia objects in the
| |
| online Multimedia book, located in the Information folder.
| |
| During installation, if OS/2 finds Windows programs already installed on your
| |
| computer, your Desktop also will include these icons.
| |
| The Windows Programs folder contains program objects for the Windows programs
| |
| you had installed before you installed OS/2.
| |
| The WIN-OS/2 Groups folder contains program objects for the Windows Groups
| |
| programs that were created under the Windows Program Manager.
| |
| To find out more about these Windows program objects, refer to the online book
| |
| Windows Programs in OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Using Pop-up Menus 27/3
| |
| | |
| Now that you know a little bit about the objects on the Desktop, you should also
| |
| know that each object has its own menu known as a pop-up menu. Pop-up menus
| |
| contain items that relate specifically to an object as well as items that are
| |
| common to all objects. Some of the standard pop-up menu items include:
| |
| Open Opens an object or folder and displays its contents, starts a program, or
| |
| displays a data file. Selecting Open is the same as double-clicking on an
| |
| object. Some items have an arrow to the right of Open that lets you choose how
| |
| you want your icons to be displayed. You have three choices:
| |
| Icon View Displays the icons randomly within the folder.
| |
| Tree View Displays the objects in a hierarchy.
| |
| Details View Displays the properties of the objects (for example, the date
| |
| and time the object was created, the full name of the object, and any
| |
| other special attributes associated with the object).
| |
| Settings Opens the Settings notebook for the object. The Settings notebook
| |
| looks like a book with tabs and enables you to view and change the current
| |
| settings for the object.
| |
| Help Displays general help information about the object. Select the arrow to
| |
| the right of Help to display a list of the types of help available for the
| |
| object.
| |
| Help Index Displays an alphabetic list of available help topics for the
| |
| active program.
| |
| General Help Displays help information about the active window. This is
| |
| the same information you would see if you were to select Help from the
| |
| pop-up menu or press the F1 key while the open window is active.
| |
| Using Help Explains all the ways you can get help for objects on the
| |
| Desktop.
| |
| Keys Help Explains the different groups of keys you can use with OS/2.
| |
| When you select a specific group, additional help is displayed with a list
| |
| of the keys provided for the group.
| |
| Create another Lets you create another object from the pop-up menu and works
| |
| the same as if you were to drag a template from the Templates folder.
| |
| Copy Makes a duplicate of the selected object and its contents.
| |
| Move Lets you move an object to a new location anywhere on the Desktop.
| |
| Create shadow Creates a duplicate of an object but differs from a copy in that
| |
| it automatically exchanges data between the shadow and the original object.
| |
| When you make changes in the shadow object, the original object is updated with
| |
| the same data.
| |
| Pickup and Drop Enables you to move an object and perform other tasks before
| |
| you drop the object in its new location. Drop will not be displayed on the
| |
| pop-up menu until you have selected Pickup.
| |
| Window Displays additional menu items that enable you to manage the size and
| |
| location of the window and close the open window.
| |
| Find Helps you locate any object in the system.
| |
| Arrange and Undo Arrange Organizes the objects on the Desktop or the open
| |
| active window in horizontal rows across the top of the screen. Undo Arrange
| |
| places the objects in the location where they were before you selected Arrange.
| |
| Undo Arrange will not be displayed on the pop-up menu until you have selected
| |
| Arrange.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| The Desktop has its own pop-up menu, and each object has its own pop-up menu.
| |
| To display the pop-up menu for the Desktop, try the following: c.
| |
| 1. Move the mouse pointer to an empty area on the Desktop.
| |
| 2. Press mouse button 2 to display the Desktop pop-up menu.
| |
| Look at the menu items on the pop-up menu. The Desktop pop-up menu
| |
| contains items that no other pop-up menu has - Lockup now, Shut down, and
| |
| System Setup.
| |
| To display the pop-up menu for an object, try the following. In this example,
| |
| you will display the pop-up menu for the OS/2 System object. c.
| |
| 1. Move the mouse pointer to OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the object.
| |
| Notice that some of the items on the pop-up menu for the object are
| |
| different from those you saw on the Desktop pop-up. Each object has menu
| |
| items that are exclusive to that object.
| |
| For more information about pop-up menus, select the menus topic in the Master
| |
| Help Index, and then select any of the topics of interest to you.
| |
| | |
| Using Settings Notebooks 28/3
| |
| | |
| Each object has its own Settings notebook. The Settings notebook enables you to
| |
| customize settings for each object. Just as the pop-up menus for an object have
| |
| exclusive and common menu items, the Settings notebooks have exclusive settings
| |
| pages. Some of the standard settings pages are as follows:
| |
| View Use the View page to select how icons and their text are displayed.
| |
| Include Use the Include page to include objects that you want in your folder
| |
| and exclude objects you don't want in your folder.
| |
| Sort Use the Sort page to determine the menu items listed when you select the
| |
| arrow to the right of Sort in the pop-up menu. You determine how you want the
| |
| objects in folders sorted by selecting the items from the pop-up menu.
| |
| Background Use the Background page to select an image or color to display in
| |
| the background of any open folder, including the Desktop. You can select a
| |
| different image or color for each and every folder on the Desktop.
| |
| Menu Use the menu page to customize your pop-up menu items. You can add,
| |
| delete, or change the items on the pop-up menu or the cascaded menu that is
| |
| displayed when you select the arrow to the right of a menu item.
| |
| File Use the File page to view the file name and path of a file object. You
| |
| can also define the object as a work area object. A work-area folder lets you
| |
| put together objects that are related to a specific task. For more information
| |
| about the Files page, select files topic from the Master Help Index and then
| |
| select File information about objects. For more information about work-area
| |
| folders, select the folders topic from the Master Help Index and then select
| |
| Creating a work-area folder.
| |
| Window Use the Window page to customize the window behavior for each object on
| |
| the Desktop. Window behavior includes how and where you want your object to be
| |
| minimized, how you want the window to open , and which button (hide or
| |
| minimize) you want to appear on the window. every time you double-click on it.
| |
| General Use the General page to change the name or the icon displayed for the
| |
| folder currently selected or open.
| |
| There are additional settings pages available, but the pages listed above are
| |
| some of the most common. You can get help for settings pages by selecting the
| |
| Help push button, which is available on every page.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| Use the following procedure as a guide to displaying the Settings notebook for
| |
| an object:
| |
| 1. Move the mouse pointer to OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the object.
| |
| 3. Select Settings to display the Settings notebook for the object.
| |
| Notice that each page is identified by a tab on the right side of the
| |
| notebook.
| |
| 4. Select the Window tab to display the Window page.
| |
| Look at the bottom of the page. You will see Window - Page 1 of 2, which
| |
| lets you know that there is more than one page associated with the Window
| |
| tab.
| |
| 5. Click on the right arrow at the bottom of the page to display page 2 for
| |
| the Window tab.
| |
| Some of the tabs in the notebooks can have up to 3 or 4 pages with which
| |
| they are associated. Simply select the right arrow to move forward
| |
| through the pages and the left arrow to move backward through the pages.
| |
| You can also use the arrows instead of the tabs to page through the
| |
| notebooks.
| |
| 6. Double-click on the title-bar icon to close the notebook.
| |
| When you make changes to the Settings notebook, the changes take effect
| |
| immediately after you close the notebook.
| |
| | |
| Finding Information 29/2+
| |
| | |
| OS/2 provides plenty of information online, in the form of help information and
| |
| books, that you can use as you are working.
| |
| | |
| Getting Help 30/3+
| |
| | |
| Help information is available for every object on the Desktop, every menu item
| |
| on pop-up and pull-down menus, and every place you see a Help push button.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| If you want to learn how to use the online help functions, be sure the Using
| |
| OS/2 tutorial is displayed. Then use the following procedure:
| |
| 1. Select the About Help push button.
| |
| 2. Review the panels about OS/2 Help.
| |
| 3. Read the instructions on the right side of the window and in the
| |
| information box.
| |
| 4. Select the Practice push button to try it out.
| |
| Return to this book when you are finished.
| |
| | |
| F1 Help 31/4
| |
| | |
| F1 help provides information about objects, pop-up menu items, entry fields, and
| |
| push buttons. You use the F1 help by selecting or highlighting an item and
| |
| pressing the F1 key on your keyboard.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| To get F1 help for each item on a pop-up menu, try the following:
| |
| 1. Click on the down arrow icon in the upper-left corner of the tutorial
| |
| window. The title-bar icon menu for the OS/2 tutorial is displayed.
| |
| 2. Press the Down Arrow key on your keyboard and watch the focus box move
| |
| from menu item to menu item. Try this several times and stop at the Close
| |
| menu item.
| |
| 3. Now press the F1 key on your keyboard.
| |
| A helpful explanation about why you might want to use this menu item is
| |
| displayed.
| |
| 4. Double-click on the title-bar icon in the upper-left corner of the help
| |
| window, next to Help for Close, to close the help window.
| |
| Return to this book when you are finished.
| |
| | |
| Help Push Button 32/4
| |
| | |
| Another way to get help is to use the Help push button available on most of the
| |
| object pop-up menus and notebook pages.
| |
| These Help push buttons let you work with the object while you learn how to use
| |
| it.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| To learn how to use the Help push buttons, try the following:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Solid Color Palette.
| |
| 4. Click on the Edit Color push button.
| |
| 5. When the Edit Color window is displayed, move it to the left side of the
| |
| screen to make room for the help panel.
| |
| 6. Click on the Help push button.
| |
| 7. Read the information provided in the help window. Notice the highlighted
| |
| words within the help text. These words indicate that additional
| |
| information is available.
| |
| You can use the Edit Color window while the Help information is displayed.
| |
| 8. When you are finished reading the help information, you can close the help
| |
| window by double-clicking on the title-bar icon in the upper-left corner
| |
| of the help window.
| |
| Another way to get help is by using an online book called the Master Help
| |
| Index. For more information refer to "Mastering the Master Help Index" in Part
| |
| 3 of this book.
| |
| | |
| Viewing Information Online 33/3+
| |
| | |
| When you installed OS/2, online information and books were added to the
| |
| Information folder. These books and information describe information about
| |
| printing in OS/2, using Windows programs in OS/2, program and performance
| |
| considerations, using OS/2 multimedia programs, a book that identifies
| |
| trademarks used in the online information, a glossary of terms and the Master
| |
| Help Index, which is your main online help resource. The following books are in
| |
| the Information folder.
| |
| | |
| Master Help Index 34/4
| |
| | |
| The Master Help Index provides help for practically everything you want to know
| |
| about using OS/2. It is set up like a dictionary that has tabs. These tabs can
| |
| help you find topics quickly. After you select a tab, use the scroll bar to
| |
| page down to the topic you are looking for. You will sometimes find that after
| |
| you select a topic, a secondary list of topics is displayed. This list of
| |
| topics is related to the topic you selected.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| To learn about the Master Help Index:
| |
| 1. Select the About Help push button.
| |
| 2. Select the Using the Master Help Index topic.
| |
| 3. Read the instructions on the right side of the window and in the
| |
| information box.
| |
| 4. Select the Practice push button to try it out.
| |
| Hint:
| |
| You can use the keys on your keyboard to move to sections in the
| |
| index. Simply press the key that corresponds to the first letter of
| |
| the topic, and the entries that start with that letter will be
| |
| displayed.
| |
| For more information refer to "Mastering the Master Help Index" in Part 3 of
| |
| this book.
| |
| | |
| Command Reference 35/4
| |
| | |
| If you are familiar with using a command line or you want to learn how to use
| |
| one, you will find the online Command Reference to be very helpful. This book
| |
| contains descriptions of all the commands you can use at an OS/2 command prompt.
| |
| You might already be familiar with some of the commands because some are
| |
| actually identical to those you have used with DOS. Some of the commands are
| |
| new and some contain additional parameters specific for use with OS/2. For more
| |
| information about command lines, see "Using Command Prompts" in Part 3 of this
| |
| book.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| To learn how to use the Command Reference, review the "Using the Command
| |
| Reference" topic located in the About Help section of the tutorial. When you
| |
| are finished, close the tutorial and try the following steps:
| |
| 1. Open the Information folder.
| |
| 2. Open the Command Reference.
| |
| 3. Select the + sign next to OS/2 Commands By Name to display all the OS/2
| |
| commands.
| |
| 4. Open the command for which you want information.
| |
| Note: You might see + signs next to some of the commands in the list. The +
| |
| signs indicate that additional information pertaining to these commands is
| |
| available. Click on the + sign to view the additional topics.
| |
| | |
| Glossary 36/4
| |
| | |
| The Glossary provides definitions for terms used in the OS/2 information. The
| |
| Glossary looks like a dictionary and can be used in the same way the Master Help
| |
| Index is used. You can use the tutorial to find out more about the Glossary.
| |
| | |
| REXX Information 37/4
| |
| | |
| This book provides information to acquaint you with the REXX language and
| |
| programming concepts.
| |
| | |
| Windows Programs in OS/2 38/4
| |
| | |
| This book provides information about using OS/2 and Windows programs together
| |
| under OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Application Considerations 39/4
| |
| | |
| This book provides information about the settings or tasks you need to perform
| |
| to enable certain programs to run under OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Performance Considerations 40/4
| |
| | |
| This book provides information about how to improve the performance of your
| |
| system, memory management, model-specific computer problems, and COM ports.
| |
| | |
| Printing in OS/2 41/4
| |
| | |
| This book provides information for everything you want to know about printing in
| |
| OS/2-from installing a printer to solving printer problems.
| |
| | |
| Multimedia 42/4
| |
| | |
| This book provides information pertaining to the multimedia programs available
| |
| with OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Trademarks 43/4
| |
| | |
| This book provides trademark information for trademarks mentioned in the online
| |
| books and online help information.
| |
| | |
| Using the LaunchPad 44/2+
| |
| | |
| The LaunchPad holds the objects and push buttons that you use most often. Some
| |
| of the most commonly used objects are already on the LaunchPad.
| |
| | |
| Using LaunchPad Push Buttons 45/3+
| |
| | |
| The push buttons at the left side of the LaunchPad let you secure your computer
| |
| while you are away, shut down your computer when you are done working for the
| |
| day, locate things on the Desktop, and display a list of all the windows you
| |
| have open on the Desktop. The following describes the push buttons on the
| |
| LaunchPad.
| |
| | |
| Lockup Push Button 46/4
| |
| | |
| You can use Lockup to lock up your computer keyboard and display at any time.
| |
| By locking up your computer, you can keep others from using your computer while
| |
| you are away.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| To lock up your computer, you must first decide on a password. Your password
| |
| can be from 1 to 15 characters long. Think of a password now, write it down,
| |
| and put it in a safe place. Then try the following:
| |
| 1. Select the Lockup push button on the left side of the LaunchPad.
| |
| 2. Read the text in the window and type your password in the Password field
| |
| next to the blinking cursor.
| |
| 3. Press the Enter key on your keyboard and the cursor will start blinking in
| |
| the Password (for verification) field.
| |
| 4. Type the same password again to verify that you entered the password
| |
| correctly.
| |
| 5. Select the OK push button.
| |
| 6. Select the Lockup push button on the LaunchPad. The OS/2 Logo screen is
| |
| displayed and a Help push button is available at the bottom right side of
| |
| the screen.
| |
| 7. Type your password, and then press Enter. You will return to the Desktop.
| |
| Note: After you have specified your password, your screen will automatically
| |
| lock up within three minutes if there is no action being performed on the
| |
| Desktop. Realize that it is very important to be sure to:
| |
| REMEMBER YOUR PASSWORD!
| |
| After you have decided upon a password and entered it into the Password window,
| |
| you will not see the password window again unless you decide at some later time
| |
| that you want to change your password. Now, whenever you select Lockup on the
| |
| LaunchPad, your computer will be automatically locked up.
| |
| To change your password, or any of the other settings associated with the
| |
| Lockup push button, you must use the settings menu choice in the Desktop pop-up
| |
| menu.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| To see the Lockup settings available and to change your password, try the
| |
| following:
| |
| 1. Using mouse button 2, click on an open area on the Desktop. The Desktop
| |
| pop-up menu is displayed.
| |
| 2. Select Settings to display the Settings notebook for the Desktop.
| |
| 3. Select the Lockup tab.
| |
| Notice that the Lockup tab has three pages associated with it. The bottom
| |
| right corner of the page is labeled Lockup - Page 1 of 3.
| |
| The page currently displayed is the Timeout page. Use this page to change
| |
| the current settings for how much time you want to pass before the
| |
| computer automatically locks up. Timeout is set for 3 minutes by default.
| |
| The second page enables you to decide what graphics or colors you want to
| |
| be displayed while your computer is locked up. The Lockup screen is set
| |
| to display the OS/2 Logo screen by default. The screen is displayed in
| |
| the Preview area of the page.
| |
| Page 3 is the page you use to change your current password.
| |
| 4. Move the mouse pointer to the right arrow and select it until the Password
| |
| Page in the notebook is displayed.
| |
| 5. Type your new password in the Password field and then again in the
| |
| Password (for verification) field. If you need help, select the Help push
| |
| button.
| |
| 6. Select OK.
| |
| Remember to lock up your computer when you are away to prevent someone from
| |
| using it.
| |
| | |
| Find Push Button 47/2+
| |
| | |
| The Find push button helps you locate objects in the system. If you can't
| |
| remember where to find your favorite game, you can use the Find option to help
| |
| you locate it.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| To learn how to use Find, try the following:
| |
| 1. Select Find on the LaunchPad. The Find Objects window is displayed.
| |
| 2. Select the Help push button at the bottom of the window.
| |
| 3. Read the information about how to use Find. Be sure to read through to
| |
| the end of the help information, where you can find a list of the fields
| |
| available on the Find Objects window. You can double-click on the
| |
| highlighted items to display additional information about how to use these
| |
| fields. Be sure to select the Previous push button at the bottom of the
| |
| help window to return to the original help information for Find.
| |
| 4. Double-click on the title-bar icon in the help window when you are
| |
| finished using the help information. This will close the help window.
| |
| | |
| Window List Push Button 48/3
| |
| | |
| You can use the Window List push button to help you locate open objects, reopen
| |
| minimized windows, or close open windows.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| To learn about the Window List, try the following:
| |
| 1. Select the Window List push button.
| |
| A list of open active windows is displayed. The Desktop is the first
| |
| window in the list. The list also includes the LaunchPad and any other
| |
| active objects or folders you might have already opened.
| |
| 2. Select the title-bar icon located in the upper-left corner of the window.
| |
| 3. Select the arrow to the right of Help.
| |
| 4. Select General Help.
| |
| 5. Read the information in the help window to learn more about the Window
| |
| List and how to use it.
| |
| | |
| Shut Down Push Button 49/3
| |
| | |
| After you have given OS/2 its daily workout, you must take care and remember to
| |
| shut down your computer. Shut down is the cool-down exercise for this powerful
| |
| operating system. When you shut down your computer, information about which
| |
| windows are open and where they are located on the Desktop is saved in the
| |
| storage buffer on your hard disk. When you select Shut down, you will see a
| |
| window asking if you are ready to shut down. Simply select the OK push button
| |
| and you will be on your way to performing a successful shutdown. Remember to use
| |
| the Shut down option when you are finished working for the day.
| |
| Note: Be sure to check all programs for unsaved information (such as data files
| |
| you might be editing) before you start the shutdown procedure.
| |
| Note: Never turn off the power on your computer until you have completed a
| |
| shutdown.
| |
| | |
| Using Objects on the LaunchPad 50/3+
| |
| | |
| The objects on the right side of the LaunchPad are shadows of objects that
| |
| already exist elsewhere in OS/2. A shadow object is linked to the original
| |
| object but it can reside in a different location on the Desktop. The purpose of
| |
| a shadow object is to allow you to use an object from the Desktop whether or not
| |
| it is located on drive C. When you make a change to the shadow, the change also
| |
| occurs in the original. By creating a shadow of the original object instead of
| |
| creating a copy, you can save space on your hard disk and still use the
| |
| functions of the object. The following are the objects on the LaunchPad:
| |
| | |
| Drive A Object 51/4
| |
| | |
| The Drive A object gives you access to the information provided on a diskette
| |
| you insert into the diskette drive slot on your computer. When you select the
| |
| drawer button for the Drive A object, you will see that it contains the Drive C
| |
| object (if Drive C is the drive where you installed OS/2). This object gives you
| |
| access to the contents of Drive C in your computer. For more information about
| |
| accessing drives, see "Using Drives" in Part 3 of this book.
| |
| | |
| OS/2 Window Object 52/4
| |
| | |
| The OS/2 Window object gives you access to an OS/2 command prompt in a window on
| |
| the Desktop. You can use the OS/2 command prompt in much the same way as a DOS
| |
| command prompt - by typing a command at the command prompt.
| |
| When you select the drawer button for the OS/2 Window object, you will see that
| |
| it contains the DOS Window object. The DOS Window object provides you access to
| |
| a DOS command prompt in a window on the Desktop. Here you can use the DOS
| |
| commands with which you are already familiar. For more information about using
| |
| a command prompt, refer to the online Command Reference, or the "Using Command
| |
| Prompts" in Part 3 of this book.
| |
| | |
| Using OS/2 Object 53/4
| |
| | |
| The Using OS/2 object gives you instant access to the OS/2 tutorial. Use the
| |
| tutorial to learn something new, to refresh your memory about how to do
| |
| something, or to experience hands-on practice using OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Shredder Object 54/4
| |
| | |
| The Shredder provides a quick way for you to delete files, objects, or folders
| |
| that you no longer have a use for. For more information about the Shredder, see
| |
| the online Master Help Index.
| |
| | |
| Printer Object 55/4
| |
| | |
| The printer object is added to the LaunchPad only if a printer was set up when
| |
| you installed OS/2. You might not have a printer object on your LaunchPad. If
| |
| you want to know how to set up a printer, use the information provided in the
| |
| online Printing in OS/2 book located in the Information folder.
| |
| | |
| Adding Objects to the LaunchPad 56/3
| |
| | |
| You can easily add any object you want to the LaunchPad by simply dragging the
| |
| object to the right side of the LaunchPad. The LaunchPad will expand to include
| |
| the object on the panel.
| |
| Try It!
| |
| When adding an object to the LaunchPad, use the following example as a guide.
| |
| In this example, the System Clock is added to the LaunchPad:
| |
| 1. Open the OS/2 System folder.
| |
| 2. Open the System Setup folder.
| |
| 3. Move the mouse pointer over the System Clock object.
| |
| 4. Press and hold mouse button 2 and move the object in between two objects
| |
| on the LaunchPad until you see a single, solid black bar. This black bar
| |
| indicates where the object will be added to the LaunchPad.
| |
| For more information about the LaunchPad, refer to the Master Help Index, the
| |
| Using OS/2 tutorial, and the help information provided with the LaunchPad.
| |
| | |
| =Part 3 - Using OS/2 57/1=
| |
| | |
| | |
| ==Customizing Your System 58/1+==
| |
| | |
| The System Setup object contains objects that help you customize your system.
| |
| To open System Setup:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| or:
| |
| 1. Point to an empty area on the Desktop.
| |
| 2. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 3. Select System Setup.
| |
| | |
| Color Palette 59/2+
| |
| | |
| The Color Palette is used to customize the colors on your screen. You can change
| |
| the color of the following parts of the Workplace Shell*:
| |
| o Desktop
| |
| o Titles of the objects on the Desktop and in folders
| |
| o Different parts of the windows, such as push buttons, scroll bars, and the
| |
| background.
| |
| There are two colors palettes, one is a Solid Color Palette for low resolution
| |
| displays and one is a Mixed Color Palette for high resolution displays. The
| |
| Solid Color Palette contains 16 solid colors and the Mixed Color palette
| |
| contains 256 mixed colors.
| |
| Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration of how to use the Color
| |
| Palettes.
| |
| The following steps can be used for both the Solid and the Mixed Color
| |
| Palettes.
| |
| | |
| Changing Screen Colors 60/3
| |
| | |
| To globally change the color of an item (for example, change the color of the
| |
| background in every window):
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Color Palette.
| |
| 4. Make sure that the item you want to change is visible.
| |
| 5. Point to a color on the color palette.
| |
| 6. Press and hold Alt.
| |
| 7. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 8. Drag the color to the item you want to change. The mouse pointer changes
| |
| to a paint bucket.
| |
| 9. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| 10. Release Alt. The color of all instances of the item changes to the new
| |
| color.
| |
| 11. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 12. Double-click.
| |
| To change the color of a specific item (for example, change the color of the
| |
| vertical scroll bar in this window only):
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Color Palette.
| |
| 4. Make sure that the item you want to change is visible.
| |
| 5. Point to a color on the color palette.
| |
| 6. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 7. Drag the color to the item you want to change.
| |
| 8. Release mouse button 2. The color of the item changes to the new color.
| |
| 9. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 10. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Changing the Color of Object Titles 61/3
| |
| | |
| To change the color of the titles of objects:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Color Palette.
| |
| 4. Make sure an object title is visible in the folder. (You cannot change an
| |
| individual title color. Changing one title color changes every title
| |
| color in the folder.)
| |
| 5. Point to a color on the Color Palette.
| |
| 6. Press and hold Ctrl.
| |
| 7. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 8. Drag the color to a title in the folder.
| |
| 9. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| 10. Release Ctrl. The color of every title in the folder changes to the new
| |
| color.
| |
| | |
| Changing the Colors on the Color Palette 62/3
| |
| | |
| You can change the colors available on the Color Palette:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Color Palette.
| |
| 4. Select the color on the Color Palette that you want to change.
| |
| 5. Select Edit color. A window appears in which you can make adjustments to
| |
| or change the color. For more information about the choices available in
| |
| this window, select the Help push button.
| |
| 6. When the correct color appears in the box on the color bar in the window,
| |
| point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 7. Double-click. The Color Palette window is displayed with the new color.
| |
| | |
| Country 63/2
| |
| | |
| When you installed OS/2, you determined settings like date, time, numbers, and
| |
| currency of a specific country. The Country settings notebook lets you change
| |
| these settings.
| |
| You can select a specific country and have all the formats changed
| |
| automatically, or you can make individual format selections.
| |
| To change country formats:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Select Country.
| |
| Tip Using the Selective Install object in the System Setup folder, you can
| |
| reconfigure the operating system to support another national language
| |
| without having to reinstall the entire operating system (see Selective
| |
| Install).
| |
| For country-dependent information, refer to the COUNTRY statement in the online
| |
| Command Reference.
| |
| | |
| Device Driver Install 64/2
| |
| | |
| Many devices that you attach to a computer, such as a CD-ROM drive, mouse,
| |
| display, and printer come with a device driver diskette.
| |
| The device driver diskette (sometimes called a device
| |
| support diskette) contains the code needed by the computer to recognize and
| |
| operate the device.
| |
| The Device Driver Install object is used to install any device driver except
| |
| those for printers and plotters. To install a device driver for a printer or
| |
| plotter, see Installing a Printer.
| |
| To install a device driver (other than one for a printer or plotter):
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Device Driver Install.
| |
| 4. Insert the device driver diskette.
| |
| 5. Select Install.
| |
| 6. Select the device driver to install from the list.
| |
| 7. Select OK.
| |
| For additional information, refer to the documentation that came with the
| |
| device.
| |
| Note: Do not use the Device Driver Install object to install device drivers
| |
| found on the OS/2 Installation diskettes.
| |
| | |
| Font Palette 65/2+
| |
| | |
| The Font Palette allows you to:
| |
| o Change the typeface of any text in the Workplace Shell interface
| |
| o Change sample typefaces currently available on the Font Palette
| |
| o Add new fonts to your system
| |
| o Delete existing fonts from your system
| |
| A font is a collection of characters and symbols of a particular size and style
| |
| used to produce text on displays and printers. When you install OS/2, the IBM
| |
| Core Fonts are automatically installed, unless you specify otherwise. The IBM
| |
| Core Fonts can be used by your display and IBM LaserPrinter, HP** LaserJet**,
| |
| and PostScript** printers.
| |
| The IBM Core Fonts consist of a set of 13 Adobe** Type 1 fonts that work with
| |
| the Adobe Type Manager** (ATM). The table that follows lists the IBM Core
| |
| Fonts.
| |
| ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
| |
| 3 IBM Core Fonts 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 FAMILY NAME 3 TYPEFACE 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Times New Roman** 3 Times New Roman 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 3 Times New Roman Bold 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 3 Times New Roman Bold 3
| |
| 3 3 Italic 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 3 Times New Roman Italic 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Helvetica** 3 Helvetica 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 3 Helvetica Bold 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 3 Helvetica Bold Italic 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 3 Helvetica Italic 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Courier 3 Courier 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 3 Courier Bold 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 3 Courier Bold Italic 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 3 Courier Italic 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Symbol Set 3 Symbol Set 3
| |
| @DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
| |
| The Adobe Type Manager is an integral part of the OS/2 operating system and
| |
| works with existing OS/2 and Windows application programs to produce the
| |
| sharpest possible fonts on the screen and on the printed page. Because it
| |
| incorporates PostScript outline font technology, the ATM program eliminates
| |
| jagged fonts so that your screen can display high-quality typefaces of any size
| |
| or style. The ATM program also enables even inexpensive printers to print
| |
| PostScript language fonts that are crisp and smooth.
| |
| Note: If you want to use the fonts for both OS/2 and Windows applications, you
| |
| must install the font files using both the Font Palette and the ATM Control
| |
| Panel.
| |
| | |
| Changing Fonts 66/3
| |
| | |
| The Font Palette window displays sample typefaces of eight of the fonts
| |
| installed on your system. You can use these samples to change any text in the
| |
| Workplace Shell interface.
| |
| To change the typeface of text:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Font Palette.
| |
| 4. Point to the sample typeface you want to use.
| |
| 5. Press and hold mouse button 2. The mouse pointer changes to a pencil.
| |
| 6. Drag the sample typeface to the object whose text font you want to change.
| |
| If you drag a sample typeface to an object on the Desktop, the text of all
| |
| the objects on the Desktop changes to that typeface. If you drag a sample
| |
| typeface to an open object, such as a folder, the typeface will change
| |
| only for the objects within the folder.
| |
| 7. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| | |
| Selecting Sample Typefaces for the Font Palette 67/3
| |
| | |
| To change which sample typefaces appear on the Font Palette:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Font Palette.
| |
| 4. Select the sample typeface you want to change.
| |
| 5. Select Edit font. The Edit Font window appears.
| |
| 6. Select the down arrow for the Name field.
| |
| 7. Select a new typeface from the list.
| |
| 8. Select the Style and Size if desired.
| |
| 9. Select the appropriate Emphasis if desired.
| |
| 10. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 11. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Adding Fonts to Your System 68/3
| |
| | |
| There are thousands of additional font styles in the Adobe Type 1 font-file
| |
| format that are available for use with the OS/2 operating system. These fonts
| |
| require two files for each typeface. These files have an AFM and PFB file-name
| |
| extension. The Font Palette converts the AFM file to an OFM file when it
| |
| installs the new font.
| |
| Note: If the set of fonts you want to install is supplied on multiple
| |
| diskettes, you might need to copy the files into a temporary directory, because
| |
| the font installation process requires that both files for a given typeface be
| |
| available at the same time.
| |
| To add more fonts to your system:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Font Palette.
| |
| 4. Select Edit font. The Edit Font window appears.
| |
| 5. Select Add.
| |
| 6. Follow the instructions on the Add Font window; then select Add.
| |
| 7. Select the names of the font files that you want to install on your
| |
| system.
| |
| 8. Select Add.
| |
| 9. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 10. Double-click.
| |
| See Selecting Sample Typefaces for the Font Palette if you want to add one of
| |
| the new typefaces to the Font Palette samples.
| |
| | |
| Removing Fonts from Your System 69/3
| |
| | |
| To remove a font from your system:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Font Palette.
| |
| 4. Select Edit font. The Edit Font window appears.
| |
| 5. Select Delete.
| |
| 6. Select the names of the font files that you want to delete from your
| |
| system.
| |
| 7. Select Delete.
| |
| 8. When the files have been deleted, point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 9. Double-click.
| |
| Note: Removing a font deletes the corresponding files from your hard disk
| |
| unless they are needed by the Windows Adobe Type Manager. For more information
| |
| about the Windows Adobe Type Manager, see the online Windows Programs in OS/2
| |
| book located in the Information folder.
| |
| | |
| Keyboard 70/2
| |
| | |
| The Keyboard object is used to adjust the blink rate of the cursor, change the
| |
| speed at which a key repeats when held down, and customize the keyboard to make
| |
| it easier to use for those with special needs.
| |
| To customize the keyboard:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Keyboard.
| |
| 4. Select the tab for the setting you want to change.
| |
| 5. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 6. Double-click.
| |
| Note: If the keyboard speed is set in Windows, when that WIN-OS/2 session is
| |
| started, the keyboard speed for the entire system is reset and remains reset
| |
| even after that WIN-OS/2 session is closed.
| |
| Select the Special Needs tab to change the settings to meet your special
| |
| requirements. For example, you can make keys "sticky" so that you can press
| |
| and release a series of keys (for example, Ctrl+Alt+Del) sequentially but have
| |
| the keys operate as if the keys were pressed and released at the same time.
| |
| To enable sticky keys:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Keyboard.
| |
| 4. Select Special Needs.
| |
| 5. Select the Settings activation On radio button.
| |
| 6. For each key you want to act as a sticky key, press Shift three times;
| |
| then press the key you want to stay stuck down.
| |
| 7. Repeat the previous step for each key that you want to operate as a sticky
| |
| key.
| |
| 8. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 9. Double-click.
| |
| To deactivate sticky keys, press and release each sticky key once.
| |
| | |
| Add Programs 71/2
| |
| | |
| Some programs do not place a program object in a folder or on the Desktop during
| |
| their installation. Without the object, you cannot use the Workplace Shell to
| |
| start the program. To correct this situation, you can use the Add Programs
| |
| object. Add Programs uses a database to identify possible programs, set the
| |
| correct DOS settings, and select an appropriate program object for the newly
| |
| added OS/2, DOS, and Windows programs.
| |
| You can create your own database to be used with Add Programs. For more
| |
| information, see the OS/2 Tutorial, the help information provided with Add
| |
| Programs or the Master Help Index.
| |
| To add programs to the Desktop:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Add Programs. The Add Programs to the Desktop window appears.
| |
| 4. Select Add new programs
| |
| 5. Select Ok. A message is displayed when the process is complete.
| |
| 6. Select Ok.
| |
| The Add Programs program creates a DOS Programs folder, a Windows Programs
| |
| folder, and a Windows Groups folder.
| |
| Some Windows groups contain DOS programs. After you add them to the Desktop,
| |
| these DOS program objects are placed in the WIN-OS/2 Groups folder and also in
| |
| a DOS folder if you added DOS programs.
| |
| Tip If your computer had a previous version of the OS/2 operating system,
| |
| you might see a folder on your Desktop with the same name as one of your
| |
| old groups. This folder contains program objects that represent your old
| |
| programs; however, Add Programs also puts these programs and program
| |
| objects in new folders (DOS Programs or Windows Programs folders).
| |
| Use the program objects in these new folders rather than the old group name
| |
| folders because the preselected settings will work best for the performance
| |
| of your program.
| |
| | |
| Mouse 72/2
| |
| | |
| The Mouse object is used to change the behavior of your mouse. You can:
| |
| o Control the speed of the mouse pointer
| |
| o Change the look of the pointer
| |
| o Change the length, size and color of the pointer tail
| |
| o Change the mouse for left-hand use
| |
| o Customize the Alt, Shift, and Ctrl key combinations
| |
| o Change the length and look of the mouse pointer tail
| |
| Note: You can change the speed of your mouse for your Windows sessions using
| |
| the Windows Control Panel. Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive
| |
| demonstration of how to customize mouse settings.
| |
| To change the mouse settings:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Mouse.
| |
| Use the Timings page to change the speed at which actions occur when you use
| |
| the mouse. Use the Setup page to customize the mouse for left-hand use or
| |
| right-hand use. If you change the setting, the button settings on the Mappings
| |
| page are automatically updated; however, you also can use the Mappings page to
| |
| customize them individually. Use the Comet Cursor page to change the length and
| |
| look of the mouse pointer's tail.
| |
| Tip Using the Selective Install object in the System Setup folder, you can
| |
| reconfigure the operating system to support another pointing device without
| |
| having to reinstall the entire operating system (see Selective Install).
| |
| | |
| Scheme Palette 73/2+
| |
| | |
| The Scheme Palette contains many different predefined color schemes. Each scheme
| |
| has a preset color for the following:
| |
| o Desktop
| |
| o Titles of the objects on the Desktop and in folders
| |
| o Different parts of the windows such as push buttons, scroll bars, and the
| |
| background.
| |
| You can use these schemes as they are, or you can change their colors. In
| |
| addition, you can also use the Scheme Palette to change the width of the
| |
| borders around the windows, and the font used.
| |
| | |
| Changing Color Schemes 74/3
| |
| | |
| To use a predefined scheme to change the colors of one folder or window:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Scheme Palette.
| |
| 4. Make sure that the folder or window you want to change is visible.
| |
| 5. Point to a scheme on the palette.
| |
| 6. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 7. Drag the color scheme to the window.
| |
| 8. Release mouse button 2. The window colors change to the new scheme.
| |
| | |
| Globally Changing Color Schemes 75/3
| |
| | |
| To use one of the predefined schemes to change the colors for all the folders
| |
| that do not have their colors individually set:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Scheme Palette.
| |
| 4. Point to a scheme on the palette.
| |
| 5. Press and hold Alt.
| |
| 6. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 7. Drag the color scheme to the Desktop.
| |
| 8. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| 9. Release Alt. The colors change to the new scheme.
| |
| | |
| Changing the Colors on the Scheme Palette 76/3
| |
| | |
| To change the colors within a scheme on the Scheme Palette:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Scheme Palette.
| |
| 4. Select the scheme on the Scheme Palette that you want to change.
| |
| 5. Select Edit Scheme.
| |
| 6. Select the part of the window (in the Window area field) whose color you
| |
| want to change.
| |
| 7. Select Edit Color. A window appears in which you can make adjustments to
| |
| or change the color. (For more information about the choices available in
| |
| this window, select the Help push button.)
| |
| 8. Adjust the color until the correct color appears in the box on the color
| |
| bar in the window.
| |
| 9. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 10. Double-click. The selected window part changes to the new color on the
| |
| Scheme Palette.
| |
| 11. When all the color changes have been made, point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 12. Double-click.
| |
| Tip You can point to an area on the sample palette and click mouse button 2
| |
| to select the part of the window to be changed, instead of using the Window
| |
| area field to select it. This reduces the amount of scrolling needed to
| |
| find the correct window part.
| |
| | |
| Changing the Fonts in a Scheme 77/3
| |
| | |
| To change the font of text within the scheme:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Scheme Palette.
| |
| 4. Select the scheme on the Scheme Palette that you want to change.
| |
| 5. Select Edit Scheme.
| |
| 6. Select the part of the window (in the Window area field) whose font you
| |
| want to change.
| |
| 7. Select Edit Font.
| |
| 8. Select the name, style, size, and emphasis that you want to use.
| |
| 9. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 10. Double-click. The font of the selected window part changes on the Scheme
| |
| Palette. For more information about fonts, see Font Palette.
| |
| Tip To display a colorful picture (bit map) on the background of your
| |
| folder windows or the Desktop folder:
| |
| 1. Display the pop-up menu for a folder.
| |
| 2. Select Settings.
| |
| 3. Select the Background tab.
| |
| 4. Select the Image radio button in the Background type field.
| |
| 5. Select the arrow to the right of the Image File field.
| |
| 6. Select a file with a .BMP file-name extension.
| |
| The image appears in the background of your folder.
| |
| | |
| Sound 78/2
| |
| | |
| The Sound object is used by an application to generate a warning beep. The beep
| |
| can be turned off.
| |
| You can indicate whether a beep should be heard when a warning message is
| |
| displayed or an invalid key is pressed. To customize the sound settings:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Sound.
| |
| Note: If you install OS/2 Multimedia additional sound options are available.
| |
| For more information, see the online Multimedia book.
| |
| | |
| Spooler 79/2+
| |
| | |
| The Spooler stores jobs that are waiting for an available printer or port. OS/2
| |
| includes a spooler for printouts you request in OS/2, DOS, and Windows sessions
| |
| (an instance of a command prompt or started program).
| |
| When you print, the system creates a spool file which is held in place in the
| |
| SPOOL directory. The SPOOL directory is created by the system during
| |
| installation. You can use the Spooler object to change the location of the
| |
| spooler path and to disable or enable the spooler.
| |
| | |
| Enabling the Spooler 80/3
| |
| | |
| To enable the spooler:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Spooler.
| |
| 4. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 5. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 6. Select Disable spooler
| |
| 7. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 8. Double-click. (Spooling takes effect immediately. You do not need to
| |
| restart your system.)
| |
| | |
| Changing the Spooler Path 81/3
| |
| | |
| Use this procedure if you print often, or if you print large jobs and need a
| |
| separate storage area, such as a large disk, for spool files. Be sure to wait
| |
| until all your jobs finish printing, or delete any pending jobs.
| |
| To change the spooler path:
| |
| 1. Select all the printer objects.
| |
| 2. Select Hold from the pop-up menu of each printer object.
| |
| 3. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 4. Open System Setup.
| |
| 5. Open Spooler. By default, the Spooler Settings notebook appears.
| |
| 6. Select Spool path.
| |
| 7. In the Spool path field, type the new path.
| |
| 8. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 9. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Changing the Print Priority 82/3
| |
| | |
| You can set the print priority higher or lower to adjust the speed at which
| |
| spooled print jobs are printed.
| |
| To set the print priority:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Spooler. By default, the Spooler Settings notebook appears.
| |
| 4. Select the Print priority page.
| |
| 5. Move the slider arm to select priority.
| |
| 6. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 7. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Disabling the Spooler 83/3
| |
| | |
| You might want to disable the spooler to print jobs that have a high-security
| |
| risk. Disabling the spooler prevents others from viewing your print jobs in a
| |
| printer-object window. However, you cannot disable spooling to a network
| |
| printer on a network server.
| |
| To disable the spooler:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Spooler.
| |
| 4. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 5. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 6. Select Enable spooler.
| |
| 7. Restart your system.
| |
| When the Spooler is disabled, your print jobs go directly to a printer.
| |
| However, a printout might contain material from different jobs mixed together.
| |
| | |
| System 84/2+
| |
| | |
| The System object is used to change system defaults. You can select how you
| |
| want a window that is already open to be displayed and where you want windows
| |
| that you have minimized to be displayed. This notebook is also used to specify
| |
| confirmation messages and to turn off the product information window. For more
| |
| information about each tab, select the help push button provided on each page.
| |
| | |
| Confirming Delete Actions 85/3
| |
| | |
| To specify if you want a confirmation message displayed each time you delete an
| |
| object or a folder:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open System.
| |
| 4. Select the Confirmations tab.
| |
| 5. Place a check mark next to each item you want a confirmation message for.
| |
| 6. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 7. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Directing Keyboard and Mouse Activity 86/3
| |
| | |
| To enable or disable the direction of any keyboard and mouse activity during the
| |
| startup of any Presentation Manager program.
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open System.
| |
| 4. Select the Input tab.
| |
| 5. Place a check mark next to Enable type ahead or Disable type ahead. (The
| |
| default is Enable type ahead.)
| |
| 6. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 7. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Resolving Title Conflicts 87/3
| |
| | |
| To specify how the system is to respond to title conflicts if you create, copy,
| |
| or move an object into a folder that already has an object with the same name:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open System.
| |
| 4. Select the Title tab.
| |
| 5. Select the choice that best describe how you want the system to respond
| |
| when a title conflict appears.
| |
| 6. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 7. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Changing System Defaults 88/3
| |
| | |
| To change the system defaults for a window:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open System.
| |
| 4. Select the Window tab.
| |
| 5. Select the choices that best describe how you want the windows to behave.
| |
| 6. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 7. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Printing a Screen 89/3
| |
| | |
| To be able to print the information in an open window:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open System.
| |
| 4. Select the Print Screen tab.
| |
| 5. Select Enable.
| |
| 6. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 7. Double-click.
| |
| To print the open window:
| |
| 1. Select the open window.
| |
| 2. Press Print Screen.
| |
| | |
| Displaying Logos 90/3
| |
| | |
| To specify if you want a logo to be displayed and how long to display it:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open System.
| |
| 4. Select the Logo tab.
| |
| 5. Select the choices that best describes how you want the system to handle
| |
| product information and logos.
| |
| 6. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 7. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Changing Screen Resolution 91/3
| |
| | |
| To change the screen resolution for an XGA* display adapter:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open System.
| |
| 4. Select the Screen tab.
| |
| 5. Select the resolution you want to use.
| |
| 6. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 7. Double-click.
| |
| Note: The Screen tab will not appear if you are using the VGA, 8514, or SVGA
| |
| driver.
| |
| Tip After changing screen resolutions from a higher resolution to a lower
| |
| resolution, some applications might open windows that are partially off the
| |
| screen. If this occurs:
| |
| 1. Press Alt+Spacebar.
| |
| 2. Select Move.
| |
| 3. Use the mouse or the arrow keys to move the window.
| |
| 4. Click mouse button 1 or press Enter.
| |
| or:
| |
| 1. Point to an empty area on the Desktop.
| |
| 2. Click mouse buttons 1 and 2 at the same time.
| |
| 3. Point to the name of the program.
| |
| 4. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 5. Select Tile or Cascade. The window will now appear on the screen.
| |
| | |
| System Clock 92/2
| |
| | |
| The System Clock object is used to set the system date and time or to set an
| |
| alarm. You can display the clock in either analog or digital mode.
| |
| To set the system clock:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Select System Clock.
| |
| 4. Display the pop-up menu for System Clock.
| |
| 5. Select Settings.
| |
| 6. Select the tab for the setting you want to change.
| |
| 7. Select View; change to the View page if necessary. (To view a different
| |
| View page, use an arrow at the lower-right corner of the window.)
| |
| 8. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 9. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| WIN-OS/2 Setup 93/2
| |
| | |
| The WIN-OS/2 Setup object is used to select a public or private clipboard or
| |
| dynamic data exchange (DDE). The clipboard and DDE are features that allow data
| |
| exchange between programs. You also can use this object to preselect WIN-OS/2
| |
| settings for all Windows programs before you start them. Use the Fast load
| |
| setting to automatically start a WIN-OS/2 session when you start OS/2. If you
| |
| change a setting, the change affects only subsequent Windows programs that are
| |
| started. Programs that are currently running are not affected.
| |
| If you are using Windows programs that can share information using the clipboard
| |
| or Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) feature, then you can change the way these
| |
| features work in all WIN-OS/2 sessions.
| |
| Note: Be sure you check with the instructions that came with your program to
| |
| determine if these features are supported.
| |
| The clipboard is an area that temporarily holds data. Data is placed in the
| |
| clipboard by selecting cut or copy from a menu. You can cut (move) or copy
| |
| data from one document and paste it into another document, even if the other
| |
| document is in a different program. For example, you can place a spreadsheet
| |
| from one program into a document from another program.
| |
| The DDE feature enables the exchange of data between programs. Any change made
| |
| to information in one file is applied to the same information in an associated
| |
| file. In the example above, if changes are made to the original spreadsheet,
| |
| corresponding changes are made to the spreadsheet in the document. If changes
| |
| are made to the spreadsheet in the document, corresponding changes are made to
| |
| the original spreadsheet.
| |
| The clipboard and DDE can be set to Public or Private. When DDE is set to
| |
| Public, information can be shared with OS/2 and WIN-OS/2 sessions. Information
| |
| cannot be shared with DOS sessions. When the clipboard or DDE is set to
| |
| Private, sharing data between sessions is restricted. This means that only
| |
| information for those programs running in that single session can be shared.
| |
| When OS/2 is installed, the clipboard and DDE are set to Public.
| |
| Windows programs that have the clipboard or DDE feature are set up during
| |
| installation of the OS/2 operating system to use a Public setting for all
| |
| WIN-OS/2 sessions. You can use the WIN-OS/2 Setup object to set these features
| |
| to private. You can further customize the way you use these features by using
| |
| the Settings notebook of the program object.
| |
| Note: Changing the clipboard and DDE features to Private will not affect the
| |
| performance of your Windows programs.
| |
| To change the clipboard or DDE feature to Private:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open WIN-OS/2 Setup.
| |
| 4. Select Data Exchange.
| |
| 5. Select Private for Dynamic Data Exchange or Clipboard.
| |
| 6. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 7. Double-click.
| |
| Note: If you change the settings for the clipboard or DDE while a program is
| |
| running in a WIN-OS/2 session, the settings for the program will take effect
| |
| immediately.
| |
| For related information about the clipboard, DDE, WIN-OS/2, and Windows
| |
| Programs, see the Windows Programs in OS/2 located in the online Information
| |
| folder or the Master Help Index.
| |
| | |
| Power 94/2+
| |
| | |
| The Power object manages and tracks power consumption in battery-powered
| |
| computers that support the Advanced Power Management (APM) standard. The APM
| |
| standard defines the way the hardware and software work together to reduce power
| |
| consumption and help extend battery life.
| |
| If your computer supports the APM standard, the Power object might be
| |
| automatically installed during the OS/2 installation process. If it was not
| |
| installed, you can install it by using Selective Install and selecting Advanced
| |
| Power Management. For information about Selective Install, see Selective
| |
| Install.
| |
| Note: This power management feature is not available if your computer does not
| |
| have APM BIOS or a device driver that emulates APM BIOS.
| |
| OS/2 APM support relies on the power status information returned from the BIOS
| |
| on your computer. You might notice incorrect battery life or status within the
| |
| Power icon on your computer. If this occurs, rely on the LEDs on your computer
| |
| for accurate power status information.
| |
| Turning the APM setting to Off also turns off the BIOS power management. If
| |
| you want to turn off APM, but not the BIOS power management, place REM before
| |
| the APM device driver statement in your CONFIG.SYS file, and then restart your
| |
| system to invoke the change.
| |
| For example:
| |
| REM DEVICE=C:\OS2\APM.SYS
| |
| | |
| Power Object 95/3
| |
| | |
| To open the Power object:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Power.
| |
| To display the Power pop-up menu:
| |
| 1. Point to the Power object.
| |
| 2. Click mouse button 1 or 2.
| |
| | |
| Power Settings 96/3
| |
| | |
| To set power management support:
| |
| 1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.
| |
| 2. Select Settings. The Power - Settings notebook appears.
| |
| 3. Select Power.
| |
| 4. Set Power management to On or Off. If set to On, power consumption will
| |
| be reduced and power status will be tracked. If set to Off, the suspend
| |
| mode, power status, and battery status features are disabled.
| |
| 5. Set Confirm on power state changes if you want to confirm requests to go
| |
| to suspend mode. (See Suspend Mode.)
| |
| To set the default status view of the status window:
| |
| 1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.
| |
| 2. Select Settings. The Power - Settings notebook appears.
| |
| 3. Select View.
| |
| 4. Select Full status or Battery only for Default status view.
| |
| 5. Set Refresh (of the status window) to On or Off.
| |
| 6. If you set Refresh to On, select the number of minutes (from 1 to 30) for
| |
| Refresh rate. The system will automatically update the status window at
| |
| the intervals you specified.
| |
| You can also update the status window by selecting Refresh Now from the
| |
| Power object pop-up menu.
| |
| | |
| Power Status 97/3
| |
| | |
| To display the power status:
| |
| 1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.
| |
| 2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
| |
| 3. Select Full status or Battery status. A full-status Power window or a
| |
| power-gauge Power window is displayed, depending on your selection.
| |
| Note: You cannot change the size of the Power window.
| |
| A full-status Power window displays the following information:
| |
| o Battery life. This information is displayed as a power gauge that shows
| |
| the power level of the battery compared to the capacity of the battery.
| |
| When the power gauge indicator is completely shaded, the battery is at
| |
| full power. The shaded area of the gauge moves up or down as the battery
| |
| power level increases or decreases. When the power gauge indicator is
| |
| dimmed, there is no battery in the computer or the computer cannot provide
| |
| battery information.
| |
| o Power source for the computer. If the system cannot determine the power
| |
| source, no power source information is displayed.
| |
| o Battery state, which is the charge state of the battery. Battery state
| |
| information is displayed as follows:
| |
| High Battery charge is OK; continue using your computer.
| |
| Low Recharge the battery or switch to another power source
| |
| such as another battery or AC power.
| |
| Critical Battery charge is depleted. Recharge the battery or
| |
| switch to another power source immediately to avoid a
| |
| system failure or data loss.
| |
| Charging System is restoring the battery charge.
| |
| Unknown System cannot determine the battery state or there is no
| |
| battery in your computer.
| |
| | |
| Suspend Mode 98/3
| |
| | |
| To set the suspend mode:
| |
| 1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.
| |
| 2. Select Suspend.
| |
| When suspend mode is activated, battery power is conserved by dimming the
| |
| display and turning off devices that are not in use.
| |
| If Confirm on power status changes is set in the Power - Settings notebook, a
| |
| message is displayed that asks you if you want to continue before switching to
| |
| suspend mode.
| |
| Note: Different computers have different procedures for exiting suspend mode
| |
| and resuming operation. Refer to the documentation that came with your
| |
| computer for information about its suspend mode features.
| |
| After you exit suspend mode, you will notice a startup delay before you can
| |
| resume operation of your system. This delay might be a few seconds, depending
| |
| on your system.
| |
| | |
| Selective Install 99/2+
| |
| | |
| The Selective Install object is used to add features that you did not include
| |
| when you originally installed the operating system. You also can use the
| |
| Selective Install object to change the mouse, display adapter, or country
| |
| information for your system.
| |
| Note: You will need the OS/2 installation diskettes for each of the procedures
| |
| that follow.
| |
| | |
| Adding Options after Installation 100/3
| |
| | |
| To add options after installation:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Selective Install.
| |
| 4. Select from the System Configuration window any of the choices that you
| |
| want to change or add.
| |
| 5. Select OK.
| |
| 6. Place a check mark to the left of any feature you want to add. (For more
| |
| information about a feature, press F1.) If a More push button is
| |
| displayed to the right of a feature, select it to see additional choices.
| |
| | |
| Adding Online Documentation after Installation 101/3
| |
| | |
| To add online documentation after installation:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Selective Install.
| |
| 4. Select OK when the System Configuration window is displayed.
| |
| 5. Select the check box to the left of Documentation.
| |
| 6. Select More to the right of Documentation.
| |
| 7. Select the check box to the left of any documentation units to deselect
| |
| the ones you do not want to add.
| |
| 8. Select OK.
| |
| 9. Select Install.
| |
| 10. Follow the instructions on the screen.
| |
| | |
| Changing Display Adapter Support 102/3
| |
| | |
| To change the display adapter support after installation:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Selective Install.
| |
| 4. Select Primary Display or Secondary Display from the System Configuration
| |
| window.
| |
| 5. Select the display adapter that you want from the list provided.
| |
| 6. Select OK.
| |
| 7. Follow the instructions on the screen.
| |
| | |
| Adding PCMCIA Support after Installation 103/3
| |
| | |
| To add PCMCIA** support after installation:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Selective Install.
| |
| 4. Select OK when the System Configuration window is displayed.
| |
| 5. Select the check box to the left of PCMCIA Support to display the Select
| |
| PCMCIA system window.
| |
| 6. Select the appropriate system (this should either be a direct match with
| |
| your target install system or a known compatible system).
| |
| 7. Select OK.
| |
| 8. Select Install.
| |
| 9. Follow the instructions on the screen.
| |
| | |
| PCMCIA 104/2+
| |
| | |
| OS/2 provides software support for Personal Computer Memory Card International
| |
| Association (PCMCIA) hardware. PCMCIA is the standard for PC card adapters
| |
| associated with portable computers. A PC card is a small form-factor adapter
| |
| about the size and shape of a credit card. You can use PC cards with laptops,
| |
| notebooks, tablets, and other portable computer systems that are equipped with a
| |
| PCMCIA slot.
| |
| | |
| Installing PCMCIA 105/3
| |
| | |
| PCMCIA can be automatically installed during OS/2 installation or it can be
| |
| installed through Selective Install after OS/2 installation. To install PCMCIA
| |
| support after installation, see Adding PCMCIA Support after Installation.
| |
| | |
| PCMCIA Components 106/3
| |
| | |
| PCMCIA consists of the following services and client device drivers (CDDs):
| |
| o Card services - Provide an industry-standard interface layer between the
| |
| Client device driver (CDD) and hardware-specific socket services.
| |
| o Socket services - Provide an industry-standard interface layer across
| |
| hardware platforms for specific chip-set support.
| |
| o Resource Client - A special-purpose CDD that provides Card Services,
| |
| detailing the resources in use and available at start up.
| |
| o Modem Card Manager - A generic CDD that provides a Card Manager level of
| |
| support for PCMCIA modem cards.
| |
| | |
| Plug and Play for PCMCIA 107/3+
| |
| | |
| Plug and Play for PCMCIA is an OS/2 application that displays PC card
| |
| information, socket status, assigned resources, and card type. There are two
| |
| basic types of PC cards:
| |
| o Memory cards, which contain specific types of memory devices
| |
| o Input/output (I/O) cards, which contain devices such as modems and disks
| |
| Both card types are assigned system resources, which are used to communicate
| |
| with the card's devices.
| |
| Plug and Play for PCMCIA also allows you to start applications automatically
| |
| when their objects (icons) are registered to a PC card type.
| |
| To open the Plug and Play for PCMCIA object:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Plug and Play for PCMCIA.
| |
| | |
| Socket and Card Information 108/4
| |
| | |
| The Plug and Play for PCMCIA window displays the following information:
| |
| No. Socket number.
| |
| Card Type Card-type icon and text.
| |
| Card Status Card-status icon and text.
| |
| | |
| Card Types 109/4
| |
| | |
| o Booted
| |
| o Communication - for the following card types:
| |
| 3270 5250
| |
| Ethernet LAN
| |
| SDLC Token Ring
| |
| o Hard Disk
| |
| o I/O - for multi-function, parallel, and SCSI card types.
| |
| o Memory
| |
| o Modem, Serial
| |
| | |
| Card Status 110/4
| |
| | |
| o Empty
| |
| o Inserted
| |
| o Ready
| |
| o Not Ready
| |
| o Inserted for Memory
| |
| | |
| Memory Card - Details View 111/4
| |
| | |
| To receive additional information about an inserted memory card:
| |
| 1. Select the memory card.
| |
| 2. Press Enter.
| |
| The Memory Card - Details View appears with the following information:
| |
| Card information Vendor name and card description data retrieved from card.
| |
| Write protect Yes or no.
| |
| Battery Good, low, or dead.
| |
| Region Region of card memory for memory devices such as SRAM.
| |
| | |
| I/O Card - Details View 112/4
| |
| | |
| To receive additional information about an inserted I/O-type card:
| |
| 1. Select the appropriate card.
| |
| 2. Press Enter.
| |
| The I/O Card - Details View appears with the following information:
| |
| Card information Vendor name and card description data retrieved from card.
| |
| Assigned resources System resources used by this PC card:
| |
| IRQ Interrupt request level.
| |
| I/O Input/output ports.
| |
| | |
| Options 113/3+
| |
| | |
| The Options menu bar choice has two selections, Customize and Register Object.
| |
| The Customize option allows you to turn a beep on and off, display the Plug and
| |
| Play for PCMCIA window when a PC card is used, and keep Plug and Play for PCMCIA
| |
| visible when other applications are running in the foreground.
| |
| The Register Object option allows you to register objects to be launched
| |
| (started or opened) when a specific type of PC card is used. (It is not
| |
| necessary to have a card inserted when registering objects.) If more than one
| |
| object is registered to the same card type or the manual option is selected, the
| |
| Object Launcher window is displayed where you can select which registered object
| |
| to launch.
| |
| Note: Objects can be launched only after Plug and Play for PCMCIA is opened.
| |
| | |
| Customize 114/4
| |
| | |
| To use the Customize window:
| |
| 1. Select Options.
| |
| 2. Select Customize.
| |
| 3. To display the Plug and Play for PCMCIA window whenever a PC card is
| |
| inserted, removed, ready, or not ready, select the appropriate check box
| |
| under Display window.
| |
| 4. To hear a beep whenever a PC card is inserted, removed, ready, or not
| |
| ready, select the appropriate check box under Beep.
| |
| 5. To keep the Plug and Play for PCMCIA icon or window in the foreground
| |
| (visible) when running another application, select Yes.
| |
| 6. To return to the original default settings, select Defaults.
| |
| Note: Plug and Play for PCMCIA must be open for your selections to become
| |
| active.
| |
| | |
| Register Object 115/4
| |
| | |
| To register an object:
| |
| 1. Select Options.
| |
| 2. Select Register Object.
| |
| 3. Click on the down arrow to the right of the Select a card type field to
| |
| display a list of available card types.
| |
| 4. Select the desired card type.
| |
| 5. Drag a copy of each object that you want to register to this card type to
| |
| the Object List field. The name of the object appears in the list. (If
| |
| you have registered more than one object for this card type, see also
| |
| Object Launcher.)
| |
| 6. Select Automatically or Manually to indicate how you would like the object
| |
| to be launched. (If you have selected Manually, see also Object
| |
| Launcher.)
| |
| 7. Select any of the choices under When card is to indicate when you would
| |
| like to launch the object.
| |
| Note: The Ready and Not ready choices work only with I/O card types.
| |
| 8. To return to the original default settings, select Defaults.
| |
| To deregister an object:
| |
| 1. Select the object to be removed from the Object List.
| |
| 2. Select Remove.
| |
| Note: Selecting Remove does not affect the original object.
| |
| | |
| Object Launcher 116/3
| |
| | |
| The Object Launcher is displayed when Plug and Play for PCMCIA is open and one
| |
| or both of the following occurs:
| |
| o More than one object is registered for the inserted PC card type.
| |
| o Manually is selected under Launch Choices.
| |
| To launch an object:
| |
| 1. Select the object to launch.
| |
| 2. Select Launch.
| |
| | |
| Selective Uninstall 117/2
| |
| | |
| The Selective Uninstall program allows you to remove operating system files,
| |
| programs, and device drivers from your hard disk. You might want to uninstall
| |
| files to free hard disk space for other programs.
| |
| Warning: Do not remove operating system files, programs, or device drivers from
| |
| your hard disk unless you have backed up the operating system (as it was
| |
| originally installed). Use the BACKUP.EXE program from the utility diskettes you
| |
| created with "Create Utility Diskettes" program to back up your system. After
| |
| system files, programs, or device drivers are removed, they are unavailable for
| |
| future use.
| |
| You can recover files, programs, or device drivers that you delete ( as they
| |
| were originally installed) only by using the RESTORE.EXE file from the Utility
| |
| Diskettes you created.
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Locate the Selective Uninstall object inside the System Setup folder.
| |
| 4. Open Selective Uninstall. The Selective Uninstall window appears.
| |
| For information about Selective Uninstall, press F1. Or, place the mouse
| |
| pointer on the Help push button and click once. To close the Help window,
| |
| press Esc.
| |
| 1. To make a selection, press the Tab key until your choice is highlighted;
| |
| then press the Spacebar. A check mark (/) appears in the box next to your
| |
| choice. Or, place the mouse pointer on the check box beside a choice and
| |
| click once.
| |
| 2. The More push button next to some choices indicates that a secondary
| |
| window containing more choices associated with your selection is
| |
| available. After you select a choice, the More push button is highlighted.
| |
| Select More to display a list of items you can choose to remove.
| |
| Warning: When you select More, all items in the associated choices l ist
| |
| are checked. Make sure you remove the check marks from those items that
| |
| you do not want to delete from your hard disk.
| |
| For information about the items in the window, press F1. Or, place the
| |
| mouse pointer on the Help push button and click once.
| |
| 3. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove operating system features
| |
| from your hard disk.
| |
| Adobe Type Manager
| |
| Your hard disk contains the Adobe Type Manager program. The program runs
| |
| in the WIN-OS/2 environment. Adobe Type Manager uses PostScript[**]
| |
| outline font technology to produce the sharpest possible type on the screen
| |
| and on the printed page.
| |
| If you intend to use Adobe Type Manager, do not choose to uninstall Fonts.
| |
| For more information about using Adobe Type Manager, see the online Windows
| |
| Programs in OS/2 located in the Information folder on the desktop.
| |
| | |
| Create Utility Diskettes 118/2
| |
| | |
| The OS/2 operating system comes installed on your hard disk. Your computer has a
| |
| program that creates diskettes called Utility Diskettes. Create these diskettes
| |
| to help you correct problems if you cannot start your computer from the hard
| |
| disk.
| |
| The Utility Diskettes also allow you to start the procedure that backs up the
| |
| operating system to diskettes. Backup diskettes allow you to restore OS/2 to
| |
| your hard disk in the event of a computer problem.
| |
| To complete this procedure, you will need three blank, high-density (2MB)
| |
| diskettes for a 1.44MB drive, or one extended-density (4MB) diskette for a
| |
| 2.88MB drive.
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Create Utility Diskettes. The Create Utility Diskettes window
| |
| appears.
| |
| For information about Create Utility Diskettes, press F1. Or, place the
| |
| mouse pointer on the Help push button and click once. To close the Help
| |
| window, press Esc.
| |
| 4. Select the drive where the Utility Diskettes will be created. If you
| |
| select drive A, insert a blank diskette into drive A.
| |
| 5. Type C. Or, place the mouse pointer on the Create push button and click
| |
| once. Follow the instructions on the screen to prepare Utility Diskettes.
| |
| Label the first diskette you create Utility Diskette 1, the second
| |
| diskette Utility Diskette 2, and the third diskette Utility Diskette 3.
| |
| Store the diskettes in a safe place.
| |
| | |
| Starting Objects Automatically 119/1+
| |
| | |
| The Startup folder contains objects that you want to automatically start every
| |
| time the system starts.
| |
| This chapter describes how to use the Startup folder to start objects. It also
| |
| describes how to customize your system startup by placing variables in your
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file.
| |
| | |
| Starting Programs Automatically 120/2+
| |
| | |
| You can start programs automatically at system startup using a Startup folder, a
| |
| STARTUP.CMD file, or both. Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive
| |
| demonstration of how to use the Startup folder.
| |
| | |
| Startup Folder 121/3
| |
| | |
| You can place objects of frequently used programs and batch files in a Startup
| |
| folder so that every time you start your computer, the programs and batch files
| |
| will start. The objects in the Startup folder are started when the Desktop
| |
| folder is opened at system startup. You cannot specify the order in which the
| |
| objects in the folder are started.
| |
| You should place a shadow of the program objects in the Startup folder instead
| |
| of the original object. This ensures that any changes made to the original
| |
| object are applied to the object in the Startup folder.
| |
| To create a shadow of an object and place it in the Startup folder:
| |
| 1. Point to the object.
| |
| 2. Press and hold Ctrl+Shift.
| |
| 3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 4. Drag the object to the Startup folder.
| |
| 5. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| 6. Release the Ctrl and Shift keys.
| |
| | |
| STARTUP.CMD File 122/3
| |
| | |
| A STARTUP.CMD file is similar to the Startup folder in that it is used to
| |
| automatically start programs and batch files at system startup. If a STARTUP.CMD
| |
| file is present, it will be run prior to the starting of the Desktop. For more
| |
| information about creating and running a STARTUP.CMD file, refer to the online
| |
| Command Reference.
| |
| | |
| Preventing Automatic Startup 123/2
| |
| | |
| Programs located in the Startup folder or programs running at the time the
| |
| computer was shut down will automatically start when the computer is restarted.
| |
| To prevent these programs from starting:
| |
| 1. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the computer.
| |
| 2. When you see the Desktop animation (similar to an exploding box), press
| |
| and hold Ctrl+Shift+F1.
| |
| 3. Hold the keys for approximately 15 seconds, or until the Desktop appears.
| |
| (If the hard disk light stops flashing during this time, your computer
| |
| might be suspended. Release the keys quickly, and then resume holding the
| |
| keys until the Desktop objects appear.)
| |
| | |
| Customizing Your CONFIG.SYS for Startup 124/2
| |
| | |
| You can customize the way your Workplace Shell starts by changing the system
| |
| variables at either a command prompt or in the CONFIG.SYS file. Precede each of
| |
| the variables with the SET command.
| |
| The system variables for the Workplace Shell are:
| |
| AUTOSTART Determines the parts of the Workplace Shell that are
| |
| automatically started. Eliminating any of the options
| |
| from the statement restricts the user from accessing
| |
| portions of the Shell. For example:
| |
| SET AUTOSTART=FOLDERS, PROGRAMS, TASKLIST, CONNECTIONS
| |
| FOLDERS Allows a user to open additional folders after startup.
| |
| PROGRAMS Allows a user to open additional programs after startup.
| |
| TASKLIST Allows a user to open the Window List.
| |
| CONNECTIONS Recreates the network connections established during the
| |
| last log on.
| |
| LAUNCHPAD Creates a new LaunchPad on the Desktop.
| |
| OS2_SHELL Sets the command processor for OS/2 sessions. For
| |
| example:
| |
| SET OS2_SHELL=C:\OS2\CMD.EXE
| |
| RESTARTOBJECTS Sets the objects that will be automatically started by the
| |
| Workplace Shell. For example:
| |
| SET RESTARTOBJECTS=STARTUPFOLDERSONLY
| |
| YES Starts all the objects that were running at the time of shutdown and
| |
| all objects in the Startup folder. This is the default.
| |
| NO Does not start any of the applications that were running at the time of
| |
| shutdown and does not start the objects in the Startup folder.
| |
| STARTUPFOLDERSONLY Starts only those objects in the Startup folder.
| |
| REBOOTONLY Starts objects only when the Workplace Shell is started by
| |
| pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del or turning on the computer.
| |
| RUNWORKPLACE Sets the interface that is started by the OS/2 operating
| |
| system. PMSHELL.EXE is the program for the Workplace Shell
| |
| interface. For example:
| |
| SET RUNWORKPLACE=C:\OS2\PMSHELL.EXE
| |
| SYSTEM_INI Determines the INI file to be used by the Workplace Shell
| |
| for system information about such items as default colors
| |
| and printer drivers. For example:
| |
| SET SYSTEM_INI=C:\OS2\OS2SYS.INI
| |
| USER_INI Determines the INI file to be used by the Workplace Shell
| |
| for system information about such items as program
| |
| defaults, display options, and file options. For example:
| |
| SET USER_INI=C:\OS2\OS2.INI
| |
| For more information about customizing the user interface, refer to the online
| |
| Command Reference.
| |
| The DISKCACHE statement in the CONFIG.SYS file is set up so that it
| |
| automatically runs the CHKDSK program upon startup if the system shuts down
| |
| improperly. The CHKDSK program analyzes and fixes disk problems caused by the
| |
| improper shutdown.
| |
| If you add hard disk drives or partitions after the installation of the OS/2
| |
| operating system, you should edit the CONFIG.SYS file and update the AC:x
| |
| parameter to reflect the new additions. AC: starts the auto-check feature on
| |
| the specified drives when the system shuts down improperly. The value x
| |
| represents the letters of the disks or partitions on the system that you want
| |
| to check.
| |
| For example, if you want to check disks C and D and your existing DISKCACHE
| |
| statement is:
| |
| DISKCACHE=64,LW
| |
| Add the AC: parameter to the statement as follows:
| |
| DISKCACHE=64,LW,AC:CD
| |
| For more information about the DISKCACHE statement, refer to the online Command
| |
| Reference.
| |
| | |
| Using Disk Drives 125/1+
| |
| | |
| This chapter describes how to use the Drives folder to access and use the
| |
| different types of storage media installed in your computer.
| |
| When opened, the Drives folder provides a view of all drive objects in the
| |
| system. For example, the following drive types could be accessed from the
| |
| Drives folder:
| |
| o Diskette
| |
| o Hard disk
| |
| o CD-ROM
| |
| o Tape backup
| |
| o Optical disc
| |
| o PCMCIA
| |
| To view the Drive objects:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Drives.
| |
| Note: Drive objects cannot be copied.
| |
| | |
| About Hard Disks and Diskettes 126/2
| |
| | |
| There are two kinds of disks:
| |
| Hard disk A non-removable disk that is built into a hard-disk drive. Hard
| |
| disks come in a variety of capacities and can hold large amounts of
| |
| information. (Capacity is the maximum amount of information that a
| |
| diskette or disk can hold.)
| |
| Information can be stored on and erased from the disk over and over
| |
| again. The computer can write to and read information from the
| |
| hard disk much faster than it can from a diskette.
| |
| Diskette A removable disk that can be inserted in and removed from a
| |
| diskette drive. Diskettes come in a variety of capacities.
| |
| Diskettes cannot hold as much information as a hard disk.
| |
| Information can be stored on and erased from the diskette over and
| |
| over again. The computer cannot write to or read information from
| |
| a diskette as fast as it can from a hard disk. There are two sizes
| |
| of diskettes, 5.25" and 3.5":
| |
| o 5.25-inch diskettes are thin, flexible, and somewhat fragile. A 5.25-inch
| |
| diskette has a write-protect notch located on the right side. You can
| |
| place a write-protect tab over the notch to protect the information stored
| |
| on the diskette.
| |
| To store information on or erase information from the diskette, you must
| |
| remove the write-protect tab from the diskette.
| |
| o 3.5-inch diskettes are protected by a hard plastic cover that makes them
| |
| more durable. A 3.5-inch diskette can be write protected by sliding a
| |
| built-in tab to reveal the write-protect opening.
| |
| To store information on or erase information from the diskette, you must
| |
| slide the tab over the write-protect opening on the diskette.
| |
| Note: If a diskette does not have a write-protect notch or tab,
| |
| the diskette is permanently write protected. Many software
| |
| manufacturers use permanently write-protected diskettes to prevent
| |
| the information on the diskettes from being accidentally changed or
| |
| deleted.
| |
| The capacity of a diskette and a hard disk is measured in bytes. A diskette
| |
| must be formatted at a capacity less than or equal to the capacity of the
| |
| diskette drive in order for the diskette and the drive to be compatible. So
| |
| even though a diskette is the correct size physically, its capacity might not
| |
| be compatible with the diskette drive in the computer.
| |
| For example, a 3.5-inch diskette drive designed to work with 2.88MB diskettes
| |
| can use 1.44MB diskettes, but a 1.44MB diskette drive cannot use a 2.88MB
| |
| diskette. The following terms are used to describe the capacity of disks and
| |
| the size of files:
| |
| Byte Amount of space it takes to store a character.
| |
| Kilobyte 1024 bytes and is abbreviated as KB.
| |
| Megabyte 1024KB (approximately a million bytes) and is abbreviated as MB.
| |
| Gigabyte 1024MB (approximately a billion bytes) and is abbreviated as GB.
| |
| The following terms are equivalent:
| |
| 1MB = 1024KB = 1048576 bytes
| |
| Each diskette drive and hard disk drive in a computer has a letter assigned to
| |
| it. This letter is the name that both you and the computer use to identify the
| |
| drive. For example, on many computers the diskette drive is called drive A and
| |
| the hard disk drive is called drive C.
| |
| | |
| Accessing Hard Disks and Diskettes 127/2+
| |
| | |
| You can use the Drives folder to access the information on your hard disk and
| |
| diskette drives. This allows you to view disk information, display the files on
| |
| the disks, and copy and move files. The files can be viewed as objects so they
| |
| can easily be copied and moved with the mouse.
| |
| Tip For specific instructions on using the Drive A object, see Drive A.
| |
| | |
| Viewing Disk Information 128/3
| |
| | |
| To view the size of a disk:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Drives.
| |
| 3. Open the drive object you want information about.
| |
| | |
| Displaying Objects 129/3
| |
| | |
| The drive objects are used to display the contents of the drives on your
| |
| computer. The contents of the drive can be displayed in three different views:
| |
| Icon view Displays the contents of the disk as icons. This is the default
| |
| if the disk does not have folders (directories).
| |
| Tree view Displays the contents of the disk in a tree. This is the default
| |
| if the disk has folders (directories). A plus (+) sign to the
| |
| left of a folder indicates that additional folders exist inside
| |
| the folder. By selecting the plus sign, you can see the other
| |
| folders in the folder. Pointing to a folder and double-clicking
| |
| displays the contents of the folder in an icon view.
| |
| Note: When an additional folder is opened from a folder that is
| |
| in tree view, if the default for the additional folder is also
| |
| tree view, it is overridden and displayed in an icon view. There
| |
| is no need to open it again in tree view because it is already
| |
| shown in the parent folder's tree view.
| |
| Details view Displays the contents of the disk in a table with the following
| |
| additional information:
| |
| o Icon
| |
| o Title
| |
| o Real name
| |
| o Size
| |
| o Last write date and time
| |
| o Last access date and time
| |
| o Creation date and time
| |
| o Flags
| |
| To display the contents of a drive as icons:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Drives.
| |
| 3. Point to the object that you want to display.
| |
| 4. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
| |
| 6. Select Icon view.
| |
| To display the contents of a drive in a tree view:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Drives.
| |
| 3. Point to the object that you want to display.
| |
| 4. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
| |
| 6. Select Tree view.
| |
| 7. If a plus (+) sign appears to the left of a folder, select it to expand
| |
| the contents.
| |
| 8. To display the contents of a folder, point to the folder; then
| |
| double-click.
| |
| To display details about the contents of a drive:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Drives.
| |
| 3. Point to the object that you want to display.
| |
| 4. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
| |
| 6. Select Details view.
| |
| 7. Select the scroll bars at the bottom and side of the window to scroll the
| |
| information.
| |
| | |
| Copying Objects 130/3
| |
| | |
| Note: If you want to copy the object to a folder object or another drive
| |
| object, the target object must be visible before you start the copy.
| |
| To copy an object from a drive to another location:
| |
| 1. Open the drive containing the object you want to copy.
| |
| 2. Point to the object you want to copy.
| |
| 3. Press and hold Ctrl.
| |
| 4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 5. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
| |
| 6. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| 7. Release Ctrl.
| |
| To copy an object from another location to a drive:
| |
| 1. Point to the object you want to copy.
| |
| 2. Press and hold Ctrl.
| |
| 3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 4. Drag the object to the drive object.
| |
| 5. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| 6. Release Ctrl.
| |
| | |
| Moving Objects 131/3
| |
| | |
| There are times when you need to move an object (copy the object to a different
| |
| location and delete it from the original location).
| |
| Note: If you want to move the object to a folder object or another drive
| |
| object, the target object must be visible before you start the move.
| |
| To move an object from a drive to another location:
| |
| 1. Open the drive containing the object you want to move.
| |
| 2. Point to the object you want to move.
| |
| 3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 4. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
| |
| 5. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| To move an object from another location to a drive:
| |
| 1. Point to the object you want to move.
| |
| 2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 3. Drag the mouse to the drive object.
| |
| 4. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| | |
| Deleting Objects from a Drive 132/3
| |
| | |
| You can delete (erase) unwanted objects from a drive.
| |
| To delete an object from a drive:
| |
| 1. Open the drive.
| |
| 2. Point to the object you want to delete.
| |
| 3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 4. Drag the object to the Shredder.
| |
| 5. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| | |
| Formatting a Disk 133/2
| |
| | |
| You can format a disk. When a disk is formatted, it is checked for defects and
| |
| prepared to accept data. During this process, all existing data is erased from
| |
| the disk.
| |
| Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration of how to format a
| |
| diskette.
| |
| Note: Before you format a disk, make sure that it does not contain any
| |
| information that is important.
| |
| To format a disk:
| |
| 1. Point to the disk you want to format.
| |
| 2. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 3. Select Format disk.
| |
| 4. When the Format Disk window appears, type a Volume Label (name for the
| |
| disk).
| |
| 5. Select the type of file system (FAT or HPFS) you want to use on the disk.
| |
| (For more information about these file systems, see the Master Help
| |
| Index).
| |
| 6. Select Format.
| |
| 7. When the format is complete, select OK.
| |
| | |
| Checking a Disk 134/2
| |
| | |
| You can check a disk for:
| |
| o Defects, which are errors in the file allocation table or directory on the
| |
| disk. If you select Write corrections to disk, any problems found will be
| |
| fixed.
| |
| o Current usage, which is the amount of the disk used for directories, user
| |
| files, and extended attributes. It also indicates the amount of space
| |
| that is reserved on the disk.
| |
| o File system type, which is the type of file system on the disk.
| |
| o Total disk space, which is the capacity of the disk in bytes.
| |
| o Total amount of disk space available, which is the amount of free space
| |
| left on the disk.
| |
| Note: You cannot check a disk that is currently being used or is locked by
| |
| another process (for example, the disk that OS/2 is running on).
| |
| To check a disk:
| |
| 1. Point to the drive that you want to check.
| |
| 2. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 3. Select Check disk.
| |
| 4. Select Write corrections to disk.
| |
| 5. Select Check. When the check is done, the Check Disk &dash. Results
| |
| window is displayed.
| |
| 6. Select Cancel to remove the window.
| |
| | |
| Drive A 135/2+
| |
| | |
| The Drive A object provides quick access to the diskette drive in your computer
| |
| referred to as A.
| |
| You can use the Drive A object to:
| |
| o Display the objects on a diskette
| |
| o Display information about the objects on the diskette
| |
| o Copy objects on a diskette to another location
| |
| o Copy objects from another location to a diskette
| |
| o Move objects on a diskette to another location
| |
| o Move objects from another location to a diskette
| |
| o Delete objects from a diskette
| |
| o Format a diskette
| |
| o Check a diskette for defects and fix it
| |
| Note: The Drive A object cannot be copied.
| |
| This chapter discusses only the Drive A object. For information about other
| |
| drive objects and a discussion about disks and diskettes, see Using Disk
| |
| Drives.
| |
| | |
| Displaying the Objects on a Diskette 136/3
| |
| | |
| To display the objects on a diskette:
| |
| 1. Place a diskette into diskette drive A.
| |
| 2. Open Drive A.
| |
| The Drive A window appears showing the contents of the diskette. The actual
| |
| layout of the window that appears depends upon the contents of the diskette.
| |
| Tree view Displays the objects on the diskette in a directory (tree)
| |
| structure with folders representing the directories. This view
| |
| comes up when the objects on the diskette are placed in
| |
| directories.
| |
| To view the contents of a directory, point to a folder and
| |
| double-click.
| |
| Icon view Displays the objects on the diskette as pictures (icons). This
| |
| view comes up when all the objects on the diskette are in the root
| |
| directory.
| |
| | |
| Displaying Information about the Objects on a Diskette 137/2
| |
| | |
| The tree and icon views give limited information about the objects on a
| |
| diskette. However, the details view gives the following information about the
| |
| objects on the diskette:
| |
| Title of the object Name that appears below the icon that represents the
| |
| object.
| |
| Real name of object Actual name of the object.
| |
| Size Amount of space in bytes that the object occupies.
| |
| Last write date Date that the information in the object was last changed.
| |
| Last write time Time of day that the information in the object was last
| |
| changed.
| |
| Last access date Date that the information in the object was last viewed.
| |
| Last access time Time of day that the information in the object was last
| |
| viewed.
| |
| Creation date Date that the object was first created.
| |
| Creation time Time that the object was first created.
| |
| Flags Characteristics of the file that allow it to be used in a
| |
| certain way.
| |
| To display detailed information about the objects on a diskette:
| |
| 1. Place a diskette into drive A.
| |
| 2. Open Drive A.
| |
| 3. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 4. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
| |
| 6. Select Details view.
| |
| | |
| Copying Objects to or from a Diskette 138/2
| |
| | |
| There are times when you need to copy an object (duplicate the object and place
| |
| it in a different location).
| |
| Note: If you want to copy the object to a folder object or another drive
| |
| object, the target object must be visible before you start the copy.
| |
| To copy an object from a diskette in Drive A to another location:
| |
| 1. Place a diskette into drive A.
| |
| 2. Open Drive A.
| |
| 3. Point to the object you want to copy.
| |
| 4. Press and hold Ctrl.
| |
| 5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 6. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
| |
| 7. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| 8. Release Ctrl.
| |
| To copy an object from another location to a diskette in Drive A:
| |
| 1. Place the diskette you want to copy the object to into drive A.
| |
| 2. Point to the object you want to copy.
| |
| 3. Press and hold Ctrl.
| |
| 4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 5. Drag the mouse to the Drive A object.
| |
| 6. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| 7. Release Ctrl.
| |
| | |
| Moving Objects to or from a Diskette 139/2
| |
| | |
| There are times when you need to move an object (copy the object to a different
| |
| location and delete it from the original location).
| |
| Note: If you want to move the object to a folder object or another drive
| |
| object, the target object must be visible before you start the move.
| |
| To move an object from the diskette in Drive A to another location:
| |
| 1. Place a diskette into drive A.
| |
| 2. Open Drive A.
| |
| 3. Point to the object you want to move.
| |
| 4. Press and hold Shift.
| |
| 5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 6. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
| |
| 7. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| 8. Release Shift.
| |
| Note: When moving an object from a diskette, the Shift key must be used with
| |
| mouse button 2.
| |
| To move an object from another location to the diskette in Drive A:
| |
| 1. Place the diskette you want to move the object to into drive A.
| |
| 2. Point to the object you want to move.
| |
| 3. Press and hold Shift.
| |
| 4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 5. Drag the object to the Drive A object.
| |
| 6. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| 7. Release Shift.
| |
| Note: When moving an object to a diskette, the Shift key must be used with
| |
| mouse button 2.
| |
| | |
| Deleting Objects from a Diskette 140/2
| |
| | |
| You can delete (erase) unwanted objects from a diskette.
| |
| To delete an object from a diskette:
| |
| 1. Place the diskette you want to delete the object from into drive A.
| |
| 2. Open Drive A.
| |
| 3. Point to the object you want to delete.
| |
| 4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 5. Drag the object to the Shredder.
| |
| 6. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| | |
| Formatting a Diskette 141/2
| |
| | |
| You can format a diskette using the Drive A object. When a diskette is
| |
| formatted, it is checked for defects and prepared to accept data. During this
| |
| process, all existing data is erased from the diskette.
| |
| To format a diskette:
| |
| 1. Place the diskette you want to format into drive A.
| |
| 2. Point to Drive A.
| |
| 3. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 4. Select Format disk.
| |
| 5. When the Format Disk window appears, type a Volume Label (name for the
| |
| disk or diskette).
| |
| 6. Select Format.
| |
| 7. When the format is complete, select OK.
| |
| | |
| Checking a Diskette 142/2
| |
| | |
| You can check a diskette for:
| |
| o Defects, which are errors in the file allocation table or directory on the
| |
| diskette. If you select Write corrections to disk, any problems found
| |
| will be fixed.
| |
| o Current usage, which is the amount of the diskette used for directories,
| |
| user files, and extended attributes. It also indicates the amount of
| |
| space that is reserved on the diskette.
| |
| o File system type, which is the type of file system on the diskette. (All
| |
| diskettes are formatted for the FAT file system.)
| |
| o Total disk space, which is the capacity of the diskette in bytes.
| |
| o Total amount of disk space available, which is the amount of free space
| |
| left on the diskette.
| |
| To check a diskette:
| |
| 1. Place the diskette to be checked into drive A.
| |
| 2. Point to Drive A.
| |
| 3. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 4. Select Check disk.
| |
| 5. Select Write corrections to disk.
| |
| 6. Select Check.
| |
| 7. After a few seconds, the Check Disk - Results window is displayed. Select
| |
| Cancel to remove the window.
| |
| | |
| Using Command Prompts 143/1+
| |
| | |
| The Command Prompts folder contains objects that open DOS, OS/2, and WIN-OS/2
| |
| sessions. A session is one instance of a command prompt or started program.
| |
| Each session is separate from all other sessions that might be running on the
| |
| computer.
| |
| To open the Command Prompts object:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| | |
| OS/2 Command Prompts 144/2
| |
| | |
| The OS/2 Full-Screen and OS/2 Window objects are used to access an OS/2 command
| |
| prompt. At these command prompts, you can start programs and enter OS/2
| |
| commands.
| |
| For a description of OS/2 commands that can be used at these prompts, see the
| |
| OS/2 Command Reference in the Information folder.
| |
| To start an OS/2 command prompt session:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Open OS/2 Full Screen, OS/2 Window, or both.
| |
| When you close a session, the session and its related windows are automatically
| |
| closed. Make sure that you save all important data in the session before you
| |
| close it.
| |
| To close an OS/2 command prompt session:
| |
| 1. Type Exit.
| |
| 2. Press Enter.
| |
| You can switch (temporarily leave without closing) from an OS/2 command prompt
| |
| session to another running program. When you switch sessions, your command
| |
| prompt session is saved and then restored when you switch back.
| |
| To temporarily leave an OS/2 command prompt session:
| |
| 1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
| |
| 2. Point to a title on the Window List.
| |
| 3. Double-click.
| |
| or:
| |
| 1. Press Alt+Esc to switch to another open object.
| |
| | |
| DOS Command Prompts 145/2
| |
| | |
| The DOS Full-Screen and DOS Window objects are used to access a DOS command
| |
| prompt. At these command prompts, you can start programs and enter DOS
| |
| commands.
| |
| For a description of DOS commands that can be used at these prompts, see the
| |
| OS/2 Command Reference in the Information folder.
| |
| To start a DOS command prompt session:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Open DOS Full Screen, DOS Window, or both.
| |
| When you close a session, the session and its related windows are automatically
| |
| closed. Make sure that you save all important data in the session before you
| |
| close it.
| |
| To close a DOS command prompt session:
| |
| 1. Type Exit.
| |
| 2. Press Enter.
| |
| You can switch from a DOS command prompt session to another running program.
| |
| When you switch sessions, your command prompt session is saved and then
| |
| restored when you switch back.
| |
| To temporarily leave a DOS command prompt session:
| |
| 1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
| |
| 2. Point to a title on the Window List.
| |
| 3. Double-click.
| |
| or:
| |
| 1. Press Alt+Esc to display the Desktop.
| |
| | |
| DOS from Drive A 146/2+
| |
| | |
| The DOS from Drive A object is used to start a specific version (3.0 or later)
| |
| of DOS from a diskette. By using a specific version of DOS, you can use
| |
| programs that will not run under the DOS provided with OS/2.
| |
| Before you can start a specific DOS version from a diskette, you must create the
| |
| diskette used to start the DOS version. This diskette is commonly known as a
| |
| DOS Startup diskette or DOS bootable diskette.
| |
| | |
| Creating a DOS Startup Diskette 147/3
| |
| | |
| Note: If you already have a DOS Startup diskette, go to step 6 to make sure the
| |
| diskette is set up to work correctly with the DOS from Drive A object.
| |
| To create a DOS Startup diskette:
| |
| 1. Boot your system with a version of DOS. You can use a:
| |
| o DOS installation diskette
| |
| o Hard disk that DOS has been installed on
| |
| o Diskette that DOS has been installed on
| |
| 2. Type FORMAT A: /S
| |
| 3. Place a blank diskette into drive A.
| |
| 4. Press Enter. This transfers the system files to the diskette.
| |
| 5. When the format is complete, remove the diskette.
| |
| 6. Start OS/2 by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.
| |
| 7. Select OS/2 System.
| |
| 8. Select Drives.
| |
| 9. Select Drive C.
| |
| 10. Open the OS/2 folder; then open the MDOS folder.
| |
| 11. Place the formatted diskette containing the system files into drive A.
| |
| 12. Copy the following data-file objects from Drive C to the Drive A object:
| |
| o FSFILTER.SYS
| |
| o FSACCESS.EXE You can copy as many additional DOS files to the
| |
| diskette as you want.
| |
| 13. Open the Templates folder.
| |
| 14. Copy a Data File object to the Desktop.
| |
| 15. Point to the data-file object and double-click. The OS/2 System Editor
| |
| starts.
| |
| 16. Type the following information into the data file:
| |
| DEVICE=FSFILTER.SYS
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\HIMEM.SYS
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\EMM386.SYS
| |
| DOS=HIGH,UMB
| |
| DEVICEHIGH=C:\OS2\MDOS\ANSI.SYS
| |
| FILES=20
| |
| BUFFERS=20
| |
| 17. Point to the title-bar icon of the OS/2 System Editor; then double-click.
| |
| 18. Select Save as; then type A:\CONFIG.SYS and press Enter.
| |
| 19. Point to the data-file object again and double-click.
| |
| 20. Type the following information into the data file:
| |
| ECHO OFF
| |
| PROMPT $P$G
| |
| SET COMSPEC=A:\COMMAND.COM
| |
| C:\OS2\MDOS\MOUSE.COM
| |
| PATH A:\
| |
| 21. Point to the title-bar icon of the OS/2 System Editor; then double-click.
| |
| 22. Select Save as; then type A:\AUTOEXEC.BAT and press Enter.
| |
| | |
| Starting DOS from Drive A 148/3
| |
| | |
| To start a DOS from Drive A session:
| |
| 1. Insert the DOS Startup diskette in drive A.
| |
| 2. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 3. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 4. Open DOS from Drive A.
| |
| To close a DOS from Drive A session:
| |
| 1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
| |
| 2. Point to DOS from Drive A in the Window List.
| |
| 3. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 4. Click on Close.
| |
| You can switch from a DOS from Drive A session to another running program.
| |
| When you switch sessions, your command prompt session is saved and then
| |
| restored when you switch back.
| |
| To temporarily leave a DOS from Drive A session:
| |
| 1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
| |
| 2. Point to a title on the Window List.
| |
| 3. Double-click.
| |
| or:
| |
| 1. Press Alt+Esc to display the Desktop.
| |
| | |
| WIN-OS/2 Full Screen 149/2
| |
| | |
| The WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen object is used to run multiple Windows programs in a
| |
| full-screen session. For more information about WIN-OS/2, see the online
| |
| WIN-OS/2 Book located in the Information folder.
| |
| To start a WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen session:
| |
| 1. open the object.
| |
| To close a WIN-OS/2 full-screen session:
| |
| 1. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 2. Double-click.
| |
| To switch to the OS/2 Desktop:
| |
| 1. Point to the OS/2 Desktop object in the lower left corner of the screen.
| |
| 2. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Starting Multiple Sessions 150/2
| |
| | |
| You can have multiple sessions of any object open.
| |
| To open more than one session of an object:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Copy one of the objects (for example, DOS Window) by holding down the Ctrl
| |
| key and mouse button 2 and dragging the object to the same or another
| |
| folder. Then release the mouse button and the Ctrl key.
| |
| 4. Open the object to start the session.
| |
| 5. Repeat the steps to create and open another session.
| |
| Or, if you need multiple copies of objects often, you can alter the settings of
| |
| the object so that it creates another session every time you open it. Do the
| |
| following:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Point to the object.
| |
| 4. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 5. Select Settings.
| |
| 6. Select the Window tab.
| |
| 7. Select the Create new window radio button.
| |
| 8. Close the notebook by double-clicking mouse button 1 on the title-bar
| |
| icon. Now, each time you select the object a new session starts.
| |
| | |
| Starting and Exiting BASICA and QBASIC 151/2
| |
| | |
| To start the BASICA or QBASIC programs:
| |
| Note: BASICA will only run on IBM computers.
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Open OS/2 Full Screen, OS/2 Window, DOS Full Screen, or DOS Window.
| |
| 4. Type BASICA or QBASIC at the command prompt; then press Enter.
| |
| To exit the BASICA program:
| |
| 1. Type SYSTEM.
| |
| 2. Press Enter.
| |
| To exit the QBASIC program:
| |
| 1. Select File.
| |
| 2. Select Exit.
| |
| 3. Select Enter.
| |
| | |
| Cleaning Up Your Desktop 152/1+
| |
| | |
| The Minimized Window Viewer is where open objects are stored when they are
| |
| minimized. This keeps your desktop organized but still allows you to have
| |
| multiple objects open and running.
| |
| To open the Minimized Window Viewer:
| |
| 1. Point to Minimized Window Viewer.
| |
| 2. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Displaying an Object in the Minimized Window Viewer 153/2
| |
| | |
| The objects in the Minimized Window Viewer are still open, but they are running
| |
| in the background (cannot accept user input).
| |
| To display an object found in the Minimized Window Viewer:
| |
| 1. Open the Minimized Window Viewer.
| |
| 2. Point to the object.
| |
| 3. Double-click.
| |
| or:
| |
| 1. Point to an empty area on the desktop.
| |
| 2. Click mouse buttons 1 and 2 at the same time.
| |
| 3. Point to the title of the object you want to display.
| |
| 4. Double-click.
| |
| Note: There may be more titles in the Window List than objects in the
| |
| Minimized Window Viewer, because hidden windows are also displayed in the
| |
| Window List.
| |
| | |
| Minimizing an Object to the Desktop 154/2
| |
| | |
| Some frequently used objects might be easier to re-access if they are minimized
| |
| to the desktop instead of the Minimized Window Viewer.
| |
| To make an object minimize to the desktop:
| |
| 1. Point to the object you want to minimize to the desktop.
| |
| 2. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 3. Select Settings.
| |
| 4. Select the Window tab.
| |
| 5. Select Minimize button. (If the choice is present.)
| |
| 6. Select Minimize window to desktop.
| |
| 7. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 8. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Minimizing an Object to the Minimized Window Viewer 155/2
| |
| | |
| Most objects by default are set up to minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer.
| |
| However, some objects are not.
| |
| To make an object minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer:
| |
| 1. Point to the object you want to minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer.
| |
| 2. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 3. Select Settings.
| |
| 4. Select the Window tab.
| |
| 5. Select Minimize button. (If the choice is present.)
| |
| 6. Select Minimize window to viewer.
| |
| 7. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 8. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Using the Shredder 156/1+
| |
| | |
| The Shredder object provides a quick and easy way to delete objects. It is
| |
| located on the LaunchPad .
| |
| To delete an object:
| |
| 1. Point to the object.
| |
| 2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 3. Drag the object to the Shredder.
| |
| 4. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| 5. Respond to confirmation messages (if applicable).
| |
| | |
| Customizing the Delete Confirmations 157/2
| |
| | |
| You can change the settings of your desktop to specify when confirmation
| |
| messages appear, if any, when you delete an object. The following confirmation
| |
| choices are available:
| |
| Confirm on folder delete Displays a confirmation message whenever a folder
| |
| object is deleted using the Shredder object or a
| |
| pop-up menu.
| |
| Confirm on delete Displays a confirmation message whenever an object is
| |
| deleted using the Shredder object or a pop-up menu.
| |
| Important Disabling the confirmation messages increases your chances of
| |
| accidentally deleting an object.
| |
| To change the settings:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open System.
| |
| 4. Select the Confirmations tab.
| |
| 5. Make sure a check mark appears in each choice that you want to enable. To
| |
| add or remove a check mark, select the choice.
| |
| 6. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 7. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Preparing Your System to Recover Deleted Objects 158/2
| |
| | |
| Chances are that at some point you will accidentally delete an object that you
| |
| need. You can recover a deleted object if the DELDIR environment variable is
| |
| enabled in your CONFIG.SYS file prior to deleting the object.
| |
| To enable DELDIR:
| |
| 1. Edit your C:\CONFIG.SYS file and remove the REM statement from the
| |
| beginning of the DELDIR statement.
| |
| a. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| b. Open Drives.
| |
| c. Open Drive C. (If the OS/2 operating system is installed on a
| |
| different drive, open that drive instead.)
| |
| d. After the Drive C object opens, a tree view of its contents is
| |
| displayed. Open the Drive C entry in the tree.
| |
| e. Open the C:\CONFIG.SYS file.
| |
| f. Select Edit.
| |
| g. Select Find.
| |
| h. Type DELDIR (all caps) in the Find field.
| |
| i. Select Find. (If the DELDIR statement is not found, see the online
| |
| Command Reference for instructions on how to add it.)
| |
| j. Select the beginning of the DELDIR line.
| |
| k. Delete REM from the beginning of the line using the Del key.
| |
| l. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| m. Double-click.
| |
| n. Select Save.
| |
| o. Select Type.
| |
| p. Select Set.
| |
| 2. Shut down your system; then restart it. Changes made to the CONFIG.SYS
| |
| object are not initiated until the system is restarted.
| |
| The DELDIR statement specifies the size of the directory used to hold deleted
| |
| objects. When the directory is full, the oldest files in the directory are
| |
| removed in order to make room for the new objects.
| |
| If you delete an object, recover it as soon as possible afterwards, or it might
| |
| be too late. For more information about DELDIR, see the online Command
| |
| Reference.
| |
| Note: To be able to recover objects deleted in a DOS session, repeat the
| |
| preceding procedure on the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
| |
| | |
| Recovering Deleted Objects 159/2
| |
| | |
| You can recover a deleted or erased object using the UNDELETE command.
| |
| Note: The DELDIR environment variable must be enabled prior to the deletion of
| |
| the object. For more information about DELDIR, see Preparing Your System to
| |
| Recover Deleted Objects.
| |
| To recover a deleted object:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Open a DOS or OS/2 window.
| |
| 4. Type UNDELETE /L and press Enter to see a list of file names associated
| |
| with the recently deleted objects.
| |
| 5. Write down the complete path and file name. Include the drive letter,
| |
| directory names, and the file name. For example:
| |
| C:\OS2\SAMPLE.TXT
| |
| 6. Type UNDELETE followed by the complete path and file name. For example:
| |
| UNDELETE C:\OS2\SAMPLE.TXT
| |
| 7. Press Enter.
| |
| The file associated with the deleted object has now been successfully
| |
| recovered. For more information about UNDELETE, see the online Command
| |
| Reference.
| |
| To place the object back on the desktop:
| |
| 1. Open Drives.
| |
| 2. Open the drive that contains the recovered file (object).
| |
| 3. Find the object on the drive.
| |
| 4. Point to the object.
| |
| 5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 6. Drag the object to the desktop.
| |
| 7. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| | |
| Using Templates 160/1+
| |
| | |
| A template is an object that you can use as a model to create additional
| |
| objects. When you drag a template, you create another of the original object,
| |
| as though you were peeling one of the objects off a stack. The new object has
| |
| the same settings and contents as the templates in the stack.
| |
| | |
| Creating an Object from the Templates Folder 161/2+
| |
| | |
| You can create new objects by using the objects in the Templates folder. To
| |
| open the Templates folder:
| |
| 1. Point to the Templates object on the Desktop.
| |
| 2. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Creating a Folder Object 162/3
| |
| | |
| To use the Folder template to create a new folder:
| |
| 1. Open Templates.
| |
| 2. Point to the Folder template.
| |
| 3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 4. Drag a copy of the Folder template to the Desktop or to another folder.
| |
| 5. Release mouse button 2. An empty folder is created.
| |
| 6. Rename the folder (for example, "My new folder"). For information about
| |
| renaming, see the OS/2 Tutorial.
| |
| You can drag any objects you want (for example, program objects and data-file
| |
| objects) to the new folder.
| |
| Tip The operating system will add new templates when you install programs
| |
| that support them. The MMPM/2 application supports templates for digital
| |
| audio, MIDI, and digital video files.
| |
| | |
| Creating a Data-File Object 163/3
| |
| | |
| To use the Data File template to create a data-file object:
| |
| 1. Open Templates.
| |
| 2. Move the mouse pointer to the Data-File template.
| |
| 3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 4. Drag the Data-File template to any folder (including the Desktop folder).
| |
| A new data-file object is created.
| |
| 5. Open the data-file object to begin editing the file with the System
| |
| Editor.
| |
| 6. When you are ready to save the file, select File; then select Save.
| |
| Respond to the system prompts (for example, in the Save notification
| |
| window, indicate if you want a file type such as plain text).
| |
| 7. Double-click mouse button 1 on the title-bar icon to close the window.
| |
| 8. Rename the object currently titled "Data File". Refer to the OS/2
| |
| Tutorial.
| |
| Note: If you use Save as on the File menu instead of Save, another object is
| |
| created with the new name. "Data File" remains an empty file.
| |
| If you open a data-file object that is not associated with any other program,
| |
| it automatically opens in the OS/2 System Editor. If you prefer, you can
| |
| associate the data-file object with one or more program objects (for more
| |
| information, see the Master Help Index). For more information about using the
| |
| OS/2 System Editor, select Help on the menu.
| |
| | |
| Creating a Program Object 164/3
| |
| | |
| A program object starts a program or a session. If you install a new OS/2, DOS,
| |
| or Windows program, you might need to run the Add Programs program in the System
| |
| Setup folder to create a program object. This is the recommended method of
| |
| creating a program object.
| |
| You also can create a program object using the Templates folder.
| |
| 1. Open Templates.
| |
| 2. Move the mouse pointer to the Program template.
| |
| 3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 4. Drag the Program template to a folder or to the Desktop.
| |
| 5. Customize the program object using the Settings notebook. For example,
| |
| select the session type, name the program object, or set up the
| |
| associations.
| |
| | |
| Creating a Template of an Object 165/2
| |
| | |
| You can create a template of an object when you have an existing object (such as
| |
| a form letter with a company letterhead) and you need another one. For example,
| |
| you could make the form letter a template and then customize it for different
| |
| customers. The new object will have the same settings (such as associations)
| |
| and contents as the original.
| |
| To create a template of an object:
| |
| 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by pointing at the object and then
| |
| clicking mouse button 2.
| |
| 2. Select Settings.
| |
| 3. Select the General tab.
| |
| 4. Select the Template check box.
| |
| 5. Close the Settings notebook.
| |
| The object is now displayed as a template.
| |
| Drag a copy of the object from the template whenever you need a new copy.
| |
| Customize the new object to your preference. For example, you can change the
| |
| name of the object and add a new icon (see the OS/2 Tutorial or the Master Help
| |
| Index).
| |
| If you want to move a stack of templates, rather than create an object from the
| |
| top template, press the Shift key while dragging the stack.
| |
| | |
| Creating Another Object 166/2
| |
| | |
| All objects that have a Create another choice in their pop-up menu have a
| |
| cascaded menu that lists their templates. When you create a template of your
| |
| own, it is added to the cascaded menu.
| |
| The result of Create another is identical to creating an object from a template.
| |
| If you select Create another from the pop-up menu of an object, a new object
| |
| with the same default settings and data is created. If you select the arrow to
| |
| the right of Create another, a cascaded menu is displayed. This menu contains a
| |
| listing of all the template objects you created. You can select one of the
| |
| choices to create another object from that template.
| |
| For example, suppose you created a template and named it "Company letterhead."
| |
| This template is listed as a choice on the cascaded menu. Whenever you need to
| |
| create a similar letter, select Company letterhead. The new data-file object
| |
| contains whatever was in the original "Company letterhead" and the same settings
| |
| (such as associations).
| |
| To create another object using a pop-up menu:
| |
| 1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by pointing at the object and then
| |
| clicking mouse button 2.
| |
| 2. Select Create another if you want to use one of your templates, or select
| |
| the arrow to the right of Create another and select a template choice.
| |
| Note: The new object appears in the active folder; for example, if the object
| |
| is on the Desktop, the duplicate appears on the Desktop.
| |
| | |
| Setting Up Printers 167/1+
| |
| | |
| If you installed a printer when you installed OS/2, a printer object is on your
| |
| Desktop. The printer object is used to print jobs (data files) and check their
| |
| progress. If you want to add a printer object, see Installing a Printer.
| |
| Note: The explanations and instructions in this chapter apply to printers and
| |
| plotters.
| |
| Each printer object represents a certain arrangement of hardware, software, and
| |
| configurations, which simplifies the printing process. Printer objects can
| |
| represent local printers and network printers. Local printers are connected to
| |
| individual computers or individual workstations on a network. Network printers
| |
| are connected to local area network (LAN) servers and can be used by
| |
| workstations connected to the network. For more detailed information about
| |
| printer and printing, see the OS/2 Tutorial and the online Printing in OS/2 book
| |
| located in the Information folder.
| |
| | |
| Installing a Printer 168/2+
| |
| | |
| Even if you did not select a printer during the OS/2 installation, you still can
| |
| add a printer to the system. There are several different procedures to choose
| |
| from. From the following list, choose the procedure that best describes your
| |
| situation, then follow the instructions to add the printer.
| |
| o Create a printer object but use a printer driver that is currently
| |
| installed on the system. See Creating a Printer Object.
| |
| o Create a printer object and install a new printer driver to use with it.
| |
| See Creating a Printer Object and Installing a Printer Driver.
| |
| o Install a new printer driver but use an existing printer object. See
| |
| Installing a Printer Driver Only.
| |
| o Change the printer driver being used with an existing printer object. See
| |
| Changing Printer Drivers.
| |
| o Install a Windows printer driver for use with WIN-OS/2. See Installing a
| |
| Printer Driver for a WIN-OS/2 Session.
| |
| o Install an OEM (Other Equipment Manufacturer) printer driver for use with
| |
| Windows. See Installing a Printer Driver from Another Manufacturer for a
| |
| WIN-OS/2 Session.
| |
| Note: When you create an OS/2 printer object, you might be prompted to create
| |
| an equivalent Windows printer object. If you choose to create the Windows
| |
| printer object, you also are prompted to install a Windows printer driver.
| |
| | |
| Creating a Printer Object 169/3
| |
| | |
| This procedure involves adding a printer object and selecting a printer driver.
| |
| Use this procedure if you have existing printer drivers installed on your system
| |
| and you want this new printer object to use one of them.
| |
| To create a printer object to use with an existing printer driver:
| |
| 1. Open Templates.
| |
| 2. Point to the Printer template.
| |
| 3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 4. Drag the template to a folder or the Desktop.
| |
| 5. Release mouse button 2. The Create a Printer window is displayed.
| |
| 6. Type a name for the printer in the Name field.
| |
| 7. Select the port to which the printer is connected.
| |
| 8. Select the printer driver that corresponds to your printer model.
| |
| 9. Select Create.
| |
| 10. Respond to the "Do you want to install an equivalent WIN-OS/2 printer
| |
| configuration" question; then follow the instructions on the screen to
| |
| complete the installation.
| |
| A new printer object is on your Desktop. If you want to customize the settings
| |
| for this new printer object, see Setting Printer Properties.
| |
| | |
| Creating a Printer Object and Installing a Printer Driver 170/3
| |
| | |
| This procedure involves creating a printer object and installing a printer
| |
| driver. Use this procedure if you want to create a printer object and install a
| |
| new printer driver.
| |
| 1. Open Templates.
| |
| 2. Point to the Printer template.
| |
| 3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
| |
| 4. Drag the template to a folder or the Desktop.
| |
| 5. Release mouse button 2.
| |
| 6. Type a name for the printer in the Name field.
| |
| 7. Select the port to which the printer is connected.
| |
| 8. Select Install new printer driver.
| |
| 9. Use the instructions in the following list to install your printer driver:
| |
| o If your printer driver came with the OS/2 operating system, follow
| |
| the instructions for Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2.
| |
| o If your printer driver did not come with the OS/2 operating system,
| |
| follow the instructions for Other Printer Driver.
| |
| Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2
| |
| 1. Select one or more printer drivers in the list.
| |
| 2. Select Install.
| |
| 3. Ensure that the information in the Directory field is correct.
| |
| 4. Select OK.
| |
| 5. Select create to create the printer object.
| |
| Other Printer Driver
| |
| 1. Select Other OS/2 printer driver
| |
| 2. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
| |
| appropriate drive designation and path in the Directory field.
| |
| 3. Select Refresh. Wait until the window fills with printer drivers.
| |
| 4. Select one or more drivers. If the driver you need is not listed, insert
| |
| another diskette or change the information in the Directory field and
| |
| select Refresh again.
| |
| 5. Select Install.
| |
| 6. Select Create to create the printer object.
| |
| A new printer object is on your Desktop. If you want to customize the settings
| |
| for this new printer object, see Setting Printer Properties.
| |
| Tip Many printers have multiple printer drivers available. For example,
| |
| Hewlett Packard has several drivers for their LaserJet IIID printer. To
| |
| ensure that you get the correct driver with the printer model you select,
| |
| scroll the Printer Driver field to the right until you can see the name of
| |
| the printer driver.
| |
| | |
| Installing a Printer Driver Only 171/3
| |
| | |
| Sometimes you have an existing printer object, but you do not have the correct
| |
| printer driver on your system. This might happen if you add a different printer
| |
| to your system.
| |
| To install a new driver for an existing printer object:
| |
| 1. Point to the printer object.
| |
| 2. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 3. Select Settings.
| |
| 4. Select the Printer driver tab.
| |
| 5. Point to one of the printer driver objects.
| |
| 6. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 7. Select Install.
| |
| 8. Use the instructions in the following list to install your printer driver:
| |
| o If your printer driver came with the OS/2 operating system, follow
| |
| the instructions for Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2.
| |
| o If your printer driver did not come with the OS/2 operating system,
| |
| follow the instructions for Other Printer Driver.
| |
| Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2
| |
| 1. Select one or more printer drivers in the list.
| |
| 2. Select Install.
| |
| 3. Ensure that the information in the Directory field is correct.
| |
| 4. Select OK.
| |
| Other Printer Driver
| |
| 1. Select Other OS/2 printer driver.
| |
| 2. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
| |
| appropriate drive designation and path in the Directory field.
| |
| 3. Select Refresh.
| |
| 4. Select one or more drivers. If the driver you need is not listed, insert
| |
| another diskette or change the information in the Directory field and
| |
| select Refresh again.
| |
| 5. Select Install.
| |
| A new printer driver is installed. If you want to customize the settings for
| |
| this new printer driver, see Setting Printer Properties.
| |
| Tip Many printers have multiple printer drivers available. For example,
| |
| Hewlett Packard has several drivers for their LaserJet IIID printer. To
| |
| ensure that you get the correct driver with the printer model you select,
| |
| scroll the Printer Driver field to the right until you can see the printer
| |
| driver name.
| |
| | |
| Changing Printer Drivers 172/3
| |
| | |
| You might already have both the printer object and the printer driver installed
| |
| on your system, but you need to connect them. This might happen if you like to
| |
| use different printer drivers with a printer object.
| |
| To change to a different printer driver:
| |
| 1. Point to the printer object.
| |
| 2. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 3. Select Settings.
| |
| 4. Select the Printer driver tab.
| |
| 5. Select the printer driver.
| |
| 6. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 7. Double-click.
| |
| The printer object is now set up to use a different printer driver. See Setting
| |
| Printer Properties for information about setting the properties to match the
| |
| capabilities of the new printer driver.
| |
| | |
| Installing a Printer Driver for a WIN-OS/2 Session 173/3
| |
| | |
| Windows programs print directly to the OS/2 spooler. Therefore, multiple print
| |
| jobs can be spooled from one WIN-OS/2 session or multiple WIN-OS/2 sessions.
| |
| To install a printer driver in Windows:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen.
| |
| 4. Open WIN-OS/2 Main.
| |
| 5. Open Control Panel.
| |
| 6. Open Printers.
| |
| 7. Select Add and then select a printer driver in the list.
| |
| 8. Select Install.
| |
| 9. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
| |
| appropriate drive designation and path in the Install Driver pop-up
| |
| window.
| |
| 10. Select OK.
| |
| 11. Select Connect.
| |
| 12. Select LPT1.OS2, LPT2.OS2, or LPT3.OS2.
| |
| Note: You can select a COMx port, but no spooling to the OS/2 Print
| |
| object will occur. However, you will still be able to use the Print
| |
| Manager in Windows.
| |
| 13. Select OK.
| |
| 14. Select the printer that you want to assign as the default.
| |
| 15. Select the Set as Default Printer pushbutton.
| |
| 16. Select Close.
| |
| | |
| Installing a Printer Driver from Another Manufacturer for a WIN-OS/2 Session 174/3
| |
| | |
| OS/2 has a wide variety of printer drivers available for use with Windows.
| |
| However, there might be times when you want to use a driver supplied by another
| |
| printer manufacturer.
| |
| To add a Windows printer driver supplied by another printer manufacturer:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen
| |
| 4. Open WIN-OS/2 Main
| |
| 5. Open Control Panel.
| |
| 6. Open Printers.
| |
| 7. Select Add.
| |
| 8. Select Unlisted Printer from the beginning of the list of printers.
| |
| 9. Select Install.
| |
| 10. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
| |
| appropriate drive designation and path in the Install Driver pop-up
| |
| window.
| |
| 11. Select OK.
| |
| 12. Select Connect.
| |
| 13. Select LPT1.OS2, LPT2.OS2, or LPT3.OS2.
| |
| 14. Select OK.
| |
| 15. Select the printer that you want to assign as the default.
| |
| 16. Select the Set as Default Printer pushbutton.
| |
| 17. Select Close.
| |
| Tip If you also want to create an OS/2 printer object for use with the same
| |
| driver, follow the instructions for Creating a Printer Object and make the
| |
| following selections:
| |
| o Select the same port you selected for your printer, using the Windows
| |
| Control Panel.
| |
| o Select the OS/2 printer driver, IBMNULL, as the default driver.
| |
| (IBMNULL is installed during system installation.)
| |
| | |
| Setting Printer Properties 175/2
| |
| | |
| A printer driver has settings called printer properties. Printer properties
| |
| describe the way your printer is physically set up.
| |
| Examples of printer properties are:
| |
| o Type of paper feed (tractor or bin)
| |
| o Number and location of paper trays
| |
| o Forms defined for your printer
| |
| o Forms loaded in the paper feed or trays of your printer
| |
| o Font cartridges loaded on the printer
| |
| o Installed soft fonts
| |
| o Additional features installed, such as extended symbol sets and patterns
| |
| o Resolution
| |
| o Orientation
| |
| o Compression
| |
| Examples of plotter properties are:
| |
| o Number of carousels
| |
| o Active carousel
| |
| o Color type of each pen in a carousel
| |
| The number and kind of properties available depend upon the type of printer or
| |
| plotter you have.
| |
| To set the printer properties:
| |
| 1. Point to the printer object.
| |
| 2. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 3. Select Settings.
| |
| 4. Select the Printer driver tab.
| |
| 5. Point to a printer driver.
| |
| 6. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 7. Select Settings.
| |
| 8. Change the properties to match your printer setup.
| |
| 9. Point to the title-bar icon.
| |
| 10. Double-click.
| |
| Your printer object is now set up to print a job. For information about how to
| |
| print a job, see the online Printing in OS/2 book located in the Information
| |
| Folder.
| |
| | |
| Using Productivity Tools and Games 176/1+
| |
| | |
| The Productivity folder provides programs that assist you in editing text and
| |
| icons, searching for files or text and displaying system utilization., Each
| |
| productivity program has a set of help menus to assist you with using the
| |
| program.
| |
| The Games folder provides you with games for your entertainment.
| |
| | |
| The Productivity Folder 177/2+
| |
| | |
| To open a Productivity program:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Productivity.
| |
| 3. Open the program you want to use.
| |
| For information about using a program in the Productivity folder, press F1
| |
| after the program is opened.
| |
| | |
| Clipboard Viewer 178/3
| |
| | |
| Clipboard Viewer is a program that enables you to view the contents of the OS/2
| |
| clipboard. The system clipboard is used to share information between programs
| |
| in the same session or in different sessions (for information about sessions,
| |
| see Using Command Prompts). It temporarily holds data being passed from one
| |
| program to another. You can copy or cut information to the clipboard from a
| |
| program in one session and then paste the information from the clipboard to a
| |
| program in a different session. For more information about the clipboard, refer
| |
| to the online book Windows Programs in OS/2
| |
| | |
| Enhanced Editor 179/3
| |
| | |
| Enhanced Editor is an editor you can use to create and edit text files. It also
| |
| enables you to work on multiple files at the same time. You can start the
| |
| Enhanced Editor by opening its object or by typing EPM at the OS/2 command
| |
| prompt and pressing Enter.
| |
| The Enhanced Editor has a number of features and functions. These features and
| |
| functions are thoroughly explained in the Quick Reference help file located
| |
| under the Help menu bar choice of the Enhanced Editor.
| |
| | |
| Icon Editor 180/3
| |
| | |
| Icon Editor is a tool that enables you to create, edit, and convert image files.
| |
| These files include icons, bit maps, and pointers. An icon is a graphical
| |
| representation of an object or a minimized program. A bit map is a special type
| |
| of image made up of a series of dots. (The OS/2 logo is an example of a bit
| |
| map.) A pointer is a small symbol on the screen that reflects the movement of
| |
| the mouse.
| |
| | |
| OS/2 System Editor 181/3
| |
| | |
| The OS/2 System Editor is used to create and edit text files. You can use the
| |
| System Editor to edit your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT system files. The System
| |
| Editor runs in a window. You can start several sessions of the System Editor so
| |
| that you can edit several files at once.
| |
| You can start the System Editor two ways:
| |
| o By selecting its object
| |
| o Opening a data file associated with the System Editor. (All data files
| |
| area associated with the System Editor by default.)
| |
| o By typing E (and pressing Enter) at an OS/2 command line If you want to
| |
| edit a particular file, you follow the E with a space and then type the
| |
| path and file name of the file.
| |
| | |
| Picture Viewer 182/3
| |
| | |
| Picture Viewer displays and prints metafile (.MET) and picture interchange
| |
| format (.PIF) files. You also can view spooler (.SPL) files; however, the file
| |
| must contain a picture in a standard OS/2 format.
| |
| Note: Picture Viewer does not support multiple-page metafiles.
| |
| Picture Viewer lets you zoom in or zoom out of a picture after it is displayed.
| |
| Move the mouse pointer to the portion of the picture you want to zoom in and
| |
| then double-click mouse button 1.
| |
| | |
| Pulse 183/3
| |
| | |
| Pulse is a system monitor. Use Pulse to see a graphic representation of how
| |
| different activities affect the system and how much processor power is still
| |
| available for other programs. You can change the colors of the graphic, adjust
| |
| the graph line, and freeze the screen image.
| |
| | |
| Seek and Scan Files 184/3
| |
| | |
| Seek and Scan Files is a program that quickly searches one or more disks for
| |
| files or text. When a file match is found, it is displayed in a selection list.
| |
| Then you can open (or run) the selected file.
| |
| | |
| The Games Folder 185/2+
| |
| | |
| The Games folder contains Klondike Solitaire, OS/2 Chess and Mahjongg.
| |
| To start a game:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Games.
| |
| 3. Open the game you want to play.
| |
| For information about playing a game in the Games folder, press F1 after the
| |
| game is opened.
| |
| | |
| Klondike Solitaire 186/3
| |
| | |
| Klondike Solitaire is a popular card game for one person. The object of this
| |
| game is to find the aces and build on them in suit and in ascending order. You
| |
| use the mouse to move the cards to their new location.
| |
| | |
| OS/2 Chess 187/3
| |
| | |
| With OS/2 Chess, you can play a game of chess against another person playing on
| |
| the same computer or on a network workstation. You also can play against the
| |
| computer. The object of the game is to checkmate your opponent's king.
| |
| | |
| Mahjongg 188/3
| |
| | |
| Mahjongg is a popular version of the ancient Chinese tile game. The object of
| |
| this game is to remove all the tiles by matching all the pairs.
| |
| | |
| Using the Information 189/1+
| |
| | |
| The Information folder contains information to aid you in using OS/2.
| |
| To open the Information folder:
| |
| 1. Point to Information
| |
| 2. Double-click.
| |
| The Information folder contains all the online documents described in this
| |
| chapter.
| |
| | |
| Using OS/2 190/2
| |
| | |
| The OS/2 Tutorial is an interactive and animated look at the OS/2 Workplace
| |
| Shell interface. It explains how to use a mouse, work with objects and folders,
| |
| use windows, and get help.
| |
| If you are new to OS/2, you should spend the 40 minutes (approximate) it takes
| |
| to go through the tutorial. You will find that it is time well spent.
| |
| To start the OS/2 Tutorial:
| |
| 1. Open Information
| |
| 2. Open Tutorial
| |
| | |
| Command Reference 191/2+
| |
| | |
| Before there were friendly operating system interfaces like the Workplace Shell,
| |
| computer users communicated with a computer using a predefined set of
| |
| instructions called commands. Users would type a command at a prompt, and the
| |
| computer would perform the requested task.
| |
| Some people still like to communicate with the computer in this way. For that
| |
| reason, OS/2 supplies both DOS and OS/2 command prompts and the OS/2 Command
| |
| Reference.
| |
| The Command Reference explains each OS/2 and DOS command, graphically shows the
| |
| correct syntax of the command, and gives examples of when and how to use the
| |
| command.
| |
| In addition, it explains the commands that can be used to create a batch file (a
| |
| series of commands that are processed sequentially). Batch files are useful for
| |
| automating the entering of commands that are used over and over again.
| |
| To open the OS/2 Command Reference:
| |
| 1. Open Information.
| |
| 2. Open Command Reference.
| |
| To open the OS/2 Command Reference and get information about a specific
| |
| command:
| |
| 1. At an OS/2 command prompt, type HELP followed by the name of the command.
| |
| For example:
| |
| HELP COPY
| |
| 2. Press Enter. The Command Reference is opened to the COPY command page.
| |
| | |
| Using the Contents Window 192/3
| |
| | |
| The Contents window is the first window that appears when the Command Reference
| |
| is opened. Notice that some of the topics in this window have a plus (+) sign
| |
| beside them. The plus sign indicates that additional topics are available.
| |
| To expand the Contents and view the additional topics:
| |
| 1. Select the + sign.
| |
| To collapse the topics in the Contents:
| |
| 1. Select the - sign.
| |
| To open a topic:
| |
| 1. Point to the title of the topic.
| |
| 2. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Obtaining Additional Information 193/3
| |
| | |
| When a topic is opened, the information for the topic is displayed in a window.
| |
| Highlighted words and phrases in the window indicate that additional information
| |
| is hidden "beneath" the word or phrase.
| |
| To view the additional information:
| |
| 1. Point to the highlighted word or phrase.
| |
| 2. Double-click.
| |
| To return to the previous window of information:
| |
| 1. Select Previous.
| |
| | |
| Searching for Information 194/3
| |
| | |
| There might be times when you are using the Command Reference when you have an
| |
| idea of what you want, but you cannot remember where it is. The search function
| |
| can help you find the information you need.
| |
| To search for a word or phrase in all the topics in the Command Reference:
| |
| 1. Select Search.
| |
| 2. Type the word or words you want to find. You can also use the ? and *
| |
| wildcard characters in the search field.
| |
| 3. Make sure that All sections is selected; then select Search.
| |
| A Search Results window appears containing a list of topics that have the word
| |
| or phrase that you were trying to find. To open a topic, point to a topic and
| |
| double-click.
| |
| Sometimes, you have a general idea where the information is. You can limit the
| |
| search to those topics by marking the topics.
| |
| To mark a topic:
| |
| 1. Press and hold Ctrl.
| |
| 2. Select the topics that you want to search.
| |
| 3. Release Ctrl.
| |
| To unmark a topic:
| |
| 1. Press and hold Ctrl.
| |
| 2. Select the topic.
| |
| 3. Release Ctrl.
| |
| To search for a word or phrase in marked topics:
| |
| 1. Select the + signs in the Contents window.
| |
| 2. Mark the topics you want to search.
| |
| 3. Select Search.
| |
| 4. Type the word or words you want to find.
| |
| 5. Make sure that Marked sections is selected; then select Search.
| |
| When the Search Results window appears, open the topics and read them.
| |
| | |
| Using a Bookmark 195/3
| |
| | |
| Information that you refer to frequently can be flagged using a bookmark.
| |
| Setting a bookmark duplicates the topic in a bookmark window.
| |
| To set a bookmark:
| |
| 1. Open the topic that you want to mark with a bookmark.
| |
| 2. Select Services.
| |
| 3. Select Bookmark.
| |
| 4. Change the name used for the bookmark (optional).
| |
| 5. Make sure Place is selected; then select OK.
| |
| To view bookmarked information:
| |
| 1. Select Services.
| |
| 2. Select Bookmark.
| |
| 3. Select View.
| |
| 4. Select the topic you want to open.
| |
| 5. Select OK.
| |
| To remove a bookmark:
| |
| 1. Select Services.
| |
| 2. Select Bookmark.
| |
| 3. Select Remove.
| |
| 4. Select the topic you want to remove.
| |
| 5. Select OK.
| |
| | |
| Printing a Topic 196/3
| |
| | |
| Some people prefer to read information in a hardcopy format. You can print a
| |
| topic, some topics, all topics, the table of contents, and the index of the
| |
| Command Reference.
| |
| To print a topic:
| |
| 1. Open the topic you want to print.
| |
| 2. Select Print.
| |
| 3. Make sure that This section is selected; then select Print.
| |
| To print more than one topic:
| |
| 1. Press and hold Ctrl.
| |
| 2. Select the topics that you want to print.
| |
| 3. Release Ctrl.
| |
| 4. Select Print.
| |
| 5. Make sure that Marked sections is selected; then select Print.
| |
| To print the table of contents, index, or all the topics:
| |
| 1. Select Print.
| |
| 2. Select the item you want to print.
| |
| 3. Select Print.
| |
| Note: The Contents and Index choices only print the entries; they do not print
| |
| the text associated with the entries. The All sections choice prints the
| |
| entire Command Reference. Before electing to do this, be aware that the
| |
| document is large and will take a long time to print.
| |
| | |
| Glossary 197/2
| |
| | |
| The Glossary is an alphabetic listing of terms used in the Workplace Shell
| |
| interface and the online help system.
| |
| To open the Glossary:
| |
| 1. Open Information.
| |
| 2. Open Glossary.
| |
| There are three ways to find a term in the glossary. You can type the first
| |
| letter of the word you are looking for, scroll through the list or use the
| |
| search function.
| |
| To scroll through the list to find a term in the glossary:
| |
| 1. Select the letter that the word begins with. If the letter is not
| |
| visible, select the tab arrow until the letter is visible; then select the
| |
| letter.
| |
| 2. Select the up or down arrow in the scroll bar until the term is visible.
| |
| 3. Point to the term.
| |
| 4. Double-click.
| |
| To use the search function to find a term in the glossary:
| |
| 1. Select Search topics.
| |
| 2. Type the term that you want to find.
| |
| 3. Select Search.
| |
| 4. When the list of matching entries appears, point to the term; then
| |
| double-click.
| |
| | |
| REXX Information 198/2+
| |
| | |
| REXX is a procedures language designed to make basic OS/2 programs easier to
| |
| write and debug. Both beginning and experienced programmers will find REXX easy
| |
| to use because it uses common English words, arithmetic and string functions,
| |
| and OS/2 commands within a simple framework.
| |
| To view the REXX Information:
| |
| 1. Open Information.
| |
| 2. Open REXX Information.
| |
| For information about using the Contents window, searching, printing and
| |
| getting additional information, see Command Reference.
| |
| | |
| Displaying Help for OS/2 Messages 199/3
| |
| | |
| You can get information to help you understand, correct, and respond to OS/2
| |
| messages. The way you request help depends upon how and where the message is
| |
| displayed.
| |
| To get help for a message that appears in a window with a Help push button:
| |
| 1. Select the Help push button.
| |
| To get help for a message that appears on a full screen and is enclosed in a
| |
| box:
| |
| 1. Use the up or down arrow key to highlight Display Help.
| |
| 2. Press Enter.
| |
| To get help for an error message that has a message number, preceded by the
| |
| letters SYS:
| |
| 1. At the OS/2 command prompt, type HELP followed by a space and the message
| |
| number. (It is not necessary to type the letters SYS or the leading
| |
| zeros.)
| |
| 2. Press Enter.
| |
| For example, if you received this message:
| |
| SYS0002: The system cannot find the file specified.
| |
| To request help for this message, type HELP 2 and then press Enter. The
| |
| following help appears:
| |
| SYS0002: The system cannot find the file specified.
| |
| EXPLANATION: The file named in the command does not exist
| |
| in the current directory or search path specified. Or, the
| |
| file name was entered incorrectly.
| |
| ACTION: Retry the command using the correct file name.
| |
| | |
| Mastering the Master Help Index 200/1+
| |
| | |
| The Master Help Index is an online, alphabetic list of topics available to help
| |
| you while using OS/2. This index contains information about:
| |
| o Things to consider before performing a task
| |
| o Steps to take to complete a task
| |
| o OS/2 concepts
| |
| o DOS error messages
| |
| To open the Master Help Index:
| |
| 1. Open Information.
| |
| 2. Open Master Help Index
| |
| Tabs turn to the page in the index of the selected alphabet letter. Tab arrows
| |
| scroll the tabs but do not scroll the index entries.
| |
| Scroll bar arrows (vertical scroll bar) scroll the index entries one line at a
| |
| time. Scroll bar arrows (horizontal scroll bar) scroll the index entries to
| |
| the left or right so you can read information that does not fit into the
| |
| window.
| |
| Index entries are the online help for the OS/2 operating system.
| |
| To open an index entry for viewing:
| |
| 1. Point to the entry.
| |
| 2. Double-click.
| |
| | |
| Accessing Additional Information 201/2
| |
| | |
| When an index entry is opened, the information for the topic is displayed in a
| |
| window. Some entries have highlighted words and phrases in the window, which
| |
| indicate that additional information is hidden "beneath" the word or phrase.
| |
| To view the additional information::
| |
| 1. Point to the highlighted word or phrase.
| |
| 2. Double-click.
| |
| To return to the previous window of information:
| |
| 1. Select Previous.
| |
| | |
| Searching for a Topic 202/2
| |
| | |
| You can search the Master Help Index for an entry using one or more words that
| |
| describe the topic. For example, to search for information about how to
| |
| duplicate an object, you might search using the word "duplicate", "duplicates",
| |
| or even "duplicating". The result of a search (using duplicate, duplicates, or
| |
| duplicating) is "copying an object".
| |
| To search for a topic:
| |
| 1. Open the Master Help Index.
| |
| 2. Select Search topics.
| |
| 3. In the Search string field, type the word or words that describe the
| |
| topic.
| |
| 4. Select Search.
| |
| 5. When the list of topics (matched items) appears, open the entry you want
| |
| to read.
| |
| | |
| Printing a Master Help Index Entry 203/2
| |
| | |
| To print a Master Help Index entry:
| |
| 1. Open the index entry you want to print.
| |
| 2. Select Print topic.
| |
| For more information about using the Master Help Index, review the OS/2
| |
| Tutorial.
| |
| | |
| =Part 4 - Troubleshooting 204/1=
| |
| | |
| | |
| Solving Installation Problems 205/1+
| |
| | |
| This chapter provides information to help you solve problems you might encounter
| |
| while installing OS/2*. It includes information about what to do if you have
| |
| problems, plus specific instructions for recovering from error messages or
| |
| problems with installation diskettes, screens, or CD-ROMs.
| |
| Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the
| |
| information dealing with a particular problem.
| |
| | |
| What to Do If You Have Problems 206/2
| |
| | |
| Installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most cases,
| |
| you will not experience problems. However, if you do encounter a problem during
| |
| installation, do the following:
| |
| 1. Read through this chapter to see if the problem you are experiencing is
| |
| documented.
| |
| 2. If you received an error message (or error number), locate the message in
| |
| this chapter and perform the suggested actions to resolve the problem.
| |
| 3. If your problem is not addressed in this section, refer to the Service and
| |
| Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions on how to get
| |
| additional assistance.
| |
| When you report your problem make sure you include the following information:
| |
| o The brand and model of the equipment you are using
| |
| o The error message or number, if any, that appeared on your screen
| |
| o The number of the installation diskette you were using when the problem
| |
| occurred
| |
| o The number for your fax machine, or the number of a fax machine to which
| |
| you have access
| |
| | |
| Editing the CONFIG.SYS File on Diskette 1 207/2
| |
| | |
| A CONFIG.SYS file contains lines of instructions that control how your computer
| |
| starts up and how it works with the devices you have attached to it.
| |
| Diskette 1, which comes with OS/2, contains a CONFIG.SYS file. The file is added
| |
| to your root directory during installation. There might be instances in which
| |
| you will be instructed in this chapter to edit your CONFIG.SYS file in order to
| |
| add a statement, "remark out" a line, or modify an existing line in the file.
| |
| If you need to alter the CONFIG.SYS file before you install OS/2, you will need
| |
| to make the changes to the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1.
| |
| Note: If the CONFIG.SYS file is changed incorrectly, you might not be able to
| |
| restart your computer. Be careful when editing the file.
| |
| To edit the CONFIG.SYS file that is on Diskette 1, use an ASCII text editor.
| |
| If you do not have a text editor installed on your computer, use the editor
| |
| that comes on the OS/2 installation diskettes. Follow these steps:
| |
| 1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
| |
| 2. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 3. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and
| |
| insert Diskette 1.
| |
| 4. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to display the command
| |
| prompt.
| |
| 5. At the command prompt, type TEDIT CONFIG.SYS and press Enter. The file
| |
| will appear on your screen, and you can make any changes or additions to
| |
| it. (Press F1 if you need help using the editor.)
| |
| 6. When you are done working on the file, press F2 to save it.
| |
| 7. Press F4 to quit the editor.
| |
| | |
| Installation Error Messages 208/2
| |
| | |
| If you receive one of the following error messages on your screen while
| |
| installing OS/2, try to resolve the problem with the suggested action.
| |
| Only some files were copied. You may be out of disk space.
| |
| Explanation: The installation program stopped transferring files because there
| |
| was not enough hard disk space available.
| |
| Action: Move non-OS/2 operating system files out of the installation
| |
| partition. You can store these files in another partition or on
| |
| a diskette. If you intend to format the installation partition,
| |
| remember to first use the BACKUP command to save any important
| |
| files.
| |
| An error occurred when System Installation tried to copy a file.
| |
| Explanation 1: The installation diskette might contain errors.
| |
| Action: Request a replacement diskette from your place of purchase.
| |
| Explanation 2: The installation program stopped transferring files because
| |
| there was not enough hard disk space available.
| |
| Action: Move non-OS/2 operating system files out of the installation
| |
| partition. You can store these files in another partition or on
| |
| a diskette. If you intend to format the installation partition,
| |
| remember to first use the BACKUP command to save any important
| |
| files.
| |
| Explanation 3: The hard disk might contain errors.
| |
| Action: Follow the CHKDSK procedure outlined in Recovering from Errors on
| |
| the Hard Disk.
| |
| An error occurred when System Installation tried to transfer system files to
| |
| your hard disk. Your hard disk might be unusable.
| |
| Explanation: The installation program stopped transferring files because an
| |
| error occurred while the boot record was being written.
| |
| Action: Format the installation partition and restart the installation.
| |
| Remember to first use the BACKUP command to save any important
| |
| files.
| |
| System Installation failed trying to load a module into memory.
| |
| Explanation: The installation program could not load a system module because
| |
| there is not enough memory. OS/2 requires a minimum of 4MB of
| |
| memory.
| |
| Action: Add more system memory (RAM).
| |
| An error occurred when System Installation tried to allocate a segment of
| |
| memory.
| |
| Explanation: The installation program could not allocate a segment of memory
| |
| because there is not enough memory. OS/2 requires a minimum of
| |
| 4MB of memory.
| |
| Action: Add more system memory (RAM).
| |
| FDISK unsuccessful.
| |
| Explanation: Your hard disk controller might not be supported.
| |
| Action: Make a copy of Diskette 1. Locate the Device Support Diskette
| |
| supplied by the manufacturer of your hard disk controller. Copy
| |
| the OS/2 device driver from that Device Support Diskette onto the
| |
| copy of Diskette 1. Then add the statement BASEDEV=xxx.SYS
| |
| (where xxx is the name of the device driver) to the CONFIG.SYS
| |
| file on the copy of Diskette 1, and restart the installation.
| |
| An error occurred when System Installation tried to locate the dynamic link
| |
| library.
| |
| Explanation: The installation program could not load the dynamic link library
| |
| because there is not enough random access memory (RAM). OS/2
| |
| requires a minimum of 4MB of memory
| |
| Action: Add more system memory (RAM).
| |
| A disk read error occurred.
| |
| Explanation: The BIOS level of the Future Domain** adapter is not compatible.
| |
| Action: Contact Future Domain for a BIOS upgrade if you own the
| |
| following:
| |
| o Future Domain TMC-850/860/875/885 with BIOS revision level 7.0
| |
| o Future Domain TMC-1660/1670/1680 with BIOS revision level 2.0
| |
| OS/2 is unable to operate your hard disk or your diskette drive.
| |
| Explanation 1: This might indicate some incompatibility between OS/2 and the
| |
| diskette drive controller or hard disk controller in your system.
| |
| Action: Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the diskette or hard disk from which
| |
| you are starting OS/2. Remove all lines with
| |
| BASEDEV=xxxxxxxx.ADD (where xxxxxxxx can be any characters), and
| |
| make sure the following two lines appear in the CONFIG.SYS:
| |
| BASEDEV=IBMxFLPY.ADD
| |
| BASEDEV=IBMINT13.I13
| |
| (where x is replaced by a 2 if you are using a Micro Channel
| |
| system, and a 1 if you are using any other system.)
| |
| Explanation 2: A diskette drive or a hard disk drive controller might have an
| |
| additional device (such as a tape backup) attached to it.
| |
| Action: Disconnect additional devices, if possible.
| |
| Explanation 3: There might be an interrupt request (IRQ) level conflict between
| |
| the diskette drive or hard disk controller and other devices
| |
| installed on your system.
| |
| Action: Change IRQ levels to eliminate conflicts.
| |
| Explanation 4: The hard disk partition on which you are installing OS/2 was
| |
| compressed with a DOS data compression program.
| |
| Action: Use the data compression program to decompress the partition.
| |
| Then restart the installation procedure.
| |
| TRAPxxx
| |
| Explanation: In general, traps are symptoms of software-related problems.
| |
| After you have pursued these symptoms from a software failure
| |
| perspective, you should consider the potential of a hardware
| |
| cause relating to caches and memory, such as the following:
| |
| o If your computer has an 80486 microprocessor, your computer might require
| |
| faster RAM chips (60ns or 70ns).
| |
| o There might be a problem with the external (level-2) CPU memory cache or
| |
| main memory system on ISA or EISA systems.
| |
| Action: Try the following:
| |
| 1. From the setup/diagnostics diskette or the BIOS Setup program built into
| |
| the computer, try disabling all shadow RAM and external (level- 2) CPU
| |
| memory caches.
| |
| 2. If problems persist during the installation of OS/2 after performing the
| |
| above action, turn off the turbo switch (if one is available) on your
| |
| system and retry the operation. Disable caching during installation or
| |
| turn the turbo switch off.
| |
| Some of the more common traps are listed below. If you receive a trap error
| |
| that is not listed, you can view help for the trap after OS/2 is installed, by
| |
| typing HELP followed by the trap number at an OS/2 command prompt. For
| |
| example:
| |
| HELP 0002
| |
| If the trap error contains a letter, as in a TRAP D error you must convert the
| |
| hexadecimal number (D) to decimal then add it to 1930. For example, TRAP D
| |
| converted would be 1943 because D hexadecimal is 13 decimal (13 added to 1930
| |
| equals 1943). So you would type HELP 1943 at an OS/2 command prompt.
| |
| A list of the hexadecimal to decimal conversions are listed below:
| |
| A = 10 D = 13
| |
| B = 11 E = 14
| |
| C = 12 F = 15
| |
| TRAP0002
| |
| Explanation: A TRAP0002 error is a hardware error and is usually related
| |
| directly to memory. Mismatched memory modules can often cause
| |
| these kinds of errors. Your computer might have a variety of
| |
| single inline memory modules (SIMMs) that were produced by
| |
| different manufacturers or that operate at different speeds.
| |
| (For example, a 1 x 9 module cannot be used with a 1 x 3 module.)
| |
| Action: Try the following:
| |
| o Have your computer checked by a service representative.
| |
| o If your computer memory is okay and the problem persists, make sure that
| |
| your system BIOS is of a recent date (1991 or later). Refer to Chapter 17,
| |
| "Special Hardware Considerations," for more information about BIOS, or
| |
| contact the manufacturer of your computer BIOS to receive the latest
| |
| version.
| |
| SYS0005
| |
| Explanation: When you perform a redirected remote installation of OS/2 using
| |
| SYSINST2 for panel installation, the error message SYS0005
| |
| appears while the computer attempts to copy UNPACK2.EXE.
| |
| Action: This Access Denied Error is caused by damage to the extended
| |
| attribute data on the NetWare** Server. To correct this problem,
| |
| delete the old disk images on the server and create new OS/2 disk
| |
| images.
| |
| SYS1200 and EC=00BF
| |
| Explanation: The DOS environment cannot be created.
| |
| Action: If you see the error message SYS1200 while attempting to use the
| |
| Dual Boot feature to change to DOS, and you also see error code
| |
| EC=00BF, check your CONFIG.SYS file. Make sure your virtual DOS
| |
| device drivers have not been remarked out of or removed from your
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file. If necessary, look at the CONFIG.SYS file in
| |
| the OS2\INSTALL directory (the CONFIG.SYS file as it was
| |
| originally installed) to see how the DOS device drivers should be
| |
| listed.
| |
| SYS1201
| |
| Explanation: A device driver specified in the CONFIG.SYS file cannot be found,
| |
| is the incorrect device driver (ex. DOS device driver), or is
| |
| specified twice within the file.
| |
| Action: Make sure the correct device driver for the device is installed,
| |
| and then check the CONFIG.SYS file to make sure the information
| |
| specified is correct.
| |
| SYS1475
| |
| Explanation: The file OS2BOOT cannot be found. This is a hidden system file
| |
| and must reside in the root directory of the drive from which the
| |
| operating system is started.
| |
| Action: Remove the diskette from drive A and restart the system. If the
| |
| problem was not caused by a diskette in drive A, then the OS2BOOT
| |
| file might be missing. Try the following procedure:
| |
| 1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
| |
| 2. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 3. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and
| |
| insert Diskette 1.
| |
| 4. Press Enter.
| |
| 5. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to display the command
| |
| prompt.
| |
| 6. Reinsert the Installation Diskette.
| |
| 7. Type sysinstx c: and press Enter. (If your operating system resides on a
| |
| drive other than C, use the appropriate drive letter instead.)
| |
| If this procedure does not correct the problem, it might be
| |
| necessary to reinstall the operating system.
| |
| SYS1719
| |
| Explanation: The file IBM386FS\HPFS386.IFS does not contain a valid device
| |
| driver or file system driver.
| |
| Action: Edit your CONFIG.SYS file and delete the following line:
| |
| IFS=x:\OS2\HPFS.IFS
| |
| SYS2025
| |
| Explanation: A disk read error occurred. This might be a disk error or a
| |
| damaged system boot record.
| |
| Actions: Try the following:
| |
| o If this error occurred while the system was loading, follow the procedure
| |
| in Recovering from Errors on the Hard Disk.
| |
| o If this error occurred when the system was reading the installation
| |
| diskettes, there might be an error on the diskette. If you already have
| |
| an operating system installed on your computer, use the XDFCOPY command to
| |
| make a copy of the installation diskettes. Retry the installation with
| |
| the newly copied diskettes.
| |
| o If your computer has BIOS supplied by AMI** or Phoenix**, you might need
| |
| to upgrade the BIOS. Refer to Chapter 17, "Special Hardware
| |
| Considerations."
| |
| o If your system has a local bus IDE controller card, disable the BIOS on
| |
| the 32-bit local bus IDE controller card and use the generic INT13 driver
| |
| instead of IBM1S506.ADD.
| |
| o Make sure that there is not a hardware problem with your hard disk
| |
| controller or your diskette drive.
| |
| SYS2026
| |
| Explanation: The file OS2LDR cannot be found. This is a hidden system file
| |
| and must reside in the root directory of the drive from which the
| |
| operating system is started.
| |
| Action: Try the following:
| |
| Make sure a non-system diskette is not in the diskette drive. If
| |
| a diskette is in the drive, remove it and restart the system.
| |
| If the OS2LDR file is still missing:
| |
| 1. Insert the Installation Diskette into the diskette drive and restart the
| |
| system.
| |
| 2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
| |
| 3. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to access a command
| |
| prompt.
| |
| 4. Copy the OS2LDR file from the Installation Diskette to the root directory
| |
| on the OS/2 partition.
| |
| 5. Restart the system.
| |
| SYS2027
| |
| Explanation: This message usually accompanies messages SYS1475 and SYS2025,
| |
| and means that the system must be restarted. See the explanation
| |
| and actions for these messages for more specific information.
| |
| Action: Insert a system diskette and restart the system.
| |
| SYS2028
| |
| Explanation: The system cannot find the OS2KRNL file. This is a hidden system
| |
| file and must reside in the root directory of the drive from
| |
| which the operating system is started.
| |
| Action: Try the following:
| |
| 1. Insert the Installation Diskette into the diskette drive and restart the
| |
| system.
| |
| 2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
| |
| 3. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to access a command
| |
| prompt.
| |
| 4. Copy the OS2KRNLI file from the Installation Diskette to the root
| |
| directory of the OS/2 partition. Type: A:OS2KRNLI C:\OS2KRNL and press
| |
| Enter. (Where A: is the diskette drive containing the Installation
| |
| Diskette and C: is the drive on which you are installing OS/2.) Notice the
| |
| change in name of the OS2KRNL file.
| |
| 5. Remove the diskette from the drive.
| |
| 6. Restart the system.
| |
| SYS2029
| |
| Explanation: The file OS2KRNL is damaged or not readable.
| |
| Action: Copy the OS2KRNLI file from the Installation Diskette to the root
| |
| directory of the drive containing the operating system. Follow
| |
| the instructions for error message SYS2028.
| |
| SYS2030
| |
| Explanation: The system does not have enough memory to start the operating
| |
| system. OS/2 requires a minimum of 4MB of memory.
| |
| Action: Add more memory to the system.
| |
| SYS3146
| |
| Explanation: The system cannot find the OS2LDR.MSG file. This is a hidden
| |
| system file and must reside in the root directory of the drive
| |
| from which the operating system is started.
| |
| Action: Copy the OS2LDR.MSG file from the Installation Diskette to the
| |
| root directory of the drive containing the operating system.
| |
| SYS3147
| |
| Explanation: The OS2LDR.MSG file is not readable. The file might be damaged.
| |
| Action: Copy the OS2LDR.MSG file from the Installation Diskette to the
| |
| root directory of the drive containing the operating system.
| |
| SYS3161
| |
| Explanation: The system detected an 8086, 8088, or 80286 processor. These
| |
| processors are not supported by OS/2.
| |
| Action: Upgrade your system so that your processor is compatible with the
| |
| 80386 processor.
| |
| | |
| Installation Diskette Problems 209/2
| |
| | |
| Following are solutions to problems that might occur while you are using the
| |
| installation diskettes to install OS/2.
| |
| Diskette 1: If the installation procedure stops while Diskette 1 is in the
| |
| diskette drive, there might be a problem with the features of the
| |
| hard disk controller. If the controller has on-board disk
| |
| caching, disable the caching. If the controller can do
| |
| asynchronous memory refreshes, turn off that feature. Make sure
| |
| that other IRQ settings do not conflict with the hard disk
| |
| controller IRQ setting. If multiple hard disk controllers or
| |
| hardcards are installed in the system, it might be necessary to
| |
| remove one of them.
| |
| The following apply to machine-specific problems:
| |
| o If you are installing on a system with an Allways** IN2000 SCSI adapter,
| |
| and an IPE or FDISK error is displayed during the installation of Diskette
| |
| 1. Upgrade your system to the current BIOS level of VCN:1-02. The Allways
| |
| IN2000 SCSI adapter might require an EPROM upgrade to operate with OS/2.
| |
| You might find that you have some problems when trying to install over DOS
| |
| partitions. To correct these problems, you need to install the EPROM and
| |
| reformat the hard drive.
| |
| o If you are installing OS/2 on a Mylex** system, a TRAP0008 error occurs
| |
| during the installation of Diskette 1. For more information on this
| |
| error, contact Mylex.
| |
| o If you are installing on a Compaq** 386/331 Deskpro system, a TRAP000D
| |
| error occurs during the installation of Diskette 1. To correct this
| |
| problem, do the following:
| |
| 1. Make a copy of Diskette 1. You will modify the copy.
| |
| 2. Use a text editor to edit the CONFIG.SYS file that exists on the copy
| |
| of Diskette 1.
| |
| 3. Delete the following statement from the CONFIG.SYS file:
| |
| BASEDEV=IBM2SCSI.ADD
| |
| 4. Use the copy of the diskette during the installation process instead
| |
| of the original.
| |
| Diskette 3: If the installation program continues to prompt you to insert
| |
| Diskette 3, you have a 1.44 MB diskette drive that can work in
| |
| either IBM* PC/XT* mode or IBM PCAT mode. Contact your service
| |
| representative to determine if there are hardware-specific
| |
| considerations.
| |
| Any Diskette: If several diskettes are successfully installed, then the system
| |
| refuses a diskette and makes a beeping sound, your system might
| |
| be infected with the Joshi virus. (This symptom usually appears
| |
| after the first phase of the installation is complete and the
| |
| system is restarted.) The Joshi virus is a DOS virus that
| |
| interferes with OS/2 and causes random lockups. The Joshi virus:
| |
| o Operates by trapping disk reads and writes. If the virus is active in
| |
| memory, programs that try to locate the virus on diskette will have
| |
| problems detecting it.
| |
| o Is carried on the boot sector of an infected data diskette or system
| |
| diskette. This virus originated in DOS but can survive in OS/2. When you
| |
| start an infected system, the virus resides in memory and survives a
| |
| Ctrl+Alt+Del startup. If you do not type Happy Birthday Joshi, the system
| |
| will stop.
| |
| o Is copied to the boot sector of every diskette. The virus will be
| |
| transferred to any computer on which the user performed any diskette
| |
| operation that included reading from, or writing to, the infected
| |
| diskette.
| |
| o Spreads from infected diskettes to DOS and OS/2 systems when the systems
| |
| are started from diskettes.
| |
| o Interferes with the startup from the hard disk of OS/2-based systems. The
| |
| warning that OS/2 will give is that the IBM1FLPY.ADD file is bad or
| |
| missing.
| |
| Many antivirus packages are effective at detecting this virus.
| |
| In DOS, the Norton Antivirus Version 2.1 can both detect and
| |
| clear the virus.
| |
| In OS/2, Central Point Anti-Virus** can detect the virus.
| |
| McAfee** Clean and Scan and IBM Anti-Virus/2* (AV/2) can both
| |
| detect and clear the virus.
| |
| | |
| Installation Screen Problems 210/2
| |
| | |
| Following are solutions for problems you might have with your screen during the
| |
| installation of OS/2.
| |
| White Screen during Installation
| |
| If the display screen is white during the installation of OS/2 and there is no
| |
| system activity, set the video adapter to operate on an 8-bit mode and move the
| |
| adapter to an 8-bit slot. Do the following:
| |
| 1. Turn off the computer and disable the autosensing capability of the video
| |
| adapter.
| |
| 2. Modify the settings. Refer to the documentation that came with your video
| |
| adapter.
| |
| 3. Place the adapter in an 8-bit slot. Then install OS/2.
| |
| 4. Return the adapter to the 16-bit slot and set back to the 16-bit mode.
| |
| White Screen with Disk Light On Constantly
| |
| If you are installing OS/2 on a fast 486 ISA-bus computer, you might encounter
| |
| a white screen and the disk light constantly on. To correct this problem, try
| |
| to reduce the speed of the computer by turning off the turbo mode of the
| |
| computer. Refer to the documentation that came with your computer to find out
| |
| how to change the mode.
| |
| Black Lines on an OS/2 Logo Screen
| |
| During the installation on a Gateway** 2000 with an 80486/66MHz processor, a
| |
| local bus, and an ATI** Graphics Ultra Pro, the system will get to the screen
| |
| with the colorful OS/2 logo, and then the installation will stop. The display
| |
| screen shows horizontal bands of video separated by black bands that scroll
| |
| horizontally across the screen. To correct this problem, do the following:
| |
| 1. Start DOS.
| |
| 2. At the DOS prompt, type CD \MACH32 and press Enter.
| |
| 3. Type install and press Enter.
| |
| 4. At the Main Selection screen, select Set Power Up Configuration.
| |
| 5. Select Monitor Type and press Enter.
| |
| 6. Select 1572 Monitor with 72Hz Refresh Rate and press Enter.
| |
| 7. Select IBM Default (or 60Hz) as the new display.
| |
| Note: After OS/2 is successfully installed, repeat the steps to reselect the
| |
| 1572 Monitor type.
| |
| | |
| Installation CD-ROM Problems 211/2
| |
| | |
| Cannot Access CD-ROM During Installation
| |
| If the device driver for your CD-ROM is not included in the OS/2 package, but is
| |
| available from the CD-ROM manufacturer, you can modify Diskette 1 to add the
| |
| device driver. Refer to "Chapter 17, Special Hardware Considerations" for
| |
| instructions.
| |
| If you cannot access your CD-ROM drive during installation from a CD, but you
| |
| can access the drive using DOS, you can install OS/2 using disk images. Disk
| |
| Images are copies of the installation program that you put on diskette. You
| |
| create disk images by using the XDFCOPY utility program to copy images from the
| |
| CD to diskettes. You then use these diskettes to install OS/2.
| |
| Note: Installation diskettes are in a special format called XDF. The only
| |
| command you should use with an XDF disketee is XDFCOPY.
| |
| Be sure to use formatted diskettes for this procedure. To find out exactly how
| |
| many diskettes you will need:
| |
| 1. Place the CD in the CD-ROM drive
| |
| 2. Type: DIR X:\DISKIMGS\OS2\35 /W (where: X is the drive letter of your
| |
| CD-ROM drive and 35 is the diskette size.)
| |
| 3. Press Enter. A list of files will appear on your display.
| |
| 4. Count the files that end with the extension .DSK. Each .DSK file will
| |
| require a separate diskette.
| |
| Use the following command to create each disk image:
| |
| X:\DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY
| |
| X:\DISKIMGS\OS2\size\diskname.dsk Y:
| |
| where:
| |
| X: is the drive letter of the CD-ROM drive.
| |
| \DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY is the location and name of the program used to create
| |
| the diskettes
| |
| DISKIMGS\OS2\size is the location of the files containing the disk
| |
| images. Substitute 35 for the size parameter. Use 35
| |
| for 3.5-inch 1.44MB and 2.88MB diskettes.
| |
| diskname.dsk is the disk image file name (for example, DISK0.DSK).
| |
| Y: is the drive letter of your diskette drive.
| |
| For example, to create the Installation Diskette (DISK0.DSK) on a 3.5-inch
| |
| diskette, type the following and press Enter.
| |
| E:\DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY E:\DISKIMGS\OS2\35\DISK0.DSK A:
| |
| Where: E: is the CD-ROM drive and A: is the diskette drive.
| |
| | |
| Miscellaneous Installation Problems 212/2
| |
| | |
| Following are solutions to miscellaneous problems that might occur while you are
| |
| installing OS/2.
| |
| Missing Device Driver Needed for Installation
| |
| If the device driver needed to install OS/2 on your computer is missing from the
| |
| installation diskettes, obtain the device driver from either the device
| |
| manufacturer or a bulletin board, then do the following:
| |
| 1. Make a backup copy of Diskette 1.
| |
| 2. Copy the needed device driver file (.ADD) to the backup copy of Diskette
| |
| 1.
| |
| 3. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the backup copy of Diskette 1 and change the
| |
| BASEDEV= statement to include the file name and extension of the new
| |
| device driver. Example: BASEDEV=IBM1FLPY.ADD
| |
| 4. Save the file, and use the updated copy of Diskette 1 to install OS/2.
| |
| Computer Beeps Constantly
| |
| If your computer beeps constantly while you are changing diskettes during
| |
| installation, you might have a defective diskette drive controller or cable.
| |
| Check the controller and cable for damage, and also check all their
| |
| connections.
| |
| Promise IDE Cached Controller
| |
| To install OS/2 on a system with a Promise IDE Cached Controller, you must edit
| |
| the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1 and change the following line:
| |
| BASEDEV=IBM1S506
| |
| to
| |
| BASEDEV=IBM1S506 /!SMS
| |
| ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Adapter
| |
| ATI makes various display adapters that are comparable with the IBM 8514/A
| |
| display adapter. The ATI Graphics Ultra, 8514 Ultra, and Graphics Vantage can
| |
| all be treated as IBM 8514/A adapters for the OS/2 installation process.
| |
| However, if you have an ATI Graphics Ultra Pro, you must follow these steps
| |
| before you install OS/2. The INSTALL utility program used in the following
| |
| steps will set your display to run as a VGA display so that OS/2 can be
| |
| installed. After OS/2 is installed, you can run the INSTALL utility program
| |
| again to select the correct display attached to the system.
| |
| Note: Following these steps incorrectly might cause your system to hang with a
| |
| black screen or distort your display with static. Refer to the ATI
| |
| documentation if you encounter problems configuring the Ultra Pro memory.
| |
| To prepare your ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter for use with OS/2:
| |
| 1. Start your system using DOS, preferably from a diskette. You will need to
| |
| start DOS again after OS/2 is installed because the ATI INSTALL utility
| |
| program runs only in DOS.
| |
| 2. Type INSTALL at the DOS command prompt.
| |
| 3. If your adapter has 1MB of video memory, select SHARED. If your adapter
| |
| has 2MB of video memory, ensure that the aperture is properly configured.
| |
| 4. Select Monitor Setup.
| |
| 5. Select Custom.
| |
| 6. Set the refresh rate for 640 x 480 to IBM DEFAULT (or 60Hz).
| |
| 7. Set the refresh of all other resolutions as appropriate for your display.
| |
| 8. Save the configuration.
| |
| 9. Install OS/2. Make sure that during the installation of OS/2, you select
| |
| 8514 as the primary display type.
| |
| IBM PS/2* Model 30-286 Upgrades
| |
| OS/2 is not supported on IBM PS/2 Model 30-286 upgraded to a 386
| |
| microprocessor.
| |
| Aox** Systems
| |
| If your computer has an Aox add-in microprocessor adapter and you encounter
| |
| problems either installing or starting up your OS/2 system, call the Aox
| |
| Corporation and ask for the latest "flash-prom" code upgrade.
| |
| IOMEGA** PC Powered Pro 90
| |
| If you are using an IOMEGA PC Powered Pro 90, call the IOMEGA service number
| |
| and request OAD Driver Version 2.3.
| |
| IBM PS/2 Model 90 and 95 Computers
| |
| o If you are experiencing problems with your Model 90 or 95, ensure your
| |
| system is at the latest engineering change (EC) level. Your IBM service
| |
| representative can assist you.
| |
| o You must ensure that you have matched pairs of single in-line memory
| |
| modules. This means that each pair of single in-line memory modules, as
| |
| described in your technical reference manual, must be matched in memory
| |
| size and speed. Mixing these modules can cause some computers to report
| |
| memory errors.
| |
| All ISA, EISA, and PCI Systems
| |
| If you are installing OS/2 on a ISA, EISA, or PCI system, some CMOS settings
| |
| might need to be adjusted:
| |
| o Turn off ROM shadowing (system and video) if it is not essential to
| |
| starting your system.
| |
| Usually only extremely fast systems require ROM shadowing during a
| |
| startup. Do not turn ROM shadowing on again after installing OS/2.
| |
| o If you get a TRAP0002 error, add wait states (both read and write, if the
| |
| option is given). Add two wait states and see if the TRAP0002 error goes
| |
| away.
| |
| Note: Take as few of the actions here as are necessary to prevent the
| |
| TRAP0002 error, because you must retain whatever setting makes the system
| |
| function. If you added wait states, do not remove them later without
| |
| adding faster (matched) DRAM to your system.
| |
| o If you experience other traps or complete system hangs while installing,
| |
| turn off your external processor cache (internal cache is not a problem).
| |
| If this corrects the problem, have the system board repaired or replaced
| |
| before you turn on the cache again.
| |
| | |
| Solving Problems After Installation 213/1+
| |
| | |
| This chapter provides information to help you solve problems you might encounter
| |
| after OS/2 has been installed. It includes information about what to do if you
| |
| have problems, plus specific instructions for startup, memory, display, mouse,
| |
| CD-ROM, hard disk, and Desktop problems. In addition, procedures are given for
| |
| recovering the Desktop, CONFIG.SYS file, user INI file, hard disk, and memory
| |
| state data.
| |
| Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the
| |
| information dealing with a particular problem.
| |
| | |
| What to Do If You Have Problems 214/2
| |
| | |
| OS/2 is a stable operating system and, in most cases, you will not experience
| |
| problems. However, if you do encounter a problem while using OS/2, do the
| |
| following:
| |
| 1. Read through this chapter to see if the problem you are experiencing is
| |
| documented.
| |
| 2. If your problem is not addressed in this section, refer to the Service and
| |
| Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions on how to get
| |
| additional assistance.
| |
| Before you call for assistance, make sure you call from a telephone that is
| |
| near your computer and gather the following before you speak with the OS/2
| |
| specialist:
| |
| o Your registration number (located in the Service and Support brochure in
| |
| the US only)
| |
| o The brand and model of the equipment you are using
| |
| o The error message or number, if any, that appeared on your screen
| |
| o Paper and pencil for taking notes
| |
| o The number for your fax machine, or the number of a fax machine to which
| |
| you have access
| |
| | |
| Editing the CONFIG.SYS File in Your Root Directory 215/2
| |
| | |
| A CONFIG.SYS file contains lines of instructions that control how your computer
| |
| starts up and how it works with the devices you have attached to it.
| |
| During installation, the CONFIG.SYS file is copied from Diskette 1 and added to
| |
| your root directory. There might be instances in which you will be instructed in
| |
| this chapter to edit your CONFIG.SYS file in order to add a statement, "remark
| |
| out" a line, or modify an existing line in the file. If you need to alter the
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file after you install OS/2, you will need to make the changes to the
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file located in the root directory on the hard disk (usually drive
| |
| C).
| |
| Note: If the CONFIG.SYS file is changed incorrectly, you might not be able to
| |
| restart your computer. Be careful when editing the file.
| |
| To edit the CONFIG.SYS file that is in your root directory (after installing
| |
| OS/2), follow these steps:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Type COPY CONFIG.SYS CONFIG.OLD and press Enter.
| |
| 4. Type E C:\CONFIG.SYS and press Enter.
| |
| where: E is the command used to start the System Editor that comes with
| |
| OS/2
| |
| C: is the letter of the drive where OS/2 was installed
| |
| \ is the symbol for root directory
| |
| The CONFIG.SYS file will appear on your screen, and you can make changes
| |
| to it.
| |
| 5. When you are done working on the file, select File, then select Save.
| |
| 6. Select Type... in the Save notification window.
| |
| 7. Select Plain Text, then select Set.
| |
| 8. Press Alt+F4 to exit from the System Editor.
| |
| 9. Shut down your computer. (You must restart your computer anytime you make
| |
| changes to the CONFIG.SYS file in order for the changes to take effect.)
| |
| For more information about the statements that can appear in the CONFIG.SYS
| |
| file, refer to the Command Reference that is located in the Information folder
| |
| on the OS/2 Desktop.
| |
| | |
| Startup Problems 216/2
| |
| | |
| Following are solutions to problems that might occur when you try to start your
| |
| system after installing OS/2.
| |
| Internal Processing Error Message Appears
| |
| The system stops and the screen displays INTERNAL PROCESSING ERROR at the top of
| |
| a message.
| |
| Record the information exactly as it displayed on the screen, and write a
| |
| description of what you were doing when the trap occurred. Then, refer to the
| |
| Service and Support information in your OS/2 package for instructions about
| |
| calling for additional assistance.
| |
| Boot Manager Menu Does Not Appear:
| |
| If you installed the Boot Manager partition but the Boot Manager startup menu
| |
| does not appear as expected when you start the system, you will need to make the
| |
| Boot Manager partition startable. Do the following:
| |
| 1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
| |
| screen, press Alt+F1.
| |
| 3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
| |
| System Will Not Start DOS from the Boot Manager Menu
| |
| On a system with a VESA** SUPER I/O controller and two disk drives, the system
| |
| might not start from the Boot Manager menu. Instead, it will display a
| |
| non-system disk or disk error message. For more information on this message,
| |
| check the VESA controller documentation or contact the manufacturer.
| |
| Dual Boot Does Not Work
| |
| If the BOOT command is unsuccessful when you try to switch from DOS to OS/2,
| |
| you might have one or more active terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) or DOS
| |
| cache programs. If so, end the programs before you use the BOOT command. For
| |
| TSR programs that are loaded from AUTOEXEC.BAT, you must deactivate the
| |
| programs before using the BOOT command.
| |
| Error When Using Dual Boot on a PS/1 System
| |
| On PS/1 systems preinstalled with DOS 5.0, using Dual Boot from OS/2 to DOS
| |
| might result in an error. To correct this problem, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to
| |
| restart the system.
| |
| | |
| Memory Problems 217/2
| |
| | |
| Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with memory after
| |
| installing OS/2.
| |
| IBM PS/2 Model 90 or 95 Memory Parity Errors
| |
| If your Model 90 or 95 is a 33 MHz system and you are having difficulty
| |
| identifying intermittent memory parity errors such as TRAP0002, which force you
| |
| to restart your system, then ECA053 might apply. If your microprocessor card
| |
| has part number 84F9356, contact your IBM representative to assist you with a
| |
| replacement.
| |
| IBM PS/2 Model 90 Memory Errors
| |
| If your Model 90 is experiencing intermittent memory errors, ECA084 might apply
| |
| if the part number of your memory riser card is N33F4905 or 84F9356. Your IBM
| |
| representative can assist you with a replacement.
| |
| | |
| Display Problems 218/2
| |
| | |
| Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with your display after
| |
| installing OS/2.
| |
| White Screen after Installation
| |
| If the display screen is white after installation and there is no system
| |
| activity, set the video adapter to operate on an 8-bit bus and move the adapter
| |
| to an 8-bit slot. If possible, disable the autosensing capability of the video
| |
| adapter. For information on modifying these settings, refer to the
| |
| documentation that came with your video adapter.
| |
| Blank Screen after Installation
| |
| If the Desktop appears to be blank when you restart the system after the
| |
| complete installation of OS/2, and you are using a ProComm** Micro Channel* SCSI
| |
| adapter, do not attempt to run CHKDSK on the drive connected to the adapter.
| |
| Contact ProComm to receive the device driver needed for the SCSI card.
| |
| System Stops at Logo Screen
| |
| If you have a Future Domain 16xx SCSI controller, you might have installed OS/2
| |
| successfully but then found a problem the next time you started OS/2. If the
| |
| system stopped running with the logo screen displayed, there might be a conflict
| |
| with the interrupt settings of your hardware devices. Check all interrupt
| |
| request (IRQ) settings on all your hardware devices and make sure that each one
| |
| is using a unique IRQ. Future Domain controllers are shipped from the factory
| |
| preset to use IRQ5. However, IRQ5 is the interrupt that is normally assigned to
| |
| LPT2. Also, it is common for IRQ5 to be used by sound or communications
| |
| adapters. You might not see a problem immediately because of interrupt
| |
| conflicts, but eventually a problem can occur.
| |
| System Will Not Restart on a High-Resolution Display
| |
| If you installed support for a high-resolution display adapter and your system
| |
| will not restart, follow the procedure below. This procedure will set the
| |
| adapter support to a lower resolution (VGA) but will enable your system to
| |
| start.
| |
| 1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
| |
| screen, press Alt+F1.
| |
| 3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.
| |
| 4. Use Selective Install to install support for another high-resolution
| |
| display adapter.
| |
| Graphics Mode and Refresh Rates Incorrect for Hardware
| |
| Most video adapters are sensitive to the characteristics and capabilities of
| |
| the display attached to them. The video BIOS on these adapters detects and
| |
| sets the hardware to support a desired graphics mode.
| |
| Some adapters have configuration dip switches to select desired vertical
| |
| refresh rates for high-resolution modes (800 x 600 and 1024 x 768). Others are
| |
| shipped with DOS video-configuration utility programs that allow selection of
| |
| refresh rates. Usual refresh rates range from 56Hz to 72Hz non-interlaced or
| |
| 88Hz interlaced. The display has to be capable of synchronizing to this
| |
| frequency for proper mode set.
| |
| When the desired refresh rate has been set using either the dip switches or the
| |
| video-configuration utility program run the \OS2\SVGA.EXE utility program to
| |
| store the hardware setup in an \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI file. At a DOS full-screen
| |
| session, type: C:\OS2\SVGA ON; then press Enter.
| |
| The Installation Program Installed VGA Support instead of SVGA
| |
| During the installation of OS/2, the installation program might have installed
| |
| only VGA support for your display. To install the Super VGA (SVGA) drivers,
| |
| you can use Selective Install in the System Setup folder. (System Setup is in
| |
| the OS/2 System folder).
| |
| Video Corruption or Stacked or Missing Icons
| |
| 1. Display the Desktop pop-up menu (click mouse button 2 on the OS/2 desktop
| |
| background).
| |
| 2. Select Refresh to redraw the Desktop.
| |
| 3. If the screen goes blank, press Alt+Esc (to switch between the programs)
| |
| to force repainting of the screen.
| |
| Synchronization Lost Under OS/2 But Not DOS
| |
| The resolution or refresh rate loses synchronization under OS/2 but not DOS.
| |
| To correct this problem, generate the \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI file under a specific
| |
| version of DOS using the following instructions:
| |
| 1. Start DOS.
| |
| 2. Type \OS2\SVGA ON DOS
| |
| 3. Press Enter.
| |
| 4. Type RENAME \OS2\SVGADATA.DOS \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI
| |
| 5. Press Enter.
| |
| 6. Restart OS/2.
| |
| If this does not fix the problem, try selecting a different vertical refresh
| |
| rate (refer to your adapter manual); then generate the PMI file again.
| |
| If your display remains out of synchronization or is stable and synchronized
| |
| after restarting the system but loses synchronization after a session switch,
| |
| this might be due to your video adapter's hardware implementation.
| |
| Note: Some video adapter hardware cannot be fully saved and restored in all
| |
| graphics modes for all refresh rates.
| |
| Using After Dark** for Windows** with S3** Adapter
| |
| If you have an S3 adapter and are using After Dark for Windows, images that
| |
| move from left to right will not perform properly.
| |
| Switch to any resolution other than 640 x 480 x 16M.
| |
| Using Ventura Publisher** for Windows with an S3 Adapter
| |
| If you have an S3 display adapter and are using Ventura Publisher for Windows,
| |
| you might experience a General Protection fault when starting the program.
| |
| Switch to a 256-color resolution to avoid this problem.
| |
| Using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2 with S3 Adapter
| |
| If you have an S3 display adapter and are using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2 your
| |
| system might trap.
| |
| Switch to any resolution other than one using 16M colors.
| |
| Using Lotus** 1-2-3** for OS/2 or Lotus Freelance for OS/2
| |
| If you have an XGA or SVGA display adapter and are using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2
| |
| or Lotus Freelance** for OS/2, your system might trap.
| |
| Switch to a resolution that uses 256 colors or less.
| |
| Using WordPerfect** 5.1 or 5.2 for Windows with S3 Adapter
| |
| If you have an S3 display adapter and are using WordPerfect 5.1 or 5.2 for
| |
| Windows you might experience a General Protection fault when the Print Preview
| |
| option is selected.
| |
| Use any resolution other than the 800 x 600 x 64K or 600 x 480 x 16 million
| |
| color modes.
| |
| Using Software Motion Video Feature with S3 Adapter
| |
| If you have an S3 display adapter and are using the software motion video
| |
| feature you might experience poor performance of video playback in 64K-color
| |
| modes.
| |
| Normally, the software motion video feature will take advantage of a 1MB
| |
| aperture on video adapters and systems where it is available. For those systems
| |
| with nonstandard locations, the actual physical address of the aperture must be
| |
| provided in the following CONFIG.SYS statement:
| |
| SET VIDEO_APERTURE=xxxh
| |
| where "xxx" is a hexadecimal value in units of 1MB, representing the actual
| |
| physical address to map to the aperture. For example, the IBM PS/ValuePoint*
| |
| systems must have the statement:
| |
| SET VIDEO_APERTURE=400h
| |
| to use a physical address at 1GB.
| |
| Blank Screen on IBM ValuePoint system
| |
| If you have one of the following IBM ValuePoint systems, you might encounter a
| |
| blank screen while switching from one window to another.
| |
| PS/ValuePoint Display Models: 6314 6317 6319
| |
| PS/ValuePoint System Models: 6382 6384 6387
| |
| To correct or avoid this problem, make sure that the flash EEPROM level of your
| |
| system is 62 or later.
| |
| To check the EEPROM level:
| |
| 1. Begin the Configuration Utility program by turning the system off and then
| |
| on again.
| |
| 2. During the memory count, press F1. (The memory count appears in the upper
| |
| left corner of the screen as numbers followed by KB.)
| |
| 3. When the Configuration Utility screen appears, look for the Flash EEPROM
| |
| Revision Level.
| |
| 4. The fifth and sixth characters in the Flash EEPROM Revision Level
| |
| represent the actual revision level.
| |
| 5. If the revision level is less than 62, you must install the ValuePoint
| |
| Flash BIOS update.
| |
| To get the required ValuePoint Flash BIOS update do the following: Access the
| |
| IBM PC Company Bulletin Board System, then download the VP2FL62A.DSK file,
| |
| which is the Flash BIOS Update Level 62.
| |
| If you do not have access to a modem, you can call the IBM Help Center and
| |
| request this update on diskette.
| |
| Video Corruption with Video 7** Adapter
| |
| If you experience minor video corruption when switching from an OS/2
| |
| full-screen session to the Desktop using Alt+Esc, exit the OS/2 session and
| |
| restart it.
| |
| Video Corruption Using 8514/A Adapter with WIN-OS/2
| |
| If you are running a WIN-OS/2 full-screen session with an 8514/A adapter in a
| |
| high-resolution mode, do not switch to a different session while the program is
| |
| updating the screen or displaying an hourglass. The actual problem you
| |
| experience (for example, video corruption, system hang) depends upon what the
| |
| display driver is doing at the time of the switch.
| |
| Color Icons and Bit Maps Improperly Drawn
| |
| Windows programs that use color icons or color bit-map backgrounds must run in
| |
| the foreground to be properly drawn. Do not switch from a Windows program
| |
| while it is being started or before it completes drawing color icons and color
| |
| bit-map backgrounds.
| |
| Discolored Bit Map Using 8514/A Adapter
| |
| If you are using an 8514/A display adapter, 256-color bit maps might become
| |
| discolored. after you start a WIN-OS/2 window session.
| |
| This discoloration is due to the sharing of the 256-color palette and should
| |
| not affect the running of the programs.
| |
| Corrupted Graphics in DOS Programs
| |
| Some DOS programs with graphics use a non-standard VGA mode that the adapter
| |
| can support, but the operating system cannot. The graphics in these programs
| |
| might be corrupted when displayed in a window. To avoid this problem run these
| |
| programs in DOS full-screen sessions.
| |
| Corrupted Colors in DOS Programs
| |
| Some DOS programs experience color corruption when running in a window on the
| |
| Desktop in VGA mode. This is a limitation of the VGA mode because the color
| |
| palette of the DOS session has to be translated to the Presentation Manager*
| |
| and the Desktop in VGA mode does not offer enough colors to do an optimal
| |
| translation.
| |
| The best solution is to use an OS/2 display driver that supports the 256-color
| |
| mode or run the program in a DOS full-screen session.
| |
| Corrupted DOS Full-Screen Session on IBM ThinkPad* 750C Series
| |
| If you are using a ThinkPad 750C Series, after installing OS/2, you might find
| |
| that your DOS full-screen session is corrupted. To fix this problem you must
| |
| reinstall the video driver from the ThinkPad video features diskette.
| |
| 1. Restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del. Press Alt+F1 when the small
| |
| white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your screen.
| |
| 2. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V to return to VGA mode.
| |
| 3. Restart your system, and then reinstall the ThinkPad 750c video drivers
| |
| from the ThinkPad video features diskette.
| |
| WIN-OS/2 Fails to Start on IBM ThinkPad
| |
| If a WIN-OS2 window fails to come up on an IBM Thinkpad, make sure that your
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file contains the following statement:
| |
| DOS=LOW,NOUMB
| |
| Also, make sure that the WIN-OS/2 settings have DOS set to LOW and UMB set to
| |
| OFF.
| |
| Notebook Computers Using DOS Window
| |
| Some notebook computers get a trap D error or other problems when a DOS window
| |
| is opened. This error is caused by improper video register shadowing. To
| |
| correct the problem:
| |
| 1. Edit your C:\CONFIG.SYS file.
| |
| 2. Change
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VVGA.SYS
| |
| to
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VSVGA.SYS
| |
| 3. Save the C:\CONFIG.SYS file.
| |
| 4. Shut down and restart the computer.
| |
| Text Strings Clipped on Display
| |
| OS/2 uses a system proportional font that is designed to meet the International
| |
| Organization for Standards (ISO) 9241 standard and the German DIN 66234
| |
| standard when using certain ISO compliant hardware. If you do not want to use
| |
| ISO compliant fonts, you can modify the OS2.INI file to install fonts that are
| |
| not ISO compliant. Font changes made in the OS2.INI file are global across all
| |
| programs. If you have REXX installed, you can type the following information
| |
| into a CMD file and use it to change the font.
| |
| call RxFuncAdd "SysIni", "RexxUtil", "SysIni"
| |
| AppName = "PM_SystemFonts"
| |
| KeyName = "DefaultFont"
| |
| FontName = "10.System Proportional Non-ISO"
| |
| call SysIni "USER", AppName, KeyName, FontName||"0"x
| |
| exit
| |
| After the file has been run, shut down and restart the system.
| |
| Poor Performance of Windows Programs Using 8514/A Adapter
| |
| If your system has an 8514/A adapter, you can improve the performance of your
| |
| Windows programs by changing their settings. Open the Settings notebook for
| |
| each Windows program and change the following WIN-OS/2 settings:
| |
| VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP to OFF
| |
| VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION to ON
| |
| Corrupted Desktop with the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Adapter
| |
| If your system has the 1MB version of the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter with
| |
| the memory set to SHARED, some DOS programs running in the background might
| |
| corrupt the Desktop.
| |
| To correct this problem, you must upgrade to the 2MB version of the ATI
| |
| Graphics Ultra Pro and set the VGA memory to 256K or greater.
| |
| Note: If you are using the 1MB version of the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter
| |
| with the OS/2 8514/A display driver, the VGA memory must be set to SHARED.
| |
| System Hang Using PM Debugger
| |
| To correct this problem, use an XGA* or 8514/A adapter with the debugger. An
| |
| access violation will occur when you exit the debugger, but you will not have
| |
| to restart your system and you will not have system problems as a result of
| |
| using the debugger.
| |
| Video Corruption on XGA Display Using Windows Screen Savers
| |
| A Windows screen saver program that starts while in a background session might
| |
| display a corrupted image being displayed when you switch back to the Windows
| |
| session. The image can be refreshed by moving the mouse or pressing any key.
| |
| You can eliminate this problem by changing your WIN-OS/2 settings for the
| |
| screen saver program using the Settings Notebook. Change the settings to:
| |
| VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP to ON
| |
| VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION to OFF
| |
| Using Dual Displays (XGA and VGA)
| |
| If you are using a dual display system with XGA as the primary display and VGA
| |
| as the secondary display, you might see some minor corruption when the XGA
| |
| display is set to a resolution with 65536 colors.
| |
| This corruption will be on the display that does not have focus and will not
| |
| interfere with the operation of the system.
| |
| Using Dual Displays with Windows programs in a Window Session
| |
| On dual display configurations with XGA-2 as the primary display and VGA as the
| |
| secondary display, the DOS full-screen session might be corrupted if a Windows
| |
| program is started in a window session.
| |
| To recover from this situation, shut down and restart the system.
| |
| Using XGA-2 Adapter with Dual Boot
| |
| If you are using Dual Boot with an XGA-2 adapter, you must modify the
| |
| CONFIG.DOS file:
| |
| 1. Edit the \OS2\SYSTEM\CONFIG.DOS file.
| |
| 2. Locate the line
| |
| DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM 2048 X=nnnn-nnnn
| |
| 3. Change nnnn-nnnn to C000-CFFF.
| |
| 4. Save and exit the file.
| |
| Screen Corruption on IBM P75 Systems
| |
| On IBM P75 systems, there might be some corruption on the screen whenever
| |
| several icons are selected and moved together.
| |
| This corruption can be eliminated by selecting Sort from the Desktop pop-up
| |
| menu.
| |
| Limited Resolutions on IBM P75 Systems with External Displays
| |
| An IBM P75 system with an external display attached might only have the 640 x
| |
| 480 x 16,772,216 resolution selection on the the System Settings Screen page.
| |
| If the external display is capable of displaying higher resolutions, use the
| |
| P75 Reference Diskette to disable the built-in plasma display.
| |
| Color Changes Behind Icons on XGA Displays
| |
| If you are using an XGA display, the diagonal lines behind the icons of open
| |
| objects might change color unexpectedly.
| |
| This does not interfere with the operation of the system.
| |
| Extra Lines on OS/2 System Clock on XGA Displays
| |
| If you are using an XGA display, extra lines might appear on the face of the
| |
| OS/2 System Clock between the quarter (:15) and half (:30) hour.
| |
| These lines do not interfere with the operation of the clock.
| |
| Display Power Management Signaling Not Enabled on XGA Displays
| |
| If you are using an XGA display, the XGA DMQS (\xga$dmqs\*.dqs) files in this
| |
| version of the operating system do not have DPMS (Display Power Management
| |
| Signaling) enabled for the DPMS supported displays.
| |
| You must use the DPMS OVERRIDE parameter provided with the Power Management
| |
| Utility program that is located in System Setup.
| |
| PS/ValuePoint System with Radius XGA Display Adapter
| |
| If you are using a Radius XGA display adapter on a PS/ValuePoint system, it
| |
| might not work correctly.
| |
| To correct this problem, you need to obtain and use the VPXGA.EXE utility
| |
| program. For a copy of this utility program, check your Radius Installation
| |
| Diskette or contact a service representative at Radius.
| |
| Zenith Data Systems** and Hewlett Packard Systems with Headland Adapters
| |
| Zenith Data Systems with Headland HT208 and Hewlett Packard systems with HT209
| |
| display a white half-screen whenever high-resolution modes are selected.
| |
| These systems do not support high-resolution modes even though you can
| |
| successfully install high resolution drivers and select the modes. To correct
| |
| this problem, use Selective Install to install VGA.
| |
| ZEOS** Systems with Speedstar VGA
| |
| If you are using a ZEOS system with Speedstar VGA, the video display adapter
| |
| might not configure.
| |
| Use the VMODE utility program supplied with the system to configure the display
| |
| during the display driver installation.
| |
| Video Corruption with Sigma Legend** Adapter
| |
| If you have a Sigma Legend display adapter you might experience minor video
| |
| corruption on the Desktop when you switch between the Desktop and DOS if they
| |
| are running in different modes.
| |
| Use the DOS utility program that is packaged with this display adapter to set
| |
| the DOS session to the same mode as the Desktop.
| |
| System Hang with Sigma Legend Adapter
| |
| If you are using a Sigma Legend display in 1024 x 768 x 256 color mode, the
| |
| system might stop.
| |
| Use only 640 x 480 x 256 or 800 x 600 x 256 mode with this adapter.
| |
| | |
| Mouse Problems 219/2
| |
| | |
| The following information provides solutions to problems you might encounter
| |
| with your mouse.
| |
| Existing Mouse Not Working Correctly
| |
| If the mouse you had connected to your computer before installing OS/2 now works
| |
| improperly (movements appear "jerky" or the mouse does not respond when you move
| |
| it), do the following:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Open OS/2 Window. If you installed OS/2 from a CD, continue with step 4.
| |
| If you installed from diskettes, go to step 5.
| |
| 4. Type ATTRIB -R C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS and press Enter (where c is the drive
| |
| where OS/2 is installed).
| |
| 5. Insert the diskette that came with your mouse into drive A (this diskette
| |
| contains the mouse device driver).
| |
| 6. Type COPY A:\MOUSE.SYS C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS and press Enter (where C is the
| |
| drive where OS/2 is installed).
| |
| 7. Shut down the system.
| |
| Mouse Not Working after Installation
| |
| If you installed a mouse during the installation of OS/2, or used selective
| |
| installation to install a new mouse and the mouse is not working, you will need
| |
| to edit your CONFIG.SYS file. Do the following:
| |
| 1. Edit the C:\CONFIG.SYS file and press Enter (where C is the drive where
| |
| OS/2 is installed).
| |
| 2. Delete the mouse device driver statements from the CONFIG.SYS file (there
| |
| might be more than one such statement). For example:
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS
| |
| 3. Shut down the system, and then restart it.
| |
| 4. Use Selective Install to install a different mouse driver.
| |
| Serial Mouse Not Working
| |
| If the serial mouse is connected to a serial port, make sure that the serial
| |
| port is configured for default settings.
| |
| Logitech** Mouse Not Working after Installation
| |
| If you have a Logitech mouse that does not work after installation, you might
| |
| have to select another mouse driver. Before 1991, Logitech sold "C-Series"
| |
| serial mice. Since 1991, Logitech has sold only "M-Series" Microsoft-compatible
| |
| serial mice. To determine which mouse you have, look at the bottom of the
| |
| mouse. If it says "CA" or "C7," then it is a C-Series mouse. If not, then you
| |
| have an M-Series mouse. Use Selective Install to select the correct Logitech
| |
| mouse driver.
| |
| Logitech Mouse Not Working after Dual Boot from DOS
| |
| If your Logitech mouse is not working on a Dual Boot system after you run DOS
| |
| and switch to OS/2, your mouse might be running in a mode set by a DOS-based
| |
| mouse device driver. To correct the problem:
| |
| 1. If COM2 port is being used, switch back to DOS and type the following at
| |
| the DOS command prompt:
| |
| MOUSE PC
| |
| or
| |
| MOUSE 2 PC
| |
| This will reset the mouse to a mode that is recognized by OS/2.
| |
| Note: You must use the MOUSE.COM that came with the mouse, or the command
| |
| will not work.
| |
| 2. Then type the following:
| |
| C:\OS2\BOOT /OS2
| |
| 3. Press Enter. OS/2 should start and your mouse should work.
| |
| 4. If this does not work, disconnect and reconnect the mouse.
| |
| 5. If these methods do not work, close your programs and turn off the
| |
| computer. Then, turn the computer on again.
| |
| Mouse Does Not Work on an IBM PS/2 Model 90 or 95
| |
| If your Model 90 or 95 has the Unattended Start Mode option set (through the
| |
| System Programs), the mouse driver will not load during startup.
| |
| To correct this situation, disable the Unattended Start Mode.
| |
| Mouse Does Not Work on COM3 or COM4
| |
| OS/2 supports connection only to COM1 or COM2, at the standard input/output
| |
| (I/O) address and interrupt request (IRQ) setting.
| |
| Mouse Pointer Does Not Move
| |
| When you move your mouse, the mouse pointer on the screen does not move.
| |
| Verify that each device on your computer that uses an IRQ setting is not
| |
| conflicting with another IRQ setting.
| |
| Mouse Statements in CONFIG.SYS
| |
| The mouse statements that should appear in your CONFIG.SYS depend on the type
| |
| of mouse connected to your computer.
| |
| The correct CONFIG.SYS statements for running a serial mouse are:
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VMOUSE.SYS
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\PCLOGIC.SYS SERIAL=COMx
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS TYPE=PCLOGIC$
| |
| Where: C is the drive on which OS/2 is installed, and COMx is either COM1 or
| |
| COM2.
| |
| The correct CONFIG.SYS statements for running a Microsoft or IBM mouse are:
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VMOUSE.SYS
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS
| |
| Where: C is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.
| |
| Three-button Mouse Not Working Correctly
| |
| You have a 3-button mouse and error SYS1201 is displayed on the screen.
| |
| OS/2 supports only the 2-button mode on a 3-button mouse. If your mouse has a
| |
| switch to change to a 2-button mode, change the switch. If it doesn't, replace
| |
| the mouse with a 2 button mouse.
| |
| Erratic Mouse Pointer in WIN-OS/2 Sessions
| |
| If you have an erratic pointer in your WIN-OS/2 programs.
| |
| Set the following WIN-OS/2 settings:
| |
| o MOUSE_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS to On
| |
| o IDLE_SENSITIVITY to 100
| |
| o IDLE_SECONDS to 20
| |
| Mouse Not Recognized on Non-IBM Computer
| |
| If your mouse is not recognized on a non-IBM computer that has a mouse port
| |
| with an attached mouse, the mouse might be incompatible with the mouse port
| |
| because of the chip on the mouse adapter.
| |
| Attach the mouse to a serial port. If the mouse still does not work, try a
| |
| different mouse with the mouse port.
| |
| Mouse and Keyboard Stop Working
| |
| If you have AMI BIOS, you might have an old version. Contact your computer
| |
| manufacturer for an updated BIOS level.
| |
| | |
| CD-ROM Problems 220/2
| |
| | |
| Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with your CD-ROM after
| |
| installing OS/2.
| |
| Philips** CM 205 CD-ROM
| |
| If you have a Philips CM 205 drive and it doesn't work with OS/2, edit your
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file and change the line containing LMS205.ADD to LMS206.ADD.
| |
| If your CD-ROM drive is not working correctly (does not respond, or generates
| |
| errors when trying to read a CD), do the following:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Open OS/2 Window.
| |
| 4. Insert the diskette that came with your CD-ROM drive into drive A. (This
| |
| diskette contains the CD-ROM device driver.)
| |
| 5. Type the following, pressing Enter after each:
| |
| COPY A:*.ADD C:\OS2\
| |
| COPY A:*.IFS C:\OS2\
| |
| COPY A:*.DMD C:\OS2\
| |
| where * represents the actual name of the file.
| |
| 6. Edit the C:\CONFIG.SYS file and press Enter (where c is the drive on which
| |
| OS/2 is installed).
| |
| 7. Add the following statements to the CONFIG.SYS file (if not already
| |
| there):
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
| |
| IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
| |
| BASEDEV=OS2CDROM.DMD
| |
| BASEDEV=*.ADD
| |
| where * represents the actual name of the .ADD file on the device driver
| |
| diskette.
| |
| 8. If the following statement appears in the CONFIG.SYS file, change it from:
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDROM.SYS /Q /N:4
| |
| to
| |
| REM DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDROM.SYS /Q /N:4
| |
| 9. Shut down the system.
| |
| Problems with Sony, Mitsumi, or Hitachi** CD-ROM Drives
| |
| If you are using a Sony, Mitsumi, or Hitachi CD-ROM drive and cannot access it,
| |
| do the following:
| |
| 1. Copy the following files from Diskette 1 to the hard disk, as follows:
| |
| COPY A:\OS2CDROM.DMD C:\OS2
| |
| COPY A:\CDFS.IFS C:\OS2
| |
| 2. Edit your CONFIG.SYS file on the hard disk and add the following
| |
| statements:
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
| |
| IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
| |
| 3. Shut down the system.
| |
| Problems with Sound Blaster CD-ROM Drives
| |
| If you are using a Sound Blaster CD-ROM drive with the device driver SBPCD2.SYS
| |
| and cannot access the drive, restart your system and do the following:
| |
| 1. Copy the following file from Diskette 1 to the hard disk, as follows:
| |
| COPY A:\CDFS.IFS C:\OS2
| |
| 2. Edit your CONFIG.SYS file on the hard disk and add the following
| |
| statement:
| |
| IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
| |
| 3. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 4. Open Selective Install from the System Setup folder.
| |
| 5. Select the icon next to CD-ROM Device Support on the System Configuration
| |
| screen.
| |
| 6. Select OTHER from the bottom of the CD-ROM selection list; then select OK.
| |
| 7. When the selective installation is complete, edit the CONFIG.SYS file and
| |
| delete the following line:
| |
| DEVICE=C:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
| |
| 8. Shut down the system.
| |
| | |
| Hard Disk Problems 221/2
| |
| | |
| Following are solutions to problems you might have with hard disk drives after
| |
| installing OS/2. Also refer to Recovery Procedures.
| |
| Slow SCSI Support
| |
| After installation, you might experience slow SCSI support. If this occurs,
| |
| make sure that the hard disk and the controller card are both set for the ASYNCH
| |
| mode or the SYNCH mode.
| |
| Problem with Quantum Hardcard or IDE Controller
| |
| Add the required switch settings (adapter number and IRQ level) to the
| |
| IBM1S506.ADD device driver statement in your CONFIG.SYS file. If you need
| |
| assistance with the switch settings or need a BIOS upgrade (for certain Quantum
| |
| Hardcards), contact a service representative at Quantum.
| |
| Hard Disk Controller Problem
| |
| 1. Determine the controller manufacturer, model number, and type. Then,
| |
| determine which device driver is installed for the controller (for
| |
| example, FD7000EX.ADD).
| |
| 2. Verify that the installed device driver is the correct one.
| |
| 3. Verify that the BASEDEV= statements are correct in your CONFIG.SYS file.
| |
| Verify that the correct device driver is listed in a BASEDEV= statement.
| |
| Also, verify that the correct device driver is the only device driver
| |
| listed for that controller. For more information about BASEDEV=
| |
| statements, refer to the Command Reference in the Information folder.
| |
| Cannot Set Up a Primary Partition
| |
| If you have more than two hard disk drives and you cannot set up a primary
| |
| partition on one of the hard disk drives, your BIOS could be preventing the
| |
| setup.
| |
| With OS/2, you can have a primary partition on two hard disk drives; however,
| |
| the BIOS in your computer determines which two hard disk drives can have
| |
| primary partitions.
| |
| Cannot Access Entire Hard Disk
| |
| Your hard disk drive has more than 1024 cylinders, and you cannot access the
| |
| entire drive space, the device driver for your controller might not support
| |
| more than 1024 cylinders.
| |
| If you have a non-IBM controller and device driver, contact the manufacturer of
| |
| the device driver to ask if your level of the driver supports more than 1024
| |
| cylinders.
| |
| | |
| Desktop Problems 222/2
| |
| | |
| Following are solutions to problems you might have with your Desktop after
| |
| installing OS/2.
| |
| System Stops Working
| |
| The system stops and the keyboard and mouse do not respond.
| |
| 1. Press Ctrl+Esc or Alt+Esc and wait a few seconds to see if the system
| |
| responds.
| |
| 2. Determine if you can move your mouse but cannot select any object when you
| |
| press mouse button 1.
| |
| 3. Press the Caps Lock and Num Lock keys to see if their status lights come
| |
| on.
| |
| 4. Record a description of what you were doing when the system stopped. If
| |
| any messages were displayed on the screen, be sure to record the message
| |
| text and number.
| |
| 5. Refer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for
| |
| instructions about calling for additional assistance.
| |
| Missing Icons
| |
| After restarting your system, some of your Desktop icons might be missing.
| |
| Check the documentation for the hard drive and the controller card to ensure
| |
| that their settings are both set for the ASYNCH mode or the SYNCH mode.
| |
| Stacked Icons
| |
| If the objects on your Desktop appear to be stacked on each other, you can
| |
| refresh your Desktop:
| |
| 1. Position the mouse pointer on a blank area of the Desktop.
| |
| 2. Press mouse button 2. A pop-up menu appears.
| |
| 3. Select Refresh.
| |
| 4. If your screen goes blank, press Alt+Esc to switch between programs and
| |
| force the "repainting" of your screen.
| |
| DOS and Windows Programs Not Added to the Desktop
| |
| During the installation of OS/2, your existing DOS and Windows programs are
| |
| automatically added to your OS/2 Desktop. However, the installation program
| |
| might not find all programs (for example, programs located on remote servers).
| |
| If this happens, restart the system, then run the Add Programs to Desktop
| |
| utility program. (Add Programs to Desktop is located in the System Setup
| |
| folder which is located in the OS/2 System folder.)
| |
| OS/2 2.x Programs Not Added to the Desktop
| |
| If you installed OS/2 on a system that already had OS/2 2.x installed on it and
| |
| your OS/2 2.x programs were not added to your Desktop, do the following:
| |
| 1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
| |
| screen, press Alt+F1.
| |
| 3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
| |
| 4. Delete the DESKTOP directory.
| |
| 5. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system. The Desktop should be
| |
| re-created.
| |
| 6. If the problem continues, re-create the INI files. Follow the
| |
| instructions in Rebuilding Your Desktop.
| |
| If you moved program groups off the Desktop and into a folder, you should move
| |
| them back on the Desktop before installing OS/2. Otherwise, duplicate icons
| |
| could appear on the screen. If you try to delete these icons, the original
| |
| icons will also be deleted.
| |
| Blank Desktop and Missing Objects
| |
| If the Desktop is blank, objects are missing, you cannot delete an object, or
| |
| you have another problem that involves objects, run the CHKDSK (check disk)
| |
| program until the results indicate there are no errors. To run CHKDSK, do the
| |
| following:
| |
| 1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart
| |
| your system.
| |
| 2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
| |
| 3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
| |
| 4. Insert Diskette 2.
| |
| 5. Type: CHKDSK C: /F and press Enter (where: C: is the drive where OS/2 is
| |
| installed).
| |
| For more information about CHKDSK, select Command Reference in the Information
| |
| folder.
| |
| Missing Objects in the OS/2 System Folder
| |
| Follow the instructions in Rebuilding Your Desktop.
| |
| Folders Open and Close Immediately
| |
| Follow the instructions in Recovering Archived System Files.
| |
| Missing, Empty, or Multiple Objects on Desktop
| |
| o The Desktop is missing objects or there is more than one icon for the same
| |
| object.
| |
| o One or more Desktop folders are empty.
| |
| o After you shut down the computer and start it again, the objects on the
| |
| Desktop are not displayed the same as when you shut down.
| |
| Recover the archived Desktop, using the procedure in Recovering Archived System
| |
| Files.
| |
| If that does not fix the problem, follow the instructions for Rebuilding Your
| |
| Desktop.
| |
| Object Cannot Be Deleted
| |
| If you cannot delete an object, do the following:
| |
| 1. Create a folder.
| |
| 2. Drag the object you want to delete to the new folder and drop it.
| |
| 3. Drag the new folder to the Shredder and drop it.
| |
| If you cannot shred the folder, do the following:
| |
| 1. At an OS/2 command prompt, type: CD DESKTOP and press Enter.
| |
| 2. After the DESKTOP directory opens, type: RD directory and press Enter.
| |
| (Where: directory is replaced by the name of the directory (folder) that
| |
| you want to delete.)
| |
| | |
| Recovery Procedures 223/2+
| |
| | |
| The procedures that follow provide information about recovering from Desktop
| |
| problems and system failures, including:
| |
| o A damaged, unusable, or unstartable desktop
| |
| o An invalid CONFIG.SYS file
| |
| o A damaged INI file
| |
| o Hard disk errors
| |
| o A forgotten lockup password
| |
| Note: Backing up your system regularly might help you avoid having to
| |
| re-create files in the event of a system failure.
| |
| If your Desktop becomes damaged, unusable, or unstartable, you can recover in
| |
| two ways:
| |
| o Use the Archive/Recover utility program to restore your Desktop to a
| |
| previously saved state
| |
| o Rebuild your existing Desktop
| |
| | |
| Recovering Archived System Files 224/3
| |
| | |
| OS/2 has the capability of archiving key system files as well as the DESKTOP
| |
| directory each time you start OS/2. The default setting for this feature is
| |
| OFF. (The Archive function can be turned ON via the Archive page of the Desktop
| |
| Settings notebook.)
| |
| When the Archive function is turned ON, the state of the key system files and
| |
| Desktop as they existed at the last three "starts" of OS/2 are sa
| |
| | |
| ved. Each time
| |
| you restart OS/2, the oldest set of archived system files is deleted and the
| |
| current system files are saved. OS/2 also keeps a permanent archive of your
| |
| Desktop and key files as they existed when OS/2 was first installed, so you can
| |
| always restore your system to its original state.
| |
| To use archived system files, do the following:
| |
| 1. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, perform a shut
| |
| down, then press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
| |
| 2. When a small white box appears in the upper-left corner of your screen
| |
| (before the OS/2 logo screen appears), press Alt+F1.
| |
| 3. A screen appears, listing the three most recent archives. Do one of the
| |
| following:
| |
| o Type the number of the archive you want to use to restore your
| |
| system.
| |
| o Type X to restore your system to its original state (as it was when
| |
| you first installed OS/2).
| |
| o Type C to get an OS/2 command prompt (for example, if you want to
| |
| edit your CONFIG.SYS file).
| |
| o Type V to reset your primary display to VGA (for example, if you
| |
| think your Desktop is not damaged but cannot be seen because you need
| |
| to reinstall your VGA device drivers).
| |
| | |
| Recovery Choices during Restart 225/3+
| |
| | |
| The Recovery Choices screen enables you to specify how the system is to restart
| |
| while a restart is in progress. You can display the Recovery Choices screen
| |
| during restart by pressing Alt+F1 when a small white box appears in the upper
| |
| left-hand corner of your screen. If you want the system to display the Recovery
| |
| Choices screen each time it restarts, you can select Display Recovery Choices at
| |
| every system restart on the Archive page of the Desktop Settings notebook.
| |
| The Recovery Choices screen allows you to:
| |
| o Select the set of archived system files that the system is to use to
| |
| restart
| |
| o Continue using the original installation files to restart, and go to a
| |
| command line
| |
| o Continue using the current system files to restart, and reset your primary
| |
| display to VGA
| |
| o Restart your system using a customized CONFIG.SYS file that you have
| |
| created
| |
| Each set of archived files appears on the Recovery Choices screen with the date
| |
| and time when the files were archived. The files are numbered 1, 2, 3 or, for
| |
| the original installation files, X. Select the files that you want the system
| |
| to restart with by pressing 1, 2, 3, or X on your keyboard. The system will
| |
| continue to restart using the set of archived files represented by the number
| |
| you pressed.
| |
| To go to a command line without changing the system files, press the C key on
| |
| your keyboard.
| |
| To reset your primary display to VGA, press the V key on your keyboard.
| |
| The character keys that you press can be uppercase or lowercase letters.
| |
| To restart your system using a customized version of the CONFIG.SYS file, enter
| |
| an alphabetic character that corresponds to the name of a CONFIG.SYS file that
| |
| you have created. Creating Your Own CONFIG.SYS Files describes how to create
| |
| and name your own customized version of CONFIG.SYS. Displaying Your CONFIG.?
| |
| Choices on the Recovery Choices Screen describes how to display your customized
| |
| CONFIG.SYS choices on the Recovery Choices screen.
| |
| | |
| Creating Your Own CONFIG.SYS Files 226/4
| |
| | |
| In some cases, you need different CONFIG.SYS files to create environments that
| |
| are specific to the kinds of work you are doing. For example, when you use a
| |
| laptop computer with a docking station, you might want a CONFIG.SYS file that
| |
| supports your laptop computer and one that supports your regular machine. You
| |
| can create different versions of the CONFIG.SYS file, and, during restart,
| |
| specify from the Recovery Choices screen which version the system is to use. You
| |
| can also customize the Recovery Choices screen to display your customized
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file choices.
| |
| The following steps describe how to create and use multiple CONFIG.SYS files.
| |
| In these steps, ? is any unique single alphabetic character except: X, x, C, c,
| |
| V, or v. These steps use C as the root directory. If you installed OS/2 on a
| |
| drive other than C, replace the C in the path name with your own root directory.
| |
| 1. Save a copy of the current CONFIG.SYS file.
| |
| You can save a copy of the current CONFIG.SYS file by copying it to a
| |
| diskette. Otherwise, you can copy the current CONFIG.SYS file to the
| |
| C:\OS2\BOOT subdirectory, and rename it to CONFIG.?. If you copy and
| |
| rename CONFIG.SYS, be sure to make a note of the new name and directory so
| |
| you can restore it later.
| |
| 2. On the C:\OS2\BOOT subdirectory, create a file called CONFIG.? and
| |
| customize it with the modifications that you need.
| |
| 3. Copy your customized CONFIG.? file to the current CONFIG.SYS file.
| |
| There are two ways to copy your CONFIG.? file. You can enter the copy
| |
| command at the OS/2 command prompt, or you can create an OS/2 batch file
| |
| that will run during restart after the system processes C:\CONFIG.SYS.
| |
| a. Replacing Your CONFIG.SYS file with CONFIG.?
| |
| If you have only one customized CONFIG.? file, or if you do not plan
| |
| to change between CONFIG.SYS and CONFIG.? often, you might choose to
| |
| copy over CONFIG.SYS with your customized CONFIG.? file. Copying over
| |
| C:\CONFIG.SYS with your customized CONFIG.? file replaces CONFIG.SYS
| |
| in the root directory, and makes your customized file the default
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file.
| |
| The command to copy your customized file to the current CONFIG.SYS
| |
| file is:
| |
| COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.? C:\CONFIG.SYS
| |
| Using your customized CONFIG.? file as the default file allows you to
| |
| restart without selecting a CONFIG.? file at the Recovery Choices
| |
| screen.
| |
| You can now restart your system. When you restart, the system will
| |
| automatically use the file in the root directory named CONFIG.SYS.
| |
| b. Creating a Batch File to Replace CONFIG.SYS with CONFIG.?
| |
| If you have several customized CONFIG.SYS files, using the batch file
| |
| allows you to specify the CONFIG.? you want to use without entering
| |
| multiple copy commands. You can simply change the ? character in
| |
| your batch file, and enter that character at the Recovery Choices
| |
| screen.
| |
| Create a batch file on C:\OS2\BOOT, and name it ALTF1?.CMD, where ?
| |
| is the character that you used in the name of your CONFIG.? file. Put
| |
| the following COPY command in the batch file.
| |
| COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.? C:\CONFIG.SYS
| |
| Display the Recovery Choices screen by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del to
| |
| restart your system and then pressing Alt+F1.
| |
| At the Recovery Choices screen, press the key for the ? single
| |
| character in the name of the CONFIG.? file you want to use.
| |
| The system continues the restart using your customized CONFIG.? file.
| |
| Note: If you enter a character from the Recovery Choices screen for
| |
| which there is no corresponding ALTF1?.CMD batch file, the system
| |
| will use the CONFIG.? file that corresponds to that character. If no
| |
| CONFIG.? file corresponding to that character exists, the system will
| |
| return to the Recovery Choices screen.
| |
| Example
| |
| The following example shows how to create a CONFIG.SYS file named
| |
| CONFIG.A, and a batch file to copy it during restart. The system is
| |
| installed on the C drive. Before you start, save a copy of your
| |
| current CONFIG.SYS file.
| |
| 1. Copy the system version of CONFIG.SYS into a new file called
| |
| CONFIG.A
| |
| COPY CONFIG.SYS C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.A
| |
| 2. Change to the C:\OS2\BOOT directory
| |
| CD OS2
| |
| CD BOOT
| |
| 3. Edit CONFIG.A to customize it, and save your changes
| |
| E CONFIG.A
| |
| 4. Edit a file called ALTF1A.CMD file
| |
| E ALTF1A.CMD
| |
| 5. Put the following COPY command into ALTF1A.CMD, and save your
| |
| changes
| |
| COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.A C:\CONFIG.SYS
| |
| 6. Restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del. Press Alt+F1 when
| |
| the small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of
| |
| your screen.
| |
| 7. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press the letter A.
| |
| | |
| Displaying Your CONFIG.? Choices on the Recovery Choices Screen 227/4
| |
| | |
| You can customize your Recovery Choices screen to display the list of customized
| |
| CONFIG.? files that you created. Customizing the Recovery Choices screen will
| |
| help you to remember which character to enter for a particular version of
| |
| CONFIG.?, by displaying your selections.
| |
| To customize the Recovery Choices screen, edit the file
| |
| C:\OS2\BOOT\ALTF1BOT.SCR. (If you installed OS/2 on a drive other than C,
| |
| specify the drive on which OS/2 is installed.) You can add up to 6 lines of text
| |
| to the bottom of this file.
| |
| Each line that you add should represent a single CONFIG.? file that you created.
| |
| Each line should include the alphabetic character that identifies that CONFIG.?
| |
| file. You might also want to include a brief, one-line description of when to
| |
| use that version of the CONFIG.? file.
| |
| For example, to display the option for the CONFIG.A file on the Recovery Choices
| |
| screen, you might add the following to the file C:\OS2\BOOT\ALTF1BOT.SCR:
| |
| A CONFIG.A (file for laptop computer)
| |
| | |
| Rebuilding Your Desktop 228/3
| |
| | |
| Use the following procedure if the Archive/Recover procedure did not restore
| |
| your Desktop, this procedure will rebuild the Desktop by making new INI files.
| |
| 1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
| |
| screen, press Alt+F1.
| |
| 3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
| |
| 4. Change to the OS/2 directory on your hard disk. Type the following
| |
| commands and press Enter after each:
| |
| C:
| |
| CD\OS2
| |
| 5. Type the following commands and press Enter after each:
| |
| MAKEINI OS2.INI INI.RC
| |
| MAKEINI OS2SYS.INI INISYS.RC
| |
| 6. Delete the hidden file, WP?ROOT.?SF, from the startable partition. Type
| |
| the following commands and press Enter after each:
| |
| ATTRIB -h -s -r \WP?ROOT.?SF
| |
| DEL \WP?ROOT.?SF
| |
| 7. Restart the system.
| |
| | |
| Recovering the CONFIG.SYS File 229/3
| |
| | |
| The CONFIG.SYS file contains command statements that are used to configure your
| |
| system during startup. If the file is changed incorrectly, you might not be
| |
| able to restart the system or edit the file. (For example, some programs write
| |
| information to the CONFIG.SYS file when they are installed. In some cases, this
| |
| information can cause the CONFIG.SYS file to be unusable.) To recover the
| |
| original version of the CONFIG.SYS file (as it was created when OS/2 was
| |
| installed), you can use the following procedure:
| |
| 1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
| |
| screen, press Alt+F1.
| |
| 3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
| |
| 4. Type C: and press Enter (where C represents the drive on which your
| |
| operating system resides).
| |
| 5. Rename the damaged CONFIG.SYS file. For example, type:
| |
| REN CONFIG.SYS CONFIG.BAD
| |
| 6. Press Enter.
| |
| 7. Copy the backup version of the CONFIG.SYS file to the root directory of
| |
| the drive where your operating system resides. (The CONFIG.SYS backup
| |
| file was created during OS/2 installation). Type:
| |
| COPY C:\OS2\INSTALL\CONFIG.SYS C:\CONFIG.SYS
| |
| 8. Press Enter.
| |
| 9. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.
| |
| As stated, this procedure reestablishes the original version of the CONFIG.SYS
| |
| file (as it was created during OS/2 installation). If you made any changes to
| |
| the CONFIG.SYS file after that time, you will have to edit the newly copied
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file and add those changes.
| |
| | |
| Recovering the User INI File 230/3
| |
| | |
| The OS2.INI file, also referred to as the user INI file, is an operating system
| |
| startup file that contains system settings such as program defaults, display
| |
| options, and file options. The OS2SYS.INI file, also referred to as the system
| |
| INI file, is an operating system file that contains information about installed
| |
| fonts and printer drivers. If you receive a message that the OS2.INI file has
| |
| been "corrupted", replace both the OS2.INI file and the OS2SYS.INI file on your
| |
| hard disk.
| |
| Use the following procedure to replace these two files with versions containing
| |
| default values:
| |
| 1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
| |
| screen, press Alt+F1.
| |
| 3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
| |
| 4. Type C: and press Enter (where C represents the drive where your operating
| |
| system resides).
| |
| 5. Type CD \OS2 and press Enter.
| |
| 6. Type ATTRIB -s -h -r OS2*.INI and press Enter.
| |
| 7. Type REN OS2.INI OS2.OLD and press Enter.
| |
| 8. Type MAKEINI OS2.INI INI.RC and press Enter.
| |
| 9. Type REN OS2SYS.INI OS2SYS.OLD and press Enter.
| |
| 10. Type MAKEINI OS2SYS.INI INISYS.RC and press Enter.
| |
| 11. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.
| |
| You can protect your INI files by having them automatically backed up each time
| |
| you start your system. For example, if you include the following statements in
| |
| your CONFIG.SYS file, a backup copy of your current INI files and a backup copy
| |
| of the INI files as they existed at the previous system startup will be made.
| |
| (Note that this example assumes that OS/2 is installed on drive C. Use the
| |
| letter of the drive on which you have OS/2 installed.)
| |
| CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\*.INX C:\OS2\*.INY
| |
| CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\OS2*.INI C:\OS2\*.INX
| |
| By copying the INI files this way, you will always be able to recover a recent
| |
| version of these files in case the user INI file becomes damaged.
| |
| | |
| Recovering from Errors on the Hard Disk 231/3
| |
| | |
| The CHKDSK command with the parameter /F can be used to correct disk and
| |
| directory errors. However, when you use the /F parameter, no activity can occur
| |
| on the disk. Therefore, if you need to correct errors on the drive from which
| |
| you normally start OS/2, you must use the version of CHKDSK that is on the
| |
| installation diskettes (or installation CD) instead of the version that has been
| |
| installed on the hard disk. You can also use the version of CHKDSK on the
| |
| installation diskettes or CD if the disk is in use or locked by another process.
| |
| To run CHKDSK /F using diskettes:
| |
| 1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart
| |
| your system.
| |
| 2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
| |
| 3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
| |
| 4. Insert Diskette 2.
| |
| 5. To correct the errors on your hard disk, type CHKDSK C: /F:2, then press
| |
| Enter. (Where: C: is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
| |
| 6. Remove the diskette from drive A.
| |
| 7. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.
| |
| To run CHKDSK /F from a CD:
| |
| 1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart
| |
| your system.
| |
| 2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
| |
| 3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
| |
| 4. Insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
| |
| 5. Type E: (where E is your CD-ROM drive) and press Enter.
| |
| 6. Type CD\OS2IMAGE and press Enter.
| |
| 7. Type CD DISK_2 and press Enter.
| |
| 8. To correct the errors on your hard disk, type CHKDSK C: /F:2, then press
| |
| Enter. (Where: C: is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
| |
| 9. Press Enter.
| |
| | |
| Recovering Memory State Data 232/3
| |
| | |
| The process OS/2 uses to recover the state of memory at the time of a failure is
| |
| called a memory dump. A memory dump is performed when a problem is difficult to
| |
| reproduce or other methods of problem determination do not identify the problem.
| |
| Memory dump information can then be analyzed by a team of technical experts and
| |
| determine the cause of the problem.
| |
| Important Do not perform a memory dump unless your Service and Support Group
| |
| has recommended this action. :enote.
| |
| There are two types of memory dumps:
| |
| o Manual memory dump (used for system hangs and traps that cause the system
| |
| to stop)
| |
| o Automatic memory dump (used for application programs, system traps, and
| |
| internal processing errors)
| |
| A system memory dump can be placed on a FAT hard-disk partition or formatted
| |
| diskettes.
| |
| Different situations determine which type of memory dump is needed. Refer to
| |
| the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions about
| |
| calling for additional assistance.
| |
| Using TRACE in CONFIG.SYS File
| |
| Before you create the memory dump diskettes, you must use the OS/2 Event
| |
| Tracing Service to capture a sequence of system events. To enable system
| |
| event-tracing, add the following statements to your CONFIG.SYS file:
| |
| TRACEBUF=63
| |
| TRACE=ON
| |
| The default for TRACE=ON is to trace all static system events.
| |
| Restart your system to activate TRACE. Also, turn on two dynamic trace points
| |
| as follows:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Open OS/2 Full Screen or OS/2 Window.
| |
| 4. Type the following at the command prompt:
| |
| trace on kernel (press Enter)
| |
| trace on doscall1 (press Enter)
| |
| Performing the Memory Dump
| |
| If you are sending a memory dump to diskettes, you must use formatted
| |
| diskettes. Generally, one 1.44MB diskette is used for each 2MB of RAM. For
| |
| example, if you have a 16MB system, you will probably use eight 1.44MB
| |
| formatted diskettes.
| |
| If you are sending a memory dump to a hard disk, you must first create a FAT
| |
| partition labeled SADUMP and give it a size greater than the amount of physical
| |
| memory (RAM) in your system. For example, if your system has 16MB of RAM, set
| |
| the size of the SADUMP partition to 17MB.
| |
| To run a memory dump, the Memory Dump facility must be started manually or
| |
| automatically as follows:
| |
| To start it manually:
| |
| Press and hold down the Ctrl and Alt keys, and then press the Num Lock key
| |
| twice. After a few seconds, the screen clears; after a minute the system beeps
| |
| and one of the following messages is displayed:
| |
| When dumping to diskettes:
| |
| Insert a formatted diskette to commence dumping.
| |
| When dumping to a hard disk:
| |
| The memory dump is being performed.
| |
| The total amount of memory to be dumped is xxxx.
| |
| To start it automatically:
| |
| Type one of the following statements in your CONFIG.SYS file and restart your
| |
| system:
| |
| TRAPDUMP=OFF,drive letter:
| |
| TRAPDUMP=ON,drive letter:
| |
| TRAPDUMP=R0,drive letter:
| |
| where:
| |
| o TRAPDUMP=OFF,drive letter: indicates that no automatic dump is to be
| |
| taken. This is the default value; it is generally used when initiating a
| |
| manual memory dump.
| |
| If REIPL=ON is specified in the CONFIG.SYS file, the system will restart
| |
| automatically and no dump will be taken when a system trap or internal
| |
| processing error occurs.
| |
| o TRAPDUMP=ON,drive letter: specifies the drive to which system dump
| |
| information is written for any access violations. The system will restart
| |
| after the TRAPDUMP process has completed. The default drive is A if no
| |
| drive is specified.
| |
| o TRAPDUMP=R0,drive letter: specifies the drive to which system dump
| |
| information is written for system traps and internal processing errors.
| |
| The system will restart after the TRAPDUMP process has completed. The
| |
| default drive is A if no drive is specified.
| |
| TRAPDUMP now initiates a memory dump, depending on which TRAPDUMP statement is
| |
| placed in the CONFIG.SYS file.
| |
| Warning: Setting TRAPDUMP to ON or R0 enables your system to automatically
| |
| initiate a memory dump. Do not enable TRAPDUMP unless you need to troubleshoot
| |
| your system and have been instructed to do so by your technical coordinator.
| |
| Note: If dumping to diskettes, complete steps 1 through 5. If dumping to hard
| |
| disk, skip steps 1 through 5 and read step 6.
| |
| 1. When prompted, insert the diskette labeled Dump Diskette 1 and press any
| |
| key to start the dump process. The following message will be displayed:
| |
| The memory dump is being performed...
| |
| 2. When the memory dump has completed or the current dump diskette is full,
| |
| the following messages are displayed:
| |
| The diskette is full. Insert another formatted diskette in drive A.
| |
| The storage address ranges on this diskette are:
| |
| DUMPDATA.xxx yyy - zzz
| |
| Press any key to continue.
| |
| where xxx is the dump diskette number, yyy is the beginning memory
| |
| address, and zzz is the ending memory address on the disk.
| |
| Note: If you press Enter without changing the diskette, the system will
| |
| prompt you once more before the dump process overwrites the contents of
| |
| the current diskette in the drive. :enote.
| |
| 3. Insert the next dump diskette into drive A and press any key. This action
| |
| continues the dump process and displays the following message:
| |
| The memory dump is being performed...
| |
| Warning: Any data on the dump diskettes will be overwritten by the Memory
| |
| Dump facility.
| |
| 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the dumping is completed and the following
| |
| message is displayed:
| |
| Insert memory dump diskette number 1 to complete dump.
| |
| The storage address ranges on this diskette are:
| |
| DUMPDATA.xxx yyy - zzz
| |
| Press any key to continue.
| |
| 5. You must reinsert Dump Diskette 1 at this point to properly terminate the
| |
| dump process. The control program will write the dump summary record to
| |
| Dump Diskette 1 and end the process. After the process has ended, the
| |
| following messages are displayed:
| |
| The memory dump has completed. Remove the dump diskette and restart the
| |
| system.
| |
| 6. When a memory dump is initiated, the system begins writing the system
| |
| memory to the dump partition. When completed, the system restarts
| |
| automatically.
| |
| Mailing the Dump Diskettes
| |
| Do not send dump diskettes unless instructed by the Service and Support Group.
| |
| Diskettes must be clearly labeled with the identification number (which is the
| |
| PMR number that is provided by the Service and Support Group) and your name.
| |
| Also, be sure to number the diskettes.
| |
| Send the dump diskettes to the address provided by the Service and Support
| |
| Group. Refer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for
| |
| instructions about calling for additional assistance.
| |
| | |
| Recovering from A Forgotten Password 233/3
| |
| | |
| If you forgot your lockup password, you must use the LOCK.RC file located in the
| |
| \OS2 directory to reconfigure the OS2.INI file. To do this:
| |
| 1. Turn on the computer.
| |
| 2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
| |
| screen, press Alt+F1.
| |
| 3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
| |
| 4. Change from drive A to the drive on which OS/2 is installed. Type: C: and
| |
| press Enter.
| |
| 5. Change to the OS2 directory. Type CD \OS2 and press Enter.
| |
| 6. Type the following:
| |
| MAKEINI OS2.INI LOCK.RC
| |
| 7. Press Enter.
| |
| 8. Restart the computer.
| |
| | |
| Video Procedures 234/1+
| |
| | |
| This chapter provides information to help you install and fine tune your OS/2
| |
| video. It includes supported chip sets and resolutions, instructions for
| |
| changing video settings, plus specific procedures for SVGA, XGA, and LCD or
| |
| Monochrome Plasma displays.
| |
| Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the
| |
| information.
| |
| | |
| Video Device Drivers for OS/2 235/2+
| |
| | |
| OS/2 contains video device drivers that support the chip sets found on many
| |
| system boards and display adapters.
| |
| The following table lists the supported chip sets and the video device driver
| |
| that should be selected during installation.
| |
| | |
| Non-Accelerated Video Device Drivers 236/3
| |
| | |
| ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
| |
| 3 MANUFACTURER 3 CHIP SET 3 VIDEO DEVICE DRIVER 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 ATI Technolo- 3 ATI28800 256 color 3 ATI Technologies ATI28800 3
| |
| 3 gies 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Cirrus Logic 3 CL-GD5422, CL-GD5424 3 Cirrus Logic 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Headland Tech- 3 HT209 256 color 3 Headland Technologies 3
| |
| 3 nologies 3 3 HT209 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 IBM 3 IBM VGA 16 color 3 Video graphics adapter 3
| |
| 3 3 3 (VGA) 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 IBM 3 IBM VGA256C 3 IBM VGA256C 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Trident** 3 TVGA8900B, TVGA8900C 256 3 Trident Microsystems 3
| |
| 3 Microsystems 3 color 3 TVGA8900 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 TSENG 3 ET4000 3 TSENG Laboratories ET4000 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Western 3 WD90C11, WD90C30, WD90C31 (in 3 Western Digital WD90C11, 3
| |
| 3 Digital** 3 WD90C30 compatibility mode) 3 C30, C31 (C30 mode only) 3
| |
| 3 3 256 color 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 NOTE: Use the Selective Install icon to change the resolution and number of 3
| |
| 3 colors for non-accelerated video device drivers. 3
| |
| @DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
| |
| | |
| Accelerated Video Device Drivers 237/3
| |
| | |
| ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
| |
| 3 MANUFACTURER 3 CHIP SET 3 VIDEO DEVICE DRIVER 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 IBM 3 IBM 8514 3 Display Adapter 8514/A 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 IBM 3 IBM XGA 3 Extended graphic adapter 3
| |
| 3 3 3 (XGA) 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 S3 Corporation 3 S3 86C801, 86C805, 86C928 3 S3 86C801, 86C805, 86C928 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 S3 Corporation 3 S3 86C864 3 S3 864 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Cirrus Logic** 3 Cirrus Logic 5426, 5428, 5430, 3 Cirrus Logic 5426, 5428, 3
| |
| 3 3 5434 3 5430, 5434 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Western Digital 3 WD 90C24, 90C24A, 90C24A2, 3 WD 90C24 - 90C31 3
| |
| 3 3 90C31 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Western Digital 3 WD 90C33 3 WD 90C33 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 ATI Technology 3 MACH 32 3 ATI MACH 32 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 ATI Technology 3 MACH 64 3 ATI MACH 64 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 TSENG** 3 ETW32, ETW32i, ETW32p 3 TSENG ET4000/W32, /W32i, 3
| |
| 3 3 3 /W32p 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Weitek** 3 Power 9000 3 Weitek Power 9000 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 NOTE: Not all system boards and display adapters that use these chip sets 3
| |
| 3 are supported. For more information about display adapter and chip set com- 3
| |
| 3 patibility, select HELP from the Display Driver Install window in Selective 3
| |
| 3 Install or refer to the README file on the Installation Diskette. 3
| |
| 3 3
| |
| 3 These drivers will be installed in 640x480x256 colors by the OS/2 installa- 3
| |
| 3 tion program. Use the system icon to change the resolution and number of 3
| |
| 3 colors if you are using any of the accelerated video device drivers except 3
| |
| 3 IBM 8514. 3
| |
| @DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
| |
| | |
| Supported Resolutions for Accelerated Drivers 238/3
| |
| | |
| The resolutions that can be set for a particular display adapter, are dependent
| |
| on the:
| |
| o Specific display adapter being used
| |
| o Graphics accelerator chip set on the adapter
| |
| o Video device driver being used
| |
| o Amount of video memory on the adapter
| |
| The video device drivers shipped with OS/2 (see the previous table) support the
| |
| following resolutions and number of colors. Not all of the device drivers
| |
| support all of the resolutions. For more information about the resolutions
| |
| supported by each adapter and device driver, select Help from the Display
| |
| Driver Install window in Selective Install or refer to the README file on the
| |
| Installation Diskette.
| |
| ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDD?
| |
| 3 RESOLUTIONS 3 NUMBER OF 3 VIDEO MEMORY 3 NOTE3
| |
| 3 3 COLORS 3 REQUIRED 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 640 x 480 3 256 3 1MB 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 800 x 600 3 256 3 1MB 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 1024 x 768 3 256 3 1MB 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 1280 x 1200 3 256 3 2MB 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 1600 x 1200 3 256 3 4MB 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 640 x 480 3 65,536 3 1MB 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 800 x 600 3 65,536 3 1MB 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 1024 x 768 3 65,536 3 2MB 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 1280 x 1024 3 65,536 3 4MB 3 2 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 640 x 480 3 16,777,216 3 1MB or 2MB 3 1, 3
| |
| 3 3 3 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 800 x 600 3 16,777,216 3 2MB 3 1, 3
| |
| 3 3 3 3 4, 3
| |
| 3 3 3 3 6 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 1024 x 768 3 16,777,216 3 4MB 3 1 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 1280 x 1024 3 16,777,216 3 4MB 3 1, 3
| |
| 3 3 3 3 2 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
| |
| 3 1360 x 1024 3 16 3 1MB 3 5 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDD4
| |
| 3 NOTE: 3
| |
| 3 3
| |
| 3 1. The Western Digital device drivers do not support 3
| |
| 3 16,777,216 colors. 3
| |
| 3 2. Most adapter/chip set combinations do not support 3
| |
| 3 these resolutions and colors. 3
| |
| 3 3. The amount of video memory required for this resol- 3
| |
| 3 ution is dependent on the display adapter and the 3
| |
| 3 video device driver installed. 3
| |
| 3 4. Display adapters with the TSENG W32p Rev A chip set 3
| |
| 3 do not support this resolution. 3
| |
| 3 5. This resolution is supported only for XGA-2. 3
| |
| 3 6. Cirrus adapters require more than 2MB of video memory 3
| |
| 3 for this resolution. 3
| |
| @DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
| |
| | |
| Installing a Video Device Driver 239/2
| |
| | |
| All display adapters must tailor their output to the capabilities of the display
| |
| attached to the system. Unfortunately, there is no standard for communicating
| |
| the capabilities of the display to the display adapter. The result is that many
| |
| display adapters supply a program to define and select the type of display
| |
| attached to the system. OS/2 responds to this situation by permitting the DOS
| |
| display selection utilities provided by the manufacturers to be used to properly
| |
| configure the system. OS/2 then configures the system in the same manner each
| |
| time your computer is started.
| |
| If no display is specified, many display adapters make an assumption about the
| |
| type of display attached to the system. This default setting is designed to
| |
| work with the widest range of displays possible; therefore, it is the safest
| |
| choice.
| |
| During this installation procedure, you will be asked to make a decision about
| |
| whether you want to use the defaults for your display type, or use the display
| |
| adapter utility program provided by the manufacturer of the adapter. You should
| |
| use the utility program provided by the manufacturer if any of the following
| |
| apply:
| |
| o Your display adapter is produced by Diamond Computer Systems, Inc..
| |
| o Your display supports non-interlaced operation only.
| |
| o Your display does not support VESA standard refresh rates.
| |
| o Your display adapter requires software configuration to function properly
| |
| in DOS.
| |
| o You want to configure your system to take advantage of the full refresh
| |
| capabilities of your display.
| |
| Note: Using the utility program provided by the manufacturer requires exact
| |
| knowledge about the capabilities of your display. If the wrong display type is
| |
| selected, your system might not start.
| |
| If you have an SVGA adapter in your system, you must restore it to work in VGA
| |
| mode before you can use the following instructions to install a different
| |
| adapter in your system. See Preparing to Switch to a Different Display Adapter
| |
| for instructions.
| |
| To install a new display adapter or video device driver:
| |
| 1. Install the display adapter using the manufacturer's instructions.
| |
| 2. Restart your system.
| |
| 3. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 4. Open System Setup.
| |
| 5. Open Selective Install.
| |
| 6. Select Primary Display or Secondary Display from the System Configuration
| |
| window.
| |
| Note: A secondary display is used for only DOS and full-screen sessions.
| |
| Even if two displays are attached to the system only one is active at a
| |
| time.
| |
| 7. Select the display driver that you want from the list provided. (If you
| |
| are unsure of which driver to choose, select Help.)
| |
| 8. Select OK.
| |
| 9. Follow the instructions on the screen.
| |
| | |
| Video Settings 240/2
| |
| | |
| To change video settings for a program:
| |
| 1. Point to the program icon.
| |
| 2. Click mouse button 2.
| |
| 3. Select Settings.
| |
| 4. Select the Session tab.
| |
| 5. Select the DOS settings or WIN-OS/2 push button.
| |
| 6. Change the settings (See the online documentation for detailed a
| |
| explanation of these settings).
| |
| 7. Select the Save push button.
| |
| 8. Close the Settings notebook.
| |
| | |
| SVGA Procedures 241/2+
| |
| | |
| The following procedures provide instructions for enabling and disabling SVGA
| |
| after OS/2 is installed.
| |
| | |
| Enabling SVGA in WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen Sessions 242/3
| |
| | |
| You can enable WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions to run in high-resolution (1024 x
| |
| 768) mode while the OS/2 Desktop runs in VGA mode.
| |
| To enable WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions for SVGA:
| |
| Note: Follow the instructions very carefully. Otherwise, you could cause your
| |
| WIN-OS/2 sessions to become inoperable.
| |
| 1. Use Selective Install to install VGA (640 x 480) support for OS/2.
| |
| 2. Back up the SYSTEM.INI and WIN.INI files as follows:
| |
| a. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| b. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| c. Open OS/2 Full Screen.
| |
| d. At the C prompt, do the following:
| |
| o Type: CD\OS2\MDOS\WINOS2 and press Enter.
| |
| o Type: COPY WIN.INI WIN.BAK and press Enter.
| |
| o Type: COPY SYSTEM.INI SYSTEM.BAK and press Enter.
| |
| 3. Check the OS2\MDOS\WINOS2\SYSTEM directory for the desired high-resolution
| |
| display device driver.
| |
| o If the device driver is already on the system, go to step 4.
| |
| o If the device driver is not found, use your OS/2 or Windows
| |
| installation disk to copy the driver to the \OS2\MDOS\WINOS2\SYSTEM
| |
| directory.
| |
| For example, to use the OS/2 diskettes and install the 8514.DRV
| |
| high-resolution device driver:
| |
| a. Search the OS/2 installation diskettes for the WIN8514 and
| |
| *F.FON files and then do the following:
| |
| - DIR A:WIN8514 and press Enter
| |
| - DIR A:*F.FON and press Enter
| |
| After you find the files, you have to unpack them. The
| |
| files are packed with their standard target directory coded
| |
| into the packed file.
| |
| b. Copy the file to the system disk in the proper directory, using
| |
| the UNPACK utility program:
| |
| - Type UNPACK A:WIN8514 and press Enter.
| |
| - Type UNPACK A:*F.FON and press Enter.
| |
| The SVGA driver and font files are now unpacked and in the
| |
| correct directory.
| |
| 4. Edit the SYSTEM.INI file and find the following line:
| |
| FDISPLAY.DRV=VGA.DRV
| |
| This line specifies the device driver used in WIN-OS/2 full-screen
| |
| sessions.
| |
| Note: DISPLAY.DRV is the driver used for Microsoft Windows. FDISPLAY.DRV
| |
| is the driver used for WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions. SDISPLAY.DRV is the
| |
| driver used for WIN-OS/2 windowed sessions.
| |
| 5. Change this line to point to the high-resolution device driver that was
| |
| unloaded in the steps above. In this example, the device driver is
| |
| 8514.DRV.
| |
| Note: To install a different driver, substitute the name of your driver
| |
| in the statement: FDISPLAY.DRV=8514.DRV
| |
| The modified line should look like the following:
| |
| FDISPLAY.DRV=8514.DRV
| |
| 6. Change the SYSTEM.INI font entries:
| |
| o In SYSTEM.INI, these entries are:
| |
| FIXEDFON.FON=VGAFIX.FON
| |
| OEMFONTS.FON=VGAOEM.FON
| |
| FONTS.FON=VGASYS.FON
| |
| o For 8514/A, these entries must be changed to:
| |
| FIXEDFON.FON=8514FIX.FON
| |
| OEMFONTS.FON=8514OEM.FON
| |
| FONTS.FON=8514SYS.FON
| |
| o Save the changes to the SYSTEM.INI file.
| |
| 7. Change the WIN.INI font entries
| |
| o In WIN.INI, the entries are:
| |
| SYMBOL 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SYMBOLE.FON
| |
| MS SANS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SSERIFE.FON
| |
| MS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SERIFE.FON
| |
| SMALL FONTS (VGA RES)=SMALLE.FON
| |
| COURIER 10,12,15 (VGA RES)=COURE.FON
| |
| o For 8514/A, these entries must be changed to:
| |
| SYMBOL 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SYMBOLG.FON
| |
| MS SANS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SSERIFG.FON
| |
| MS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SERIFG.FON
| |
| SMALL FONTS (8514 RES)=SMALLG.FON
| |
| COURIER 10,12,15 (8514 RES)=COURG.FON
| |
| o Save the changes to the SYSTEM.INI file.
| |
| The system is ready to run Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions
| |
| high-resolution mode.
| |
| | |
| Preparing to Switch to a Different Display Adapter 243/3
| |
| | |
| Because SVGA adapters are only compatible at the VGA level, the system must be
| |
| restored to VGA in order to safely install a different display adapter.
| |
| To set your system back to VGA:
| |
| 1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
| |
| screen, press Alt+F1.
| |
| 3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.
| |
| Your display adapter is restored and can work in VGA mode. If you want to
| |
| install a new display adapter or video device driver, complete the steps under
| |
| Installing a Video Device Driver.
| |
| | |
| Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection 244/3
| |
| | |
| If you performed the steps in Installing a Video Device Driver and selected an
| |
| incorrect display driver you can recover by restoring to VGA mode.
| |
| To restore to VGA mode:
| |
| 1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
| |
| screen, press Alt+F1.
| |
| 3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.
| |
| 4. Use Selective Install to install support for another high-resolution
| |
| display adapter. See Installing a Video Device Driver for instructions.
| |
| | |
| Capturing the Display Configuration 245/3
| |
| | |
| SVGA display and video mode configuration under OS/2 is controlled by the
| |
| SVGADATA.PMI file. This file can be provided by the display adapter
| |
| manufacturer or created using the SVGA utility program.
| |
| The SVGA utility program gets information from the SVGA chip set to set each
| |
| video mode and captures the current state of the display adapter. This
| |
| information is stored in the SVGADATA.PMI file and used when the system is
| |
| started.
| |
| Both the SVGA.EXE and SVGADATA.PMI are located in the \OS2 directory.
| |
| To create the SVGADATA.PMI file, type one of the following commands at a DOS
| |
| command prompt and press Enter.
| |
| SVGA ON Generates the SVGADATA.PMI file which enables OS/2 SVGA
| |
| support.
| |
| SVGA ON DOS Generates PMI information when executed outside the OS/2 DOS
| |
| environment. This generates an SVGADATA.DOS file that can be
| |
| renamed to .PMI and copied to the \OS2 directory. This entry
| |
| might be required if your SVGA adapter uses DOS device
| |
| drivers to configure the display. Trident** adapters are an
| |
| example.
| |
| SVGA ON INIT Generates default display information for some TSENG** and
| |
| Cirrus Logic** based display adapters.
| |
| SVGA OFF Deletes the SVGADATA.PMI file, disabling OS/2 SVGA support.
| |
| SVGA STATUS Returns your graphics chipset, as it appears to OS/2.
| |
| Note: The SVGA utility program might be affected by video configuration
| |
| programs, Terminate Stay Resident programs (TSR), and switches and jumpers on
| |
| the display adapter. Configure your video adapter properly before using the
| |
| SVGA utility program to create the SVGADATA.PMI file.
| |
| | |
| Switching to a Display with Less Capability 246/3
| |
| | |
| Switching to a lower capability display after installing high-resolution (SVGA)
| |
| drivers might cause the system to start out of synchronization. Follow this
| |
| procedure to switch to a display with less capability:
| |
| 1. Open DOS Full-Screen command prompt.
| |
| 2. Run the DOS display configuration utility program supplied with your SVGA
| |
| adapter to properly configure your display adapter and display.
| |
| 3. Change to the \OS2 directory on your hard disk.
| |
| 4. Type SVGA ON.
| |
| 5. Press Enter to start the SVGA utility program. This utility program saves
| |
| the current state of your video configuration.
| |
| 6. Shut down your system.
| |
| 7. Restart your system to enable the new display.
| |
| Note: You can also use these instructions if you start a specific version of
| |
| DOS. Substitute the following step for step 4. Type SVGA ON DOS and press
| |
| Enter. When the SVGA utility program finishes, type:
| |
| RENAME\OS2\SVGADATA.DOS \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI
| |
| Press Enter.
| |
| | |
| XGA Procedures 247/2+
| |
| | |
| The following information relates to specific situations with high-resolution
| |
| XGA displays.
| |
| | |
| XGA-2 Display Type Override 248/3
| |
| | |
| To correctly operate your display, OS/2 needs to determine the type and
| |
| characteristics of the device by using a display identification number. Some
| |
| displays have the same identification number but different characteristics. If
| |
| OS/2 does not operate your display at the correct refresh rate or display mode,
| |
| and you are running an XGA-2 adapter, do the following:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open System. The System Settings notebook appears.
| |
| 4. Select page 2 of the Screen page. (You can go to page 2 by selecting the
| |
| right arrow in the lower-right corner of the notebook.)
| |
| 5. Select the appropriate display type using the list provided.
| |
| Note: If an incorrect display type is selected, your display might be
| |
| unusable after you restart your system.
| |
| 6. Close the Settings notebook.
| |
| | |
| Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection 249/3
| |
| | |
| If you performed the steps in XGA-2 Display Type Override and your display is
| |
| not usable, you can revert back to the previous display type. To erase the
| |
| display type override information:
| |
| 1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
| |
| screen, press Alt+F1.
| |
| 3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
| |
| 4. Change to the C:\XGA$DMQS directory and delete the XGASETUP.PRO file.
| |
| This erases all override information from your system.
| |
| 5. Remove the diskette and restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.
| |
| Your display now operates using its default settings.
| |
| Note: If you plan to change or replace your display, first delete the file
| |
| XGASETUP.PRO from the XGA$DMQS directory and then turn off the system. If your
| |
| new display does not operate correctly, repeat the preceding procedure.
| |
| | |
| Changing Screen Resolution and Number of Colors 250/3
| |
| | |
| Note: You cannot use this procedure if you are using the VGA, 8514, or SVGA
| |
| driver.
| |
| To change the screen resolution or number of colors:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open System.
| |
| 4. Select the desired resolution and number of colors from the list.
| |
| 5. Close the Settings notebook.
| |
| 6. Shut down and restart your system to make the new resolution and number of
| |
| colors operational.
| |
| Note: The Microsoft Windows XGA full-screen driver does not support all the
| |
| graphic modes handled by the OS/2 PM XGA driver. The full-screen Windows
| |
| driver does not support 1024 x 768 x 16 color. If this mode is selected, the
| |
| OS/2 Desktop will run at 1024 x 768 x 16 color, but the Windows full screen
| |
| will operate in 1024 x 768 x 256 color mode.
| |
| | |
| Laptop LCD or Monochrome Plasma Displays 251/2
| |
| | |
| Laptop LCDs and computers with monochrome plasma displays use 16 shades of gray
| |
| and operate like VGA displays.
| |
| Note: If you run VGA DOS graphics programs on the OS/2 Desktop and your system
| |
| does not have VGA support, your Desktop might be corrupted.
| |
| You can optimize the color scheme for gray-scale usage, and also provide a good
| |
| set of colors for a VGA Desktop presentation on a laptop LCD or monochrome
| |
| plasma display. To change the color scheme and create a more readable display
| |
| image:
| |
| 1. Use your Reference Diskette or hardware Setup program to set your hardware
| |
| to VGA color, if possible.
| |
| 2. Open OS/2 System.
| |
| 3. Open System Setup.
| |
| 4. Open Scheme Palette.
| |
| 5. Select the monochrome scheme in the right-hand column.
| |
| 6. Close the Scheme Palette.
| |
| | |
| =Part 5 - Advanced Installation 252/1=
| |
| | |
| | |
| Using Advanced Installation 253/1+
| |
| | |
| This chapter provides examples of installing OS/2 on your computer using the
| |
| Advanced Installation method. Advanced Installation is designed for experienced
| |
| computer users who want to customize their installation in one or more of the
| |
| following ways:
| |
| o Select specific software features of OS/2 to install, rather than the
| |
| preselected group (see Examples 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)
| |
| o Install OS/2 on a drive or partition other than C (see Examples 1, 2, and
| |
| 3)
| |
| o Install OS/2 in a logical drive (see Examples 1, 2, and 3)
| |
| o Install OS/2 on a hard disk other than the first disk in the computer (see
| |
| Example 3)
| |
| o Select the HPFS file system (see step 21 in Example 1)
| |
| o Install OS/2 so it can be used with Boot Manager (see Examples 1, 2, and
| |
| 3)
| |
| o Install OS/2 on a computer that does not have DOS and Windows on it (see
| |
| Examples 4 and 5)
| |
| o Install OS/2 in one primary partition and delete all existing information
| |
| on your hard disk (see Example 5)
| |
| If you have any problems during the installation, press the F1 key to view the
| |
| online help that is available whenever you see F1=Help at the bottom of a
| |
| screen. If you have problems with any of your hardware or if you receive error
| |
| messages, refer to Solving Installation Problems.
| |
| | |
| Planning for a Boot Manager Setup 254/2
| |
| | |
| During Advanced Installation, you will be asked to specify how you want to
| |
| partition your hard disk. If you are installing more than one operating system,
| |
| you will want to consider setting up multiple partitions to contain them. If
| |
| you set up multiple partitions, you must install the Boot Manager feature. The
| |
| Boot Manager helps you manage the selective startup of your operating systems.
| |
| To find out more about partitioning your hard disk and installing Boot Manager,
| |
| read Setting Up Your Hard Disk. before continuing with the Advanced
| |
| Installation. For information about partition sizes, see -- Reference dpart not
| |
| found --..
| |
| | |
| Installing the Operating System 255/2+
| |
| | |
| The sections that follow provide examples of typical installation setups.
| |
| o Example 1 shows how to repartition your hard disk to create a Boot Manager
| |
| partition, a primary partition for DOS and Windows, and a logical drive
| |
| for OS/2.
| |
| o Example 2 shows how to preserve an existing partition that already
| |
| contains DOS and Windows, and create a Boot Manager partition and a
| |
| logical drive for OS/2 on a hard disk that has available free space.
| |
| o Example 3 shows an installation on a computer with two hard disks. In
| |
| this example, a Boot Manager partition and a primary partition for DOS and
| |
| Windows are created on the first hard disk. On the second hard disk, two
| |
| logical drives are created, one to hold data (with drive letter D) and one
| |
| for OS/2 (with drive letter E).
| |
| o Example 4 and Example 5 show how to install OS/2 on a computer that has no
| |
| other operating systems already installed on it. The Boot Manager is not
| |
| installed in these installation examples.
| |
| Note: If you install OS/2 on a computer without Windows, you will not be
| |
| able to use Windows programs.
| |
| To make the installation as easy as possible, select the example that most
| |
| closely resembles your system and the way you want to customize it. If you
| |
| need more detailed explanations of the Boot Manager, the FDISK utility, the
| |
| file systems available in OS/2, or hard disk partitioning, please read Setting
| |
| Up Your Hard Disk.
| |
| Note: Be sure you have read As You Begin before installing OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Example 1 256/3
| |
| | |
| Creating a Boot Manager Partition, a Primary Partition for DOS and Windows, and
| |
| a Logical Drive for OS/2 and Data
| |
| In the following example, a 120MB hard disk that contains one primary partition
| |
| with DOS and Windows in it will be deleted and replaced with the following
| |
| partitions:
| |
| o A 1MB Boot Manager partition
| |
| o A 20MB primary partition for DOS and Windows (drive C)
| |
| o A 99MB logical drive for OS/2 and data (drive D)
| |
| Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, you can
| |
| customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
| |
| to be. Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
| |
| hard disk.
| |
| 1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use your
| |
| existing operating system to back up the data.)
| |
| 2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.
| |
| 3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
| |
| from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
| |
| 4. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
| |
| press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
| |
| asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
| |
| 6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
| |
| Then press Enter.
| |
| 7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
| |
| specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
| |
| 8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
| |
| continue with the installation.
| |
| 9. Delete the existing partition (which you have backed up):
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
| |
| b. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete.
| |
| c. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| d. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
| |
| e. Repeat steps a through d for any other partitions you want to delete
| |
| 10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:
| |
| a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
| |
| c. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
| |
| 11. Create the DOS and Windows primary partition:
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
| |
| b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
| |
| c. Type the size of the primary partition (in this example, 20) and
| |
| press Enter.
| |
| d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
| |
| e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
| |
| f. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| g. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
| |
| h. Type a name for this partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and press
| |
| Enter.
| |
| 12. Create the logical drive for OS/2 and your data:
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
| |
| b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
| |
| c. Accept the size of the logical drive (in this example, 99) by
| |
| pressing Enter.
| |
| Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
| |
| on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 99), you would also
| |
| have to indicate if you wanted to create the logical drive at the end
| |
| of free space or at the start of free space.
| |
| d. Select Extended Logical Driveand press Enter.
| |
| e. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
| |
| g. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS2/DATA) and press
| |
| Enter.
| |
| 13. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected at
| |
| startup time):
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS2/DATA line (or whatever name
| |
| you have given the logical drive) and press Enter.
| |
| b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
| |
| c. Select Default and press Enter. The name you typed for the logical
| |
| drive will appear next to Default.
| |
| Note: If you want to change any other startup values, you can do so
| |
| after installation or you can use the steps under Setting the Menu
| |
| Display Time now. Then continue with step d.
| |
| d. Press F3.
| |
| 14. Exit the FDISK screen:
| |
| a. Press F3.
| |
| b. Press any key to remove the message box.
| |
| c. Select Save and exit and press Enter.
| |
| d. When a message appears confirming that the hard disk partitioning is
| |
| complete, remove Diskette 1from drive A. Do not insert the
| |
| Installation Diskette. Continue with step 15.
| |
| 15. Install DOS and Windows:
| |
| a. Insert the DOS installation diskette into drive A, and then press
| |
| Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your computer.
| |
| b. Follow the instructions that came with DOS to install it. If prompted
| |
| to do so during the DOS installation, format the partition and
| |
| logical drive you created in the previous steps.
| |
| c. After DOS is installed, the Boot Manager menu appears. Select the DOS
| |
| partition and press Enter.
| |
| d. Install Windows in the primary partition you created for it (in this
| |
| example, it is drive C). Follow the installation instructions that
| |
| came with Windows.
| |
| Note: If you receive a message about the Windows swapper file, you
| |
| should avoid putting the swapper file in the same partition or
| |
| logical drive as OS/2. However, if you put the Windows swapper file
| |
| in the same partition or logical drive as OS/2, make sure you leave
| |
| enough free space for OS/2, and create a temporary Windows swapper
| |
| file.
| |
| 16. Continue the OS/2 installation:
| |
| a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A and press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart your computer.
| |
| b. When the IBM logo screen appears, remove the Installation Diskette
| |
| and insert Diskette 1into drive A. Then press Enter.
| |
| c. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option
| |
| 2, specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
| |
| d. When the warning screen appears, press Enter to continue.
| |
| 17. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
| |
| b. Highlight the OS2/DATA line (or whatever name you have given the
| |
| logical drive) and press Enter.
| |
| c. Select Set installable and press Enter.
| |
| d. Press F3 to exit the FDISK screen.
| |
| 18. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
| |
| Accept the drive, and press Enter. (In this example, the screen will show
| |
| drive D as the selected drive.)
| |
| 19. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
| |
| 2. Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
| |
| any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
| |
| 20. When a screen appears asking if you want to format the OS/2 partition, do
| |
| one of the following:
| |
| o Select Do not format the partition if you want to use the FAT file
| |
| system. Then press Enter. Continue with step 22.
| |
| o Select Format the partition if you want to use the HPFS file system.
| |
| Then press Enter. Continue with step 21.
| |
| Refer to Selecting a File System for an explanation of the file
| |
| systems.
| |
| 21. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system
| |
| with which you want to format the OS/2 logical drive.
| |
| 22. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from
| |
| diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
| |
| installation progresses.
| |
| After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
| |
| and then reinsert Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the screen.
| |
| After you remove Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo
| |
| screen, followed by the System Configuration screen:
| |
| 23. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
| |
| hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
| |
| Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
| |
| If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
| |
| click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name. A screen
| |
| will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
| |
| hardware device. If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
| |
| refer to the documentation that came with it. If you need information
| |
| about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
| |
| display, refer to Video Procedures
| |
| Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need more
| |
| information about any screen you see.
| |
| If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
| |
| OK.
| |
| A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
| |
| (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
| |
| program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
| |
| 24. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
| |
| or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
| |
| names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
| |
| o If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
| |
| PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
| |
| LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
| |
| o If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
| |
| PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
| |
| COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.
| |
| If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
| |
| install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
| |
| and Installation screen appears:
| |
| 25. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
| |
| Setup and Installation screen. Click on Software configuration in the
| |
| menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
| |
| during Installation for more information.
| |
| 26. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
| |
| features you want to install. You will notice that some features have a
| |
| check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
| |
| The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
| |
| right of the feature.
| |
| Follow these steps:
| |
| a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
| |
| deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
| |
| b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
| |
| button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
| |
| c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
| |
| 27. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
| |
| want to select. Then click on OK.
| |
| 28. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. If you are installing
| |
| from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
| |
| including one or more Printer Driver diskettes. After inserting each
| |
| diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
| |
| 29. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
| |
| Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on the
| |
| screen; click on Help if you need more information.
| |
| 30. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
| |
| of the OS/2 installation.
| |
| 31. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do one
| |
| of the following:
| |
| o If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:
| |
| a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
| |
| b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
| |
| c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as
| |
| requested.
| |
| o If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
| |
| a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
| |
| b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
| |
| c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD,
| |
| type the drive letter and directory name in the field provided.
| |
| For example:
| |
| e:\winsetup
| |
| where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where \winsetup
| |
| is the directory that contains the Windows files.
| |
| 32. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and press Enter.
| |
| 33. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
| |
| and restart your computer. Click on OK or press Enter.
| |
| 34. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
| |
| Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
| |
| your Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
| |
| transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Example 2 257/3
| |
| | |
| Creating a Boot Manager Partition, Keeping an Existing Primary Partition for DOS
| |
| and Windows (without Repartitioning), and Creating Logical Drives for OS/2 and
| |
| Data
| |
| In this example, a hard disk of 120MB currently consists of a primary partition
| |
| of 40MB (containing DOS and Windows) and a logical drive of 80MB (which might
| |
| contain data). The DOS/Windows primary partition (drive C) will be preserved,
| |
| but the logical drive will be deleted and replaced by:
| |
| o A 1MB Boot Manager partition
| |
| o A 39MB logical drive for data (drive D)
| |
| o A 40MB logical drive for OS/2 (drive E)
| |
| In this example, you will create free space on your hard disk and then put the
| |
| Boot Manager partition at the end of the free space. Of course, you can
| |
| customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
| |
| to be. Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on the
| |
| drive you are repartitioning.
| |
| 1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing logical drive. (Use
| |
| your existing operating system to back up the data.)
| |
| 2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.
| |
| 3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
| |
| from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
| |
| 4. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
| |
| press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
| |
| asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
| |
| 6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
| |
| Then press Enter.
| |
| 7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
| |
| specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
| |
| 8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
| |
| continue with the installation.
| |
| 9. Delete the existing logical drive (which you have backed up):
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
| |
| b. Highlight the line that contains information about the logical drive
| |
| you are going to delete. Then press Enter.
| |
| c. Select Delete partition from the Options menu and press Enter.
| |
| 10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
| |
| b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
| |
| c. Select Create at End of Free Space and press Enter.
| |
| 11. Create the first logical drive (for data):
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
| |
| b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
| |
| c. Type the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 39) and
| |
| press Enter.
| |
| d. Select Extended Logical Driveand press Enter.
| |
| e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
| |
| 12. Create the second logical drive (for OS/2):
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
| |
| b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
| |
| c. Accept the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 40 )
| |
| by pressing Enter.
| |
| Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
| |
| on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 40), you would also
| |
| have to indicate if you wanted to create the logical drive at the end
| |
| of free space or at the start of free space.
| |
| d. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
| |
| e. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
| |
| g. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS/2) and press
| |
| Enter.
| |
| 13. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected at
| |
| startup time):
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
| |
| have given this logical drive) and press Enter.
| |
| b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
| |
| c. Select Default and press Enter. The name you typed for the OS/2
| |
| logical drive will appear next to Default.
| |
| Note: If you want to change any other startup values, you can do so
| |
| after installation or you can use the steps under Setting the Menu
| |
| Display Time Then continue with step d.
| |
| d. Press F3.
| |
| 14. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
| |
| have given this logical drive) and press Enter.
| |
| b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
| |
| 15. Add a name for the DOS/Windows partition to the Boot Manager startup menu:
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the line that contains information
| |
| about the DOS/Windows partition.
| |
| b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| c. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
| |
| d. Type a name for this partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and press
| |
| Enter.
| |
| 16. Exit the FDISK screen:
| |
| a. Press F3.
| |
| b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.
| |
| 17. Continue with the installation. You will be asked to reinsert the
| |
| Installation Diskette and Diskette 1 Follow the messages on the screen.
| |
| 18. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
| |
| Accept the drive, and press Enter. (In this example, the screen will show
| |
| drive E as the selected drive.)
| |
| 19. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
| |
| 2. Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
| |
| any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
| |
| 20. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system you
| |
| want to use for your OS/2 drive. (Refer to Selecting a File System)
| |
| 21. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from
| |
| diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
| |
| installation progresses.
| |
| After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
| |
| and then reinsert Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the screen.
| |
| After you remove Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo
| |
| screen, followed by the System Configuration screen.
| |
| 22. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
| |
| hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
| |
| Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
| |
| If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
| |
| click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name. A screen
| |
| will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
| |
| hardware device. If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
| |
| refer to the documentation that came with it. If you need information
| |
| about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
| |
| display, refer Video Procedures.
| |
| Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need more
| |
| information about any screen you see.
| |
| If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
| |
| OK.
| |
| A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
| |
| (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
| |
| program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
| |
| 23. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
| |
| or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
| |
| names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
| |
| o If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
| |
| PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
| |
| LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
| |
| o If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
| |
| PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
| |
| COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.
| |
| If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
| |
| install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2
| |
| Setup and Installation screen appears.
| |
| 24. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
| |
| 25. Click on Format on the pull-down menu. Then indicate which file system
| |
| you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold your data
| |
| (in this example, the logical drive is drive D). Refer to Selecting a File
| |
| System for an explanation of the file systems. Click on Format when you
| |
| are done.
| |
| 26. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.
| |
| 27. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
| |
| Setup and Installation screen. Click on Software configuration on the
| |
| menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
| |
| during Installation for more information.
| |
| 28. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
| |
| features you want to install. You will notice that some features have a
| |
| check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
| |
| The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
| |
| right of the feature.
| |
| Follow these steps:
| |
| a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
| |
| deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
| |
| b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
| |
| button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
| |
| c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
| |
| 29. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
| |
| want to select. Then click on OK.
| |
| 30. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. If you are installing
| |
| from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
| |
| including one or more Printer Driver diskettes. After inserting each
| |
| diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
| |
| 31. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
| |
| Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on the
| |
| screen; click on Help if you need more information.
| |
| 32. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
| |
| of the OS/2 installation.
| |
| 33. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
| |
| and restart your computer. Click on OK or press Enter.
| |
| 34. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
| |
| Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
| |
| your Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
| |
| transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Example 3 258/3
| |
| | |
| Creating a Boot Manager Partition and a Primary Partition for DOS and Windows on
| |
| the First Hard Disk, and Logical Drives for OS/2 and Data on the Second Hard
| |
| Disk
| |
| In the following example, a system with two hard disk drives (one 80MB in size
| |
| with DOS and Windows on it, and the other 200MB in size with programs and data
| |
| on it) will be reformatted and replaced with the following partitions and
| |
| logical drives:
| |
| o The first hard disk:
| |
| - A 1MB Boot Manager partition
| |
| - A 79MB primary partition for DOS and Windows (drive C)
| |
| o The second hard disk:
| |
| - A 155MB logical drive for programs and data (drive D)
| |
| - A 45MB logical drive for OS/2 (drive E)
| |
| Notice that in this example, because only one primary partition (drive C) is
| |
| created on the first hard disk, no drive remapping occurs for your data drive
| |
| (drive D). That is, if your data files were previously in drive D on the second
| |
| hard disk, they will still be in logical drive D after repartitioning and
| |
| installing OS/2. Of course, you must back up your data files before
| |
| repartitioning, and then restore the files to drive D when the OS/2
| |
| installation is completed.
| |
| You will also notice that when you create only logical drives on your second
| |
| hard disk, the FDISK utility program will automatically set up a small (usually
| |
| 1MB) primary partition at the start of free space. That is because it must
| |
| reserve space for the partition table at the start of the hard disk. However,
| |
| this partition will not be assigned a drive letter, and will not cause drive
| |
| remapping or interfere with the use of the logical drives you create on this
| |
| disk.
| |
| Use the following steps to set up your hard disks this way. Of course, you can
| |
| customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
| |
| to be. Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
| |
| hard disks.
| |
| 1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partitions. (Use your
| |
| existing operating system to back up the data.) Be sure to back up data
| |
| on both hard disks.
| |
| 2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.
| |
| 3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
| |
| from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
| |
| 4. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
| |
| press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
| |
| asking you to wait, followed by a black screen. Then a screen appears.
| |
| 6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
| |
| Then press Enter.
| |
| 7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
| |
| specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
| |
| 8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
| |
| continue with the installation.
| |
| 9. Delete the existing partition on the first hard disk (which you have
| |
| backed up):
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
| |
| b. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete.
| |
| c. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| d. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
| |
| e. Repeat steps a through d for any other partitions you want to delete
| |
| on the first hard disk.
| |
| 10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:
| |
| a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
| |
| c. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
| |
| 11. Create the primary partition for DOS and Windows:
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
| |
| b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
| |
| c. Accept the size of the partition (in this example, 79) by pressing
| |
| Enter.
| |
| Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
| |
| on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 79), you would also
| |
| have to indicate if you wanted to create the partition at the end of
| |
| free space or at the start of free space.
| |
| d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
| |
| e. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
| |
| g. Type a name for this primary partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and
| |
| press Enter.
| |
| 12. Delete the existing partition on the second hard disk (which you have
| |
| backed up):
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, press the Tab key to highlight Disk at the top
| |
| of the screen.
| |
| b. Press the Right Arrow key to display the FDISK screen for the second
| |
| hard disk.
| |
| c. Press the Tab key to highlight the first partition listed on the
| |
| FDISK screen.
| |
| d. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete and
| |
| press Enter.
| |
| e. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
| |
| f. Repeat steps a through e for any other partitions you want to delete
| |
| on the second hard disk.
| |
| 13. Create the logical drive for OS/2:
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
| |
| b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
| |
| c. Type the size of the logical drive (in this example, 45) and press
| |
| Enter.
| |
| d. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
| |
| e. Select Create at End of Free Space and press Enter.
| |
| f. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| g. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
| |
| h. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS/2) and press
| |
| Enter.
| |
| 14. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected at
| |
| startup time):
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
| |
| have given the logical drive for OS/2) and press Enter.
| |
| b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
| |
| c. Select Default and press Enter. The name you typed for the OS/2
| |
| logical drive will appear next to Default.
| |
| Note: If you want to change any other startup values, you can do so
| |
| after installation or you can use the steps under Setting the Menu
| |
| Display Time now. Then continue with step d.
| |
| d. Press F3.
| |
| 15. Create the logical drive for data:
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
| |
| b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
| |
| c. Accept the size of the logical drive (in this example, 155) by
| |
| pressing Enter.
| |
| Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
| |
| on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 155), you would also
| |
| have to indicate if you wanted to create the partition at the end of
| |
| free space or at the start of free space.
| |
| d. Select Extended Logical Drive and Press Enter.
| |
| 16. Exit the FDISK screen:
| |
| a. Press F3.
| |
| b. Press any key to remove the message box.
| |
| c. Select Save and exit and press Enter.
| |
| d. When a message appears confirming the hard disk partitioning is
| |
| complete, remove Diskette 1from drive A. Do not insert the
| |
| Installation Diskette. Continue with step 17.
| |
| 17. Install DOS and Windows on the first hard disk:
| |
| a. Insert the DOS installation diskette into drive A, and then press
| |
| Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your computer.
| |
| b. Follow the instructions that came with DOS to install it. If
| |
| prompted to do so during the DOS installation, format the partition
| |
| and logical drives you created in the previous steps.
| |
| c. After DOS is installed, the Boot Manager menu appears. Select the
| |
| DOS partition and press Enter.
| |
| d. Install Windows in the primary partition you created for it (in this
| |
| example, it is drive C). Follow the installation instructions that
| |
| came with Windows.
| |
| Note: If you receive a message about the Windows swapper file, you
| |
| should avoid putting the swapper file in the same partition or
| |
| logical drive as OS/2. However, if you put the Windows swapper file
| |
| in the same partition or logical drive as OS/2, make sure you leave
| |
| enough free space for OS/2, and create a temporary Windows swapper
| |
| file.
| |
| 18. Continue the OS/2 installation:
| |
| a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A and press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart your computer.
| |
| b. When the IBM logo screen appears, remove the Installation Diskette
| |
| and insert Diskette 1into drive A. Then press Enter.
| |
| c. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option
| |
| 2, specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
| |
| d. When the warning screen appears, press Enter to continue.
| |
| 19. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
| |
| b. Press the Tab key to highlight Disk at the top of the FDISK screen.
| |
| c. Press the Right Arrow key to display the FDISK screen for the second
| |
| hard disk.
| |
| d. Press the Tab key to highlight the first partition listed on the
| |
| FDISK screen.
| |
| e. Highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you have given the OS/2
| |
| logical drive) and press Enter.
| |
| f. Select Set installable and press Enter.
| |
| g. Press F3 to exit the FDISK screen.
| |
| 20. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
| |
| Accept the drive, and press Enter. (In this example, the screen will show
| |
| drive E as the selected drive.)
| |
| 21. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
| |
| 2. Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
| |
| any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
| |
| 22. When a screen appears asking if you want to format the OS/2 partition, do
| |
| one of the following:
| |
| o Select Do not format the partition if you want to use the FAT file
| |
| system. Then press Enter. Continue with step 24.
| |
| o Select Format the partition if you want to use the HPFS file system.
| |
| Then press Enter. Continue with step 23.
| |
| Refer to Selecting a File System for an explanation of the file
| |
| systems.
| |
| 23. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system
| |
| with which you want to format the OS/2 logical drive. If a warning screen
| |
| appears, press Enter to continue with the installation.
| |
| 24. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from
| |
| diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
| |
| installation progresses.
| |
| 25. After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
| |
| and then reinsert Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the screen.
| |
| After you remove Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo
| |
| screen, followed by the System Configuration screen.
| |
| 26. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
| |
| hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
| |
| Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
| |
| If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
| |
| click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name. A screen
| |
| will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
| |
| hardware device. If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
| |
| refer to the documentation that came with it. If you need information
| |
| about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
| |
| display, refer to Video Procedures.
| |
| Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need more
| |
| information about any screen you see.
| |
| If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
| |
| OK.
| |
| A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
| |
| (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
| |
| program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
| |
| 27. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
| |
| or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
| |
| names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
| |
| o If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
| |
| PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
| |
| LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
| |
| o If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
| |
| PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
| |
| COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.
| |
| If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
| |
| install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
| |
| and Installation screen appears.
| |
| 28. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
| |
| 29. Click on Format on the pull-down menu. Then indicate which file system
| |
| you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold data (in
| |
| this example, the logical drive is drive D). Refer to Selecting a File
| |
| System for an explanation of the file systems. Click on Format when you
| |
| are done.
| |
| 30. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.
| |
| 31. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
| |
| Setup and Installation screen. Click on Software configuration in the
| |
| menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
| |
| during Installation for more information.
| |
| 32. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
| |
| features you want to install. You will notice that some features have a
| |
| check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
| |
| The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
| |
| right of the feature.
| |
| Follow these steps:
| |
| a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
| |
| deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
| |
| b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
| |
| button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
| |
| c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
| |
| 33. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
| |
| want to select. Then click on OK.
| |
| 34. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. If you are installing
| |
| from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
| |
| including one or more Printer Driver diskettes. After inserting each
| |
| diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
| |
| 35. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
| |
| Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on the
| |
| screen; click on Help if you need more information.
| |
| 36. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
| |
| of the OS/2 installation.
| |
| 37. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do one
| |
| of the following:
| |
| o If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:
| |
| a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
| |
| b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
| |
| c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as
| |
| requested.
| |
| o If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
| |
| a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
| |
| b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
| |
| c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD,
| |
| type the drive letter and directory name in the field provided.
| |
| For example:
| |
| e:\winsetup
| |
| where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where \winsetup
| |
| is the directory that contains the Windows files.
| |
| d. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and
| |
| press Enter.
| |
| e. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to
| |
| shut down and restart your computer. Click on OK or press
| |
| Enter.
| |
| f. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on
| |
| your screen.
| |
| Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
| |
| your Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
| |
| transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Example 4 259/3
| |
| | |
| Creating a Primary Partition for OS/2 and a Logical Drive for Data
| |
| The following example shows how to set up your hard disk to install OS/2 in one
| |
| partition and your data in another partition. It does not involve the
| |
| installation of the Boot Manager. You can use this setup if you are installing
| |
| on a computer that does not have DOS, Windows, or any other operating systems on
| |
| it, or if you want to replace all existing operating systems with OS/2.
| |
| In this example, an 80MB hard disk is replaced by:
| |
| o A 45MB primary partition in which OS/2 will be installed (drive C)
| |
| o A 35MB logical drive, which will be used to hold programs and data (drive
| |
| D)
| |
| Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, you can
| |
| customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
| |
| to be. Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
| |
| hard disk.
| |
| 1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use your
| |
| existing operating system to back up the data.)
| |
| 2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
| |
| from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
| |
| 3. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
| |
| press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
| |
| asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
| |
| 5. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
| |
| Then press Enter.
| |
| 6. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
| |
| specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
| |
| 7. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
| |
| continue with the installation.
| |
| 8. Delete the existing partition (which you have backed up):
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
| |
| b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| c. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
| |
| 9. Create the primary partition for OS/2:
| |
| a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
| |
| c. Type the size of the primary partition (in this example, 45) and
| |
| press Enter.
| |
| d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
| |
| e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
| |
| 10. Indicate that this partition should be used to install OS/2:
| |
| a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
| |
| c. Type a name for the partition (for example, OS/2), and press Enter.
| |
| 11. Create the logical drive for your data:
| |
| a. Highlight the Free Space line.
| |
| b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| c. Select Create partition and press Enter.
| |
| d. Accept the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 35 )
| |
| by pressing Enter.
| |
| Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
| |
| on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 35), you would also
| |
| have to indicate if you wanted to create the logical drive at the end
| |
| of free space or at the start of free space.
| |
| e. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
| |
| 12. Exit the FDISK screen:
| |
| a. Press F3.
| |
| b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.
| |
| 13. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove and insert diskettes.
| |
| 14. When the Welcome screen reappears, select Advanced Installation and press
| |
| Enter.
| |
| 15. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
| |
| Accept the drive, and press Enter. (In this example, the screen will show
| |
| drive C as the selected drive.)
| |
| 16. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
| |
| 2. Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
| |
| any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
| |
| 17. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system you
| |
| want to use for your OS/2 partition. (Refer to Selecting a File System.)
| |
| 18. When prompted to do so, remove and insert diskettes. After Diskette 6, you
| |
| will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette and then reinsert
| |
| Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the screen. After you remove
| |
| Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo screen, followed by
| |
| the System Configuration screen.
| |
| 19. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
| |
| hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
| |
| Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
| |
| If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
| |
| click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name. A screen
| |
| will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
| |
| hardware device. If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
| |
| refer to the documentation that came with it. If you need information
| |
| about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
| |
| display, refer to Video Procedures.
| |
| Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need more
| |
| information about any screen you see.
| |
| If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
| |
| OK.
| |
| A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
| |
| (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
| |
| program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
| |
| 20. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
| |
| or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
| |
| names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
| |
| o If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
| |
| PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
| |
| LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
| |
| o If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
| |
| PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
| |
| COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.
| |
| If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
| |
| install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
| |
| and Installation screen appears.
| |
| 21. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
| |
| 22. Click on Format on the pull-down menu. Then indicate which file system
| |
| you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold data (in
| |
| this example, the logical drive is drive D). Refer to Selecting a File
| |
| System for an explanation of the file systems. Click on Format when you
| |
| are done.
| |
| 23. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.
| |
| 24. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
| |
| Setup and Installation screen. Click on Software configuration on the
| |
| menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
| |
| during Installation for more information.
| |
| 25. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
| |
| features you want to install. You will notice that some features have a
| |
| check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
| |
| The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
| |
| right of the feature.
| |
| Follow these steps:
| |
| a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
| |
| deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
| |
| b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
| |
| button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
| |
| c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
| |
| 26. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
| |
| want to select. Then click on OK.
| |
| 27. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. If you are installing
| |
| from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
| |
| including one or more Printer Driver diskettes. After inserting each
| |
| diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
| |
| 28. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
| |
| Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on the
| |
| screen; click on Help if you need more information.
| |
| 29. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
| |
| of the OS/2 installation.
| |
| 30. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
| |
| and restart your computer. Click on OK or press Enter.
| |
| 31. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
| |
| Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
| |
| your Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
| |
| transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Example 5 260/3
| |
| | |
| Creating One Primary Partition for OS/2
| |
| The following example shows how to set up your hard disk to install OS/2 in one
| |
| primary partition (drive C). It does not involve the installation of the Boot
| |
| Manager. You can use this setup if you want to reformat your existing hard disk
| |
| and replace all the information on the disk with OS/2. You can also use this
| |
| example if you want to reformat your hard disk with a different file system (for
| |
| example, you now want to use the FAT file system on a computer that was
| |
| previously formatted with the HPFS file system).
| |
| In this example, an 80MB hard disk is replaced by:
| |
| o An 80MB primary partition in which OS/2 will be installed (drive C)
| |
| Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, the size
| |
| of your hard disk may be different from the size of the disk used in this
| |
| example. Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
| |
| hard disk.
| |
| 1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use your
| |
| existing operating system to back up the data.)
| |
| 2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
| |
| from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
| |
| 3. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
| |
| press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
| |
| asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
| |
| 5. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
| |
| Then press Enter.
| |
| 6. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
| |
| specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
| |
| 7. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
| |
| continue with the installation.
| |
| 8. Delete existing partitions (which you have backed up):
| |
| a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
| |
| b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| c. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
| |
| d. Repeat steps a through c for all partitions you want to delete.
| |
| 9. Create the primary partition for OS/2:
| |
| a. Highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
| |
| b. From the Options menu, select Create partition and press Enter.
| |
| c. Accept the size of the partition (in this example, 80) by pressing
| |
| Enter.
| |
| d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
| |
| 10. Indicate that this partition should be used to install OS/2:
| |
| a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
| |
| c. Type a name for the partition (for example, OS/2), and press Enter.
| |
| 11. Exit the FDISK screen:
| |
| a. Press F3.
| |
| b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.
| |
| 12. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove and insert diskettes.
| |
| 13. When the Welcome screen reappears, select Advanced Installation and press
| |
| Enter.
| |
| 14. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
| |
| Accept the drive, and press Enter. (In this example, the screen will show
| |
| drive C as the selected drive.)
| |
| 15. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
| |
| 2. Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
| |
| any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
| |
| 16. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system you
| |
| want to use for your OS/2 partition. (Refer to Selecting a File System.)
| |
| 17. When prompted to do so, remove and insert diskettes. After Diskette 6, you
| |
| will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette and then reinsert
| |
| Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the screen. After you remove
| |
| Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo screen, followed by
| |
| the System Configuration screen.
| |
| 18. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
| |
| hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
| |
| Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
| |
| If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
| |
| click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name. A screen
| |
| will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
| |
| hardware device. If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
| |
| refer to the documentation that came with it. If you need information
| |
| about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
| |
| display, refer to Video Procedures.
| |
| Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need more
| |
| information about any screen you see.
| |
| If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
| |
| OK.
| |
| A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
| |
| (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
| |
| program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
| |
| 19. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
| |
| or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
| |
| names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
| |
| o If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
| |
| PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
| |
| LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
| |
| o If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
| |
| PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
| |
| COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.
| |
| If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
| |
| install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
| |
| and Installation screen appears.
| |
| 20. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
| |
| Setup and Installation screen. Click on Software configuration on the
| |
| menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
| |
| during Installation for more information.
| |
| 21. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
| |
| features you want to install. You will notice that some features have a
| |
| check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
| |
| The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
| |
| right of the feature. Follow these steps:
| |
| a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
| |
| deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
| |
| b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
| |
| button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
| |
| c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
| |
| 22. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
| |
| want to select. Then click on OK.
| |
| 23. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. If you are installing
| |
| from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
| |
| including one or more Printer Driver diskettes. After inserting each
| |
| diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
| |
| 24. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
| |
| Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on the
| |
| screen; click on Help if you need more information.
| |
| 25. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
| |
| of the OS/2 installation.
| |
| 26. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
| |
| and restart your computer. Click on OK or press Enter.
| |
| 27. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
| |
| Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
| |
| your Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
| |
| transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Configuring Your Boot Manager Menu 261/2+
| |
| | |
| After installing OS/2 (and the Boot Manager), you can go back and make changes
| |
| to the Boot Manager menu, such as how long the menu should be displayed and how
| |
| information on the menu should appear. To do so, follow these steps:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
| |
| 2. Open Drive.
| |
| 3. Press mouse button 2 to display a pop-up menu.
| |
| 4. Select Create partition.
| |
| 5. At the Fixed Disk Utility screen, make any changes you want to the
| |
| setting. Select Help if you need more information.
| |
| | |
| Setting the Menu Display Time 262/3
| |
| | |
| To indicate how long you want the Boot Manager startup menu displayed when you
| |
| start your system, follow these steps:
| |
| 1. From the Startup Values menu, you can do one of the following:
| |
| o If you want the menu displayed for a certain period of time before
| |
| the default operating system starts, accept the value of Yes.
| |
| o If you want the menu to be displayed indefinitely (until you
| |
| explicitly select a choice from the menu), highlight Timer and press
| |
| Enter to change the value to No.
| |
| 2. If you accepted the value of Yes, indicate how long you want the menu
| |
| displayed before the default operating system is started. You can do one
| |
| of the following:
| |
| o Accept the value listed next to Timeout.
| |
| o Change the value as follows:
| |
| a. Select Timeout and press Enter.
| |
| b. Type the amount of time (in seconds) that you want the menu
| |
| displayed before the preselected operating system is
| |
| automatically started.
| |
| c. Press Enter.
| |
| | |
| Setting the Menu Mode 263/3
| |
| | |
| You can select either Normal or Advanced for the Boot Manager menu mode. If you
| |
| select Advanced, your Boot Manager menu will include additional information
| |
| about your partitions.
| |
| To change the mode that is currently displayed, follow these steps:
| |
| 1. Highlight Mode on the Startup Values menu.
| |
| 2. Press Enter.
| |
| When you have finished configuring your Boot Manager menu, press F3.
| |
| | |
| Bypassing the Boot Manager Menu 264/2
| |
| | |
| After the Boot Manager is installed, you can use the SETBOOT command if you want
| |
| to restart your computer to a specified drive without going through the Boot
| |
| Manager menu. The SETBOOT command immediately restarts the system.
| |
| The parameter for SETBOOT is /IBD:drive, where drive is the letter of a
| |
| startable partition. For example, from the OS/2 command prompt, you can type:
| |
| setboot /ibd:e
| |
| to restart your system and start the operating system using drive E, without
| |
| displaying the Boot Manager menu.
| |
| See the Command Reference for more information about the SETBOOT command. (The
| |
| Command Reference is located in the Information folder on your OS/2 Desktop.)
| |
| | |
| What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation 265/2
| |
| | |
| The installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most
| |
| cases, you will not encounter any problems. However, if you do have problems
| |
| either during the installation process or immediately afterwards, refer to
| |
| Solving Installation Problems.
| |
| Problems you might encounter include:
| |
| o A blank screen after installation.
| |
| o An error message with a number and, sometimes, text.
| |
| o A hardware device that does not work. (This problem can occur if you are
| |
| using hardware that is not supported by OS/2.)
| |
| | |
| Using a Response File to Install OS/2 266/2+
| |
| | |
| This section describes how to use a response file to install OS/2. It is
| |
| intended primarily for people who will be setting up workstations for others to
| |
| use.
| |
| | |
| Understanding Response File Installation 267/3
| |
| | |
| If you have installed previous versions of OS/2 or other operating systems, you
| |
| are familiar with installation procedures that require you to insert and remove
| |
| a series of diskettes and answer screen prompts. When you use a response file
| |
| to install, it is not necessary to answer any screen prompts. All the answers
| |
| are in a response file that you place on installation Diskette 1 The
| |
| Installation program reads the file from Diskette 1instead of prompting you for
| |
| the installation information.
| |
| | |
| Adding the Sample Response File to Your System 268/3+
| |
| | |
| A sample response file is included on the OS/2 installation diskettes. When you
| |
| install the operating system, this response file (called SAMPLE.RSP) is placed
| |
| in the OS2\INSTALL directory.
| |
| The SAMPLE.RSP file and other files needed for a response file installation are
| |
| not automatically installed on your system if you installed OS/2 using the Easy
| |
| Installation method. You must add these files to your system in order to use
| |
| them. Follow these steps:
| |
| 1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
| |
| 2. Open System Setup.
| |
| 3. Open Selective Install. The Software Configuration screen appears.
| |
| 4. Select Optional System Utilities.
| |
| 5. Select the More push button to the right of Optional System Utilities. A
| |
| window appears with a list of utilities.
| |
| 6. Place a check mark next to Installation Utilities; then select Install.
| |
| 7. When prompted to do so, insert the requested installation diskettes.
| |
| Select OK when you are done.
| |
| | |
| Modifying the Sample Response File 269/4
| |
| | |
| After you install the SAMPLE.RSP file on your own system, you can modify the
| |
| SAMPLE.RSP file and use it to install OS/2 on another workstation. Use an
| |
| editor (such as the System Editor) to modify the sample response file.
| |
| The following is an excerpt from the sample response file:
| |
| *************************************
| |
| *AlternateAdapter
| |
| *;
| |
| * Specifies secondary adapter for two display systems.
| |
| * This should be a lower or equal resolution display since
| |
| * the highest resolution display will be primary for PM.
| |
| *
| |
| * Valid Parms
| |
| *
| |
| * 0=None (DEFAULT)
| |
| * 1=Other than following (DDINSTAL will handle)
| |
| * 2=Monochrome /Printer Adapter
| |
| * 3=Color Graphics Adapter
| |
| * 4=Enhanced Graphics Adapter
| |
| * 5=PS/2 Display Adapter
| |
| * 6=Video Graphics Adapter
| |
| * 7=8514/A Adapter
| |
| * 8=XGA Adapter
| |
| * 9=SVGA Adapter
| |
| *************************************
| |
| AlternateAdapter=0
| |
| | |
| Copying the Response File to Diskette 1 270/3
| |
| | |
| Use the following steps to make changes to the sample response file. After
| |
| making the changes, you will copy the file to a copy of Diskette 1. You must
| |
| also make some modifications to the copy of Diskette 1to make room on it for the
| |
| response file.
| |
| 1. Install OS/2 on a computer.
| |
| 2. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
| |
| 3. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 4. Open OS/2 Window.
| |
| 5. Insert Diskette 1into drive A.
| |
| 6. Type diskcopy a: a: and press Enter.
| |
| 7. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert a blank,
| |
| formatted diskette. (This diskette will be used to make a copy of
| |
| Diskette 1)
| |
| 8. Make sure the copy of Diskette 1is in drive A. Then type del a:\mouse.sys
| |
| and press Enter.
| |
| 9. Type del a:\sysinst2.exe and press Enter.
| |
| 10. If you are installing from a CD, this step is not necessary; go to step
| |
| 10. If you are installing from diskettes, type del a:\bundle and press
| |
| Enter.
| |
| 11. To edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the copy of Diskette 1 type e a:\config.sys
| |
| and press Enter.
| |
| 12. Change the following statement from:
| |
| SET OS2_SHELL=SYSINST2.EXE to the following:
| |
| SET OS2_SHELL=RSPINST.EXE A:\OS2SE30.RS P
| |
| 13. Delete the following statement from the CONFIG.SYS file:
| |
| DEVICE=MOUSE.SYS
| |
| 14. Save and close the CONFIG.SYS file. At the prompt, type the following and
| |
| press Enter after each command:
| |
| CD\OS2\INSTALL
| |
| COPY SAMPLE.RSP OS2SE30.RSP
| |
| 15. Use an editor (such as the System Editor) to make your changes to the
| |
| response file so you can use it for installing OS/2. Then save and close
| |
| the file.
| |
| 16. At the prompt, type the following and press Enter after each command:
| |
| COPY OS2SE30.RSP A:
| |
| COPY C:\RSPINST.EXE A:\
| |
| 17. Remove the copy of Diskette 1from drive A.
| |
| 18. If you have a non-Micro Channel computer, go to step 20. f you have a
| |
| Micro Channel computer and the Reference Diskette contains ABIOS.SYS and
| |
| *.BIO files, you will also need to modify the Installation Diskette that
| |
| came with OS/2. Follow these steps:
| |
| a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
| |
| b. Type diskcopy a: a: and press Enter.
| |
| c. When prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette from drive A
| |
| and insert a blank, formatted diskette. Then press Enter. This makes
| |
| a copy of the Installation Diskette, which you will use in the next
| |
| step.
| |
| d. Make sure the copy you just made of the Installation Diskette is in
| |
| drive A. Type the following and press Enter after each command:
| |
| DEL A:\*.BIO
| |
| DEL A:\ABIOS.SYS
| |
| e. Remove the copy of the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert
| |
| the Reference Diskette.
| |
| f. Type the following and press Enter after each command:
| |
| COPY A:\*.BIO C:\
| |
| COPY A:\ABIOS.SYS C:\
| |
| g. Remove the Reference Diskette from drive A and insert the copy of the
| |
| Installation Diskette. Type the following and press Enter after each
| |
| command:
| |
| COPY C:\*.BIO A:\
| |
| COPY C:\ABIOS.SYS A:\
| |
| Note: This Installation Diskette copy is now system-specific. You
| |
| will need to create a modified Installation Diskette for each type of
| |
| system on which you are installing OS/2.
| |
| h. Use this copy of the Installation Diskette during the installation
| |
| process.
| |
| 19. When prompted for Diskette 1during the installation, insert the modified
| |
| copy you made of Diskette 1and press Enter.
| |
| From this point on, the Installation program will prompt only for the
| |
| insertion of diskettes. No other installation actions are necessary.
| |
| 20. When prompted to insert Diskette 1again, insert the original Diskette
| |
| 1into drive A.
| |
| Response files can be used to install the same set of options on multiple
| |
| workstations. However, be sure that the workstations are set up with the same
| |
| set of options and hardware.
| |
| | |
| Installing OS/2 from a Local Area Network Source 271/2
| |
| | |
| You can use a response file to direct the installation from a source other than
| |
| a diskette in drive A. For example, in a local area network (LAN), you could
| |
| direct the installation to a drive on the server. This type of installation
| |
| requires additional software (such as a LAN support product).
| |
| Be aware of the following requirements for remote installation of OS/2:
| |
| o The RAM requirements vary from 6MB to 10MB or more, depending on the
| |
| installation variables.
| |
| - Redirected remote installation requires more RAM than disk
| |
| installation because the SWAPPER.DAT file is not active.
| |
| - If you are doing a redirected remote installation without CID
| |
| (configuration, installation, and distribution), you need only about
| |
| 6MB of RAM.
| |
| - If you are using CID, the RAM requirements usually range from 6MB to
| |
| 8MB.
| |
| - If you are using a process on top of CID, such as NVDM/2, 8MB to 10MB
| |
| (or more) might be required. The main variable with CID is the size
| |
| of the REXX procedure and which dynamic link libraries it pulls in.
| |
| With remote installation, the LAN connection utility programs are the
| |
| main variables. The version of OS/2 that you are installing is
| |
| another variable.
| |
| o During remote installation, the SWAPPER.DAT file is not active because the
| |
| disk partition containing the active swapper file cannot be formatted
| |
| during installation. The SWAPPER.DAT file can be made active, but the
| |
| disk partition has to be a local partition and it has to be preformatted.
| |
| To activate the SWAPPER.DAT file, you must edit the CONFIG.SYS file. To do
| |
| this, replace the existing MEMMAN=NOSWAP statement with the following:
| |
| MEMMAN=SWAP,PROTECT
| |
| SWAPPATH=D:\ 2048 4096
| |
| o Personal computers might require more RAM because the network drivers
| |
| might have to store more data in the RAM buffers until the processor is
| |
| able to handle the data.
| |
| For more information, refer to the following IBM publications:
| |
| OS/2 Version 2.1 Remote Installation and Maintenance
| |
| (GG24-3780)
| |
| NTS/2 Redirected Installation and Configuration Guide (S96F-8488)
| |
| NTS/2 LAN Adapter and Protocol Support Configuration Guide (S96F-8489)
| |
| Automated Installation for CID-Enabled OS/2 2.x (GG24-3783)
| |
| Automated Installation for CID-Enabled Extended Services, LAN Server V3.0
| |
| and Network Transport Services/2 (GG24-3781)
| |
| | |
| Setting Up Your Hard Disk 272/1+
| |
| | |
| This chapter provides a detailed explanation of the Boot Manager feature
| |
| available in OS/2, as well as information about hard disk partitioning and the
| |
| FDISK utility program. This chapter will help you plan the setup of your hard
| |
| disk before you begin installing OS/2.
| |
| In addition, this chapter provides detailed descriptions of some of the
| |
| installation tasks that are outlined in Using Advanced Installation. If you want
| |
| more information about an Advanced Installation task as you are installing,
| |
| refer to the descriptions in this chapter.
| |
| | |
| What Is the Boot Manager? 273/2
| |
| | |
| When you install multiple operating systems on your computer, you can use the
| |
| Boot Manager feature to manage the selective startup of those systems. The Boot
| |
| Manager startup menu lets you select which operating system you want to be
| |
| active each time you start your system.
| |
| The following is an example of what the Boot Manager startup menu would look
| |
| like if you installed the Boot Manager and three operating systems. This menu
| |
| would be displayed each time you started your computer, so that you could select
| |
| which operating system should start.
| |
| You use the FDISK utility program during the installation of OS/2 to install the
| |
| Boot Manager feature. FDISK is a program supplied with OS/2 that can be used to
| |
| manage such tasks as creating and deleting the partitions on your hard disk.
| |
| Partitions are divisions you create on your hard disk to use as separate storage
| |
| areas.
| |
| The following is a brief list of the steps you follow to set up your hard disk
| |
| for multiple operating systems.
| |
| o You install the Boot Manager in its own partition (usually 1MB in size).
| |
| o You then create partitions for any operating systems (including OS/2) you
| |
| are going to install.
| |
| o Next, you install the other operating systems in the partitions
| |
| you created for them.
| |
| (If you want OS/2 to work with DOS and Windows, you must install DOS and
| |
| Windows first. Otherwise, most operating systems can be installed after
| |
| installing OS/2.)
| |
| o Finally, you install the OS/2 operating system.
| |
| | |
| Hard Disk Partitioning 274/2+
| |
| | |
| A hard disk can be partitioned in several different ways. For example, your hard
| |
| disk can have one partition that takes up the entire hard disk. However, if you
| |
| are going to install multiple operating systems on your hard disk (and install
| |
| the Boot Manager feature), you must separate the hard disk into multiple
| |
| partitions.
| |
| During the Advanced installation, you will be asked how you want your partitions
| |
| set up. The default choice is to set up one partition (if you are installing on
| |
| a hard disk with no data) or to preserve the setup of an existing hard disk. If
| |
| you choose to specify your own partition, the FDISK screen is displayed.
| |
| From the FDISK screen, you specify the number and type of partitions that you
| |
| want created. Your hard disk can be separated into a maximum of four primary
| |
| partitions. You can create primary partitions, which are typically used for
| |
| operating systems.
| |
| Note: If a partition is going to contain an operating system, the partition
| |
| must be within the first 1024 cylinders.
| |
| You can also create logical drives in an area of the hard disk that is outside
| |
| the primary partitions. This area is known as the extended partition. The
| |
| logical drives within the extended partition are typically used to hold programs
| |
| and data.
| |
| You can have four primary partitions or three primary partitions and one
| |
| extended partition. If you are going to install multiple operating systems on
| |
| your hard disk, you must create one primary partition to contain the programs
| |
| that manage the startup of multiple operating systems. (This partition is
| |
| referred to as the Boot Manager partition.)
| |
| After the Boot Manager partition is created, you can create up to three
| |
| additional primary partitions (to hold three operating systems).
| |
| An important aspect of primary partitions is the fact that, at any moment in
| |
| time, only one of the primary partitions is active. When a given primary
| |
| partition is active, any other primary partitions on the same physical disk
| |
| cannot be accessed. Therefore, the operating system in one primary partition
| |
| cannot access the data in another primary partition on the same physical disk.
| |
| Another way of subdividing your hard disk is to create logical drives within an
| |
| extended partition. Logical drives are typically used to hold programs and data.
| |
| However, you can also install OS/2 in a logical drive.
| |
| The extended partition takes the place of one of the primary partitions on your
| |
| hard disk. In other words, if you create logical drives within an extended
| |
| partition, your hard disk can contain only three primary partitions.
| |
| If two logical drives have been set aside for data. That data can be shared by
| |
| all the operating systems (provided the file system formats of the logical
| |
| drives are compatible with the operating systems).
| |
| All of the logical drives exist within one partition-the extended partition.
| |
| You don't explicitly create the extended partition. The extended partition is
| |
| created the first time you create a logical (non-primary) drive.
| |
| One of the differences between a logical drive and a primary partition is that
| |
| each logical drive is assigned a unique drive letter. However, all primary
| |
| partitions on a hard disk share the same drive letter. (On the first hard disk
| |
| in your system, the primary partitions share drive C). This means that only one
| |
| primary partition on a hard disk can be accessed at one time. (Note that the
| |
| Boot Manager partition is different from other primary partitions because it is
| |
| never assigned a drive letter.)
| |
| If you want OS/2 to be able to access the data in the partition of another
| |
| operating system (for example, the DOS partition), install OS/2 in a logical
| |
| drive.
| |
| Notice the drive letter assignments in this illustration. The operating system
| |
| that is active when you start the system performs a process known as drive
| |
| mapping, in which partitions and logical drives are assigned drive letters. All
| |
| the primary partitions are mapped first and all logical drives within extended
| |
| partitions are assigned subsequent drive letters (up through Z).
| |
| Important: Only one primary partition per hard disk can be active at a time.
| |
| So, only one primary partition is actually assigned the letter C at any one
| |
| time. The other primary partitions are not mapped.
| |
| An operating system maps only those drives with a format type that it supports.
| |
| For example, DOS does not support the installable file system (IFS) format.
| |
| (The High Performance File System is an example of an IFS format.) Therefore,
| |
| any partition or logical drive that is formatted with IFS is not mapped by DOS
| |
| and is not assigned a drive letter.
| |
| In the following figure, DOS is active in a primary partition. (The other
| |
| primary partitions are not mapped.) Drive D is formatted for the File
| |
| Allocation Table (FAT) file system, which DOS recognizes. However, the next
| |
| drive is formatted with a file system that DOS does not recognize. Therefore,
| |
| DOS ignores this drive. Some versions of DOS (such as DOS Version 5.0) will
| |
| recognize the last partition on the hard disk (in this example) and assign it
| |
| the letter E. In other versions of DOS, no drives beyond the HPFS drive are
| |
| recognized. Therefore, no data in those partitions can be used by DOS.
| |
| Because of the problems that can result when drives are remapped, you should
| |
| avoid deleting logical drives that exist in the middle of your hard disk. For
| |
| example, if you were to delete a logical drive from the middle of your disk, the
| |
| subsequent drives would be remapped. (Drive F would become drive E, and so on.)
| |
| Problems would result if any programs refer to the former drive letter.
| |
| The important thing to remember when you are setting up your system is that only
| |
| one primary partition can be accessible (active) on each hard disk at any system
| |
| startup. On the other hand, all the logical drives within the extended partition
| |
| are accessible (provided their file system formats are compatible with the
| |
| starting operating system). For example, suppose you had DOS 5.0 in one primary
| |
| partition and OS/2 in another primary partition. One of your logical drives is
| |
| formatted for FAT and contains a variety of DOS programs. You could start the
| |
| DOS programs from either of the primary partitions.
| |
| It is also important to understand what happens to the drive mapping if you add
| |
| a hard disk after you install OS/2. The logical drives on your existing hard
| |
| disk will be remapped if your second hard disk has a primary partition on it.
| |
| Now, assume that you add a second hard disk to your system. The primary
| |
| partition of that second hard disk will be assigned D. The logical drives of
| |
| your first hard disk will be remapped. The existing logical drive D becomes E,
| |
| E becomes F, and so forth.
| |
| Because OS/2 is now in the logical drive assigned as E, all references to the
| |
| drive letter (for example, statements in your CONFIG.SYS and INI files) will
| |
| have to change. For this reason, it is strongly recommended that you place only
| |
| logical drives on the hard disk that you are adding.
| |
| | |
| Planning for a Boot Manager Setup 275/3
| |
| | |
| When you are planning your Boot Manager setup, be aware of the following:
| |
| o Use primary partitions for DOS systems or versions of the OS/2 operating
| |
| system prior to 2.0.
| |
| o To prevent the loss of usable disk space, create all primary partitions
| |
| contiguously, at the beginning or end of the disk free space area.
| |
| o Put all installable file systems (such as the High Performance File
| |
| System) at the end of the disk configuration.
| |
| o Be aware of specific operating-system restrictions on the hard disk . For
| |
| example, to run properly, DOS 3.3 must be installed in a primary partition
| |
| that is within the first 32MB of the hard disk.
| |
| o If you are installing a primary partition for DOS and you intend to load
| |
| that version of DOS into a DOS session of OS/2, you will need to change
| |
| the DOS CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files. (You do this after you finish
| |
| installing the operating systems.) Refer to specific DOS version in the
| |
| starting topic of the Master Help Index. (The Master Help Index is
| |
| displayed on your screen after the OS/2 operating system is installed.)
| |
| o You can install both DOS and a version of the OS/2 operating system in the
| |
| same primary partition if you want to use the Dual Boot feature within
| |
| your Boot Manager setup. However, if DOS and OS/2 1.3 are in the primary
| |
| partition, you will have to copy the BOOT.COM file from the OS/2 partition
| |
| to the primary partition after you install OS/2.
| |
| o If you are using the IBM DOS 5.00 Upgrade to update your DOS 3.3 or DOS
| |
| 4.0 system, you should be aware that some versions of the upgrade will not
| |
| recognize the DOS partition unless it is the only partition on the hard
| |
| disk. You might have to do the following:
| |
| 1. Make sure that the DOS partition is the only primary partition on
| |
| your hard disk.
| |
| 2. Install the DOS 5.00 Upgrade.
| |
| 3. Add the Boot Manager partition and install OS/2.
| |
| o If you have a system with a VESA SUPER I/O controller and two disk drives,
| |
| the system will not start DOS from the Boot Manager menu. Instead, it
| |
| will display a non-system disk or disk error message. For more
| |
| information on this message, check the VESA controller documentation or
| |
| contact the manufacturer.
| |
| | |
| The FDISK Utility Program 276/2+
| |
| | |
| When you install OS/2 with the Advanced Installation method, yo u use
| |
| the FDISK utility program to install the Boot Manager feature and to set up the
| |
| partitions on your hard disk. During Advanced Installation, the FDISK screen
| |
| appears so that you can see how the partitions are currently set up on your
| |
| system.
| |
| | |
| The Options Menu 277/3
| |
| | |
| When you press the Enter key from the FDISK screen, the Options menu appears.
| |
| The following list describes each of the choices on the Options menu. Some of
| |
| the choices are available only under certain conditions. (They appear in black
| |
| on the menu.) If you try to select an unavailable choice, the system will
| |
| respond with a warning beep.
| |
| Install Boot Manager This choice is used only once--when you create the
| |
| partition for the Boot Manager. It is unavailable thereafter.
| |
| Create partition This choice is used to create primary partitions and logical
| |
| drives within the extended partition. You can use this choice whenever free
| |
| space is available on the hard disk.
| |
| Add to Boot Manager menu This choice is used to add the name of a partition or
| |
| logical drive to the Boot Manager startup menu. You should use this choice for
| |
| any operating system that you want to be able to select when you start the
| |
| system. When you select this choice, the New Name window is displayed. You use
| |
| the New Name window to assign a meaningful name to the partition or logical
| |
| drive.
| |
| Change partition name This choice is used to change the name that you have
| |
| previously assigned to a partition or logical drive.
| |
| Assign C: partition This choice is used to specify which primary partition you
| |
| want to be active (when more than one primary partition is installed on your
| |
| system). The placement of the drive letter (C) tells you which primary
| |
| partition will be visible (or accessible) after you restart the system.
| |
| Set startup values This choice is used to specify the actions of the Boot
| |
| Manager startup menu. For example, with Set startup values, you can specify
| |
| how long you want the Boot Manager menu to be displayed before the default
| |
| operating system is started. You can also specify which operating system you
| |
| want as the default.
| |
| Remove from Boot Manager menu This choice is used to delete a name from the
| |
| Boot Manager startup menu. When you delete the name, you can no longer select
| |
| the operating system associated with that name from the Boot Manager startup
| |
| menu.
| |
| Delete partition This choice is used to delete information about a primary
| |
| partition or logical drive. After you exit from FDISK, all the data in the
| |
| partition or logical drive is deleted. (If you want to save any of the data in
| |
| a partition, be sure to back up the data be fore deleting the partition.)
| |
| Set installable This choice is used to mark a partition or logical drive as the
| |
| target for installation. For example, during the installation of OS/2, you set
| |
| one primary partition (or logical drive) as installable. (This partition or
| |
| drive is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
| |
| After you install the operating system, the status of this partition will
| |
| change from Installable to Bootable.
| |
| If you use FDISK after the OS/2 installation (in preparation for installing
| |
| other operating systems), you can mark only primary partitions on the first
| |
| hard disk as installable.
| |
| Any partition that is set installable must reside within the first 1024
| |
| cylinders of the hard disk. In addition, if you have more than two hard disk
| |
| drives, be aware that some adapter manufacturers support the booting of
| |
| partitions on the first two hard disk drives only.
| |
| Also note that some SCSI drives that use removable media cannot be partitioned.
| |
| Make startable This choice is used to determine which primary partition is
| |
| activated when you start your system. When you install the Boot Manager, it is
| |
| automatically marked as Startable. This means that the Boot Manager is in
| |
| control when you start your system. Only one primary partition on the first
| |
| hard disk can be made startable. If you set any other primary partition
| |
| startable, the Boot Manager startup menu will not appear when you start the
| |
| system.
| |
| | |
| Creating a Boot Manager Setup 278/2+
| |
| | |
| The following sections describe in detail how to delete and create partitions,
| |
| how and why to make selections from the Options menu, and how to specify options
| |
| for how the Boot Manager will start up. Using Advanced Installation provides
| |
| quick procedures you can follow to perform these actions. You can refer to the
| |
| sections here if you need more detailed information.
| |
| | |
| Deleting Existing Partitions 279/3
| |
| | |
| To set up your system for installation, you must make sure there is enough room
| |
| on your hard disk to accommodate the desired partitions. If you use the Advanced
| |
| Installation method to install OS/2,
| |
| it might be necessary for you to delete some or
| |
| all of the existing partitions on your hard disk.
| |
| For example, if your hard disk currently has only one partition that takes up
| |
| the entire hard disk and you want to put OS/2 in its own partition, you must
| |
| delete the existing partition. However, if your hard disk has ample free space
| |
| for OS/2, you can keep one or more existing partitions and add to them.
| |
| Important: All information you want to save must be backed up. Changing the
| |
| size of a partition deletes all information in that partition, and the entire
| |
| operating system must be reinstalled when the new partition is created.
| |
| To delete an existing partition, you would follow these steps:
| |
| 1. On the FDISK screen, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight the
| |
| partition you want to delete.
| |
| 2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| 3. Select Delete partition and press Enter. The information about that
| |
| partition is deleted, and the words Free Space appear in the space
| |
| formerly occupied by the partition information.
| |
| 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for any other partitions you want to delete.
| |
| After deleting the partitions on your hard disk, you must create the Boot
| |
| Manager partition.
| |
| | |
| Creating the Boot Manager Partition 280/3
| |
| | |
| During the Advanced Installation method, you must create a Boot Manager
| |
| partition. To create this partition, follow these steps:
| |
| 1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted on the FDISK screen.
| |
| If it is not, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight it.
| |
| 2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| 3. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
| |
| 4. Specify whether the Boot Manager partition should be at the beginning or
| |
| at the end of the available free space on the hard disk.
| |
| Note: The only restriction on the placement of the Boot Manager partition
| |
| is that it be within the first 1024 cylinders of the first hard disk.
| |
| Typically, the first 1024 cylinders is equal to 1GB (gigabyte), or 1024MB.
| |
| After creating the Boot Manager partition, you can create any other partitions
| |
| you need to install OS/2 and the other operating systems you want to use on
| |
| your computer.
| |
| | |
| Creating Partitions for Other Operating Systems 281/3+
| |
| | |
| After you create the partition for the Boot Manager, you create primary
| |
| partitions for any DOS or Windows versions or previous versions of OS/2 that you
| |
| are going to install. At this time, you can also create any logical drives for
| |
| data or programs or to install OS/2.
| |
| Consider the following before you begin creating the partitions:
| |
| o If you prefer, and if you have sufficient free space on the hard disk, you
| |
| can leave existing partitions intact until you have completely transferred
| |
| data processing operations to OS/2.
| |
| o You can install OS/2 in its own partition and place your programs and data
| |
| in a separate logical drive. This arrangement makes it easier to back up
| |
| those programs and data.
| |
| o If multiple types of file systems are needed, determine if you want them
| |
| in a separate partition or placed on a logical drive.
| |
| o When determining how much space to allocate for the OS/2 partition,
| |
| consider some of the tools and applications you will be installing and
| |
| whether you want to install them in the OS/2 partition or on another
| |
| logical drive. For example, if you want to install the OS/2 Toolkit, you
| |
| can install it on a separate logical drive instead of the default
| |
| partition used for OS/2.
| |
| o Allow enough room in your OS/2 partition for the growth of a swap file. A
| |
| swap file contains segments of a program
| |
| or data temporarily
| |
| moved out of main storage. The swap file (SWAPPER.DAT) requires at least
| |
| 2MB of hard disk space but might require much more. You can include this
| |
| space in your OS/2 partition, or you can set up a logical drive for the
| |
| swap file.
| |
| o Some operating systems, such as AIX*, require that their own disk utility
| |
| program create the installation partition. The OS/2 FDISK utility program
| |
| cannot create the partition for these operating systems. If you are going
| |
| to install AIX, make sure you leave sufficient free space for it on the
| |
| hard disk.
| |
| o If you have applications that require other operating systems, such as
| |
| AIX, check the amount of storage space recommended by the supplier.
| |
| To create partitions and logical drives for your other operating systems and
| |
| for your programs and data, follow these steps:
| |
| 1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted on the FDISK screen.
| |
| If it is not, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight it.
| |
| 2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| 3. Select Create partition and press Enter.
| |
| 4. Type the size (in MB) of the partition you are creating. Use the
| |
| following table to help you determine a minimum size for the partition.
| |
| For specific information about partition sizes, refer to the
| |
| documentation
| |
| that came with the product you will be installing.
| |
| place=inline width=column frame=box id=dpart rules=horiz hdframe=rules
| |
| hp='2 0 0
| |
| 0' split=yes expand.
| |
| ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
| |
| ?
| |
| 3 Planning Table for Partition Sizes
| |
| 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
| |
| 4
| |
| 3 CONTENTS 3 SIZE 3 HARD DISK CONSIDERATIONS
| |
| 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
| |
| 4
| |
| 3 DOS 3.3 3 2MB 3 Must be in a primary partition within the first
| |
| 32MB 3
| |
| 3 3 3 on the first hard disk.
| |
| 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
| |
| 4
| |
| 3 DOS 4.0 3 3MB 3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
| |
| disk. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
| |
| 4
| |
| 3 DOS 5.0 3 4MB 3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
| |
| disk. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
| |
| 4
| |
| 3 DOS 6.x 3 8MB 3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
| |
| disk. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
| |
| 4
| |
| 3 OS/2 1.x 3 20MB 3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
| |
| disk. 3
| |
| 3 SE 3 3 Installs in less than 20MB, but segment swapping
| |
| is 3
| |
| 3 3 3 inhibited.
| |
| 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
| |
| 4
| |
| 3 OS/2 1.x 3 30MB 3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
| |
| disk. 3
| |
| 3 EE 3 3 Installs in less than 30MB with reduced function.
| |
| 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
| |
| 4
| |
| 3 OS/2 2.0 3 15-33MB 3 Can be in a primary partition or logical drive.
| |
| If 3
| |
| 3 3 3 you choose a minimum size for the partition, you
| |
| might 3
| |
| 3 3 3 want to place the swap file on another partition.
| |
| 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
| |
| 4
| |
| 3 OS/2 2.1 3 20-40MB 3 OS/2 2.1 can be in a primary partition or logical
| |
| 3
| |
| 3 3 (Plus 3 drive. If you choose a minimum size for the
| |
| parti- 3
| |
| 3 3 10MB for 3 tion, you might want to place the swap file on
| |
| another 3
| |
| 3 3 swap 3 partition.
| |
| 3
| |
| 3 3 file and 3
| |
| 3
| |
| 3 3 5MB for 3 If you want to install all the features and you
| |
| want 3
| |
| 3 3 multi- 3 the swap file in the same partition, consider
| |
| making 3
| |
| 3 3 media) 3 the OS/2 partition larger.
| |
| 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
| |
| 4
| |
| 3 OS/2 3 25-45MB 3 OS/2 can be in a primary partition or logical
| |
| drive. 3
| |
| 3 Version 3 (Plus 3 If you choose a minimum size for the partition,
| |
| you 3
| |
| 3 3 3 10MB for 3 might want to place the swap file on another
| |
| parti- 3
| |
| 3 3 swap 3 tion.
| |
| 3
| |
| 3 3 file and 3
| |
| 3
| |
| 3 3 10MB for 3 If you want to install all the features and you
| |
| want 3
| |
| 3 3 multi- 3 the swap file in the same partition, consider
| |
| making 3
| |
| 3 3 media) 3 the OS/2 partition larger.
| |
| 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
| |
| 4
| |
| 3 AIX 3 3 Partition size determined and built by AIX Disk
| |
| 3
| |
| 3 3 3 utility program. Partition is created at the end
| |
| of 3
| |
| 3 3 3 the hard disk.
| |
| 3
| |
| @DDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
| |
| Y
| |
| Place system tools or common applications in a logical drive within the
| |
| extended partition so that the data can be shared among the operating
| |
| systems.
| |
| 5. Specify whether this is a primary partition or a logical drive within the
| |
| extended partition. Consider the following:
| |
| o All versions of DOS must reside in primary partitions on the first
| |
| hard disk. Versions of OS/2 before 2.0 must also reside in primary
| |
| partitions. (Remember that primary partitions cannot share data.)
| |
| o Logical drives within an extended partition are shareable. This
| |
| means that any data installed in the logical drive can be used by an
| |
| operating system running from any other active logical drive on the
| |
| system, if the file system formats are compatible.
| |
| 6. Specify the location of the partition or logical drive you want to create.
| |
| Select either Create at Start of Free Space or Create at End of Free
| |
| Space. Note that the logical drives cannot be intermixed with primary
| |
| partitions.
| |
| Note: This option is not available when the amount of free space equals
| |
| the size of the request.
| |
| When you have set up the partition, you use the Options menu choices to specify
| |
| information about the partition.
| |
| | |
| Specifying Options for the New Partition 282/4
| |
| | |
| To specify options for the partition you just created, use the following
| |
| procedure. Refer to The Options Menu for detailed explanations of the choices on
| |
| the Options menu.
| |
| 1. From the FDISK screen, Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| 2. Select Add to Boot Manager menu if you want this partition displayed on
| |
| the Boot Manager startup menu. If you do not select this choice for the
| |
| partition, you cannot select the operating system that exists in this
| |
| partition from the menu at startup time.
| |
| 3. If you selected Add to Boot Manager menu, you see the window in which you
| |
| are asked to type a name for the partition. Type the name, and then press
| |
| Enter.
| |
| If you have additional partitions to set up, follow the instructions outlined
| |
| in Creating Partitions for Other Operating Systems. Otherwise, continue to
| |
| Creating the Partition for OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Creating the Partition for OS/2 283/3
| |
| | |
| After you have created the partitions for the Boot Manager and for each of the
| |
| other operating systems you plan to install, create the partition or logical
| |
| drive in which you will install OS/2 OS/2 can be installed in either a primary
| |
| partition or a logical drive within the extended partition.
| |
| Remember that some operating systems, such as AIX, use their own disk utility
| |
| program to set up partitions. The partitions for such operating systems are
| |
| created when you actually install the operating systems. You must leave
| |
| sufficient space on the hard disk to accommodate these operating systems.
| |
| To create the partition or logical drive for OS/2, follow these steps:
| |
| 1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted. If it is not, press the
| |
| Up Arrow ( ) or Down Arrow ( ) key to highlight it.
| |
| 2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| 3. Select Create partition and press Enter.
| |
| 4. Type the size (in MB) of the partition or logical drive you are creating.
| |
| Note that the size of the swap file is based on the size of installed
| |
| memory. The less memory you have, the larger the swap file. Thus, if your
| |
| computer has a small amount of memory, you will need a larger partition.
| |
| (You can also place the swap file on another partition. To do this,
| |
| select Software configuration from the OS/2 Setup and Installation window
| |
| that appears during the Installation program. ) If you want to install all
| |
| features and you want the swap file on the same partition, consider making
| |
| the OS/2 partition large enough to accommodate all of those files.
| |
| 5. Specify whether this partition is a primary partition or a logical drive
| |
| within the extended partition.
| |
| If you have already marked three partitions as primary partitions, you
| |
| might want to select Extended Logical Drive for OS/2. Your hard disk can
| |
| be made up of a maximum of four primary partitions or three primary
| |
| partitions and multiple logical drives within one extended partition. So,
| |
| if you create a primary partition for OS/2 when three primary partitions
| |
| already exist, you cannot create any logical drives.
| |
| 6. Specify the location of the partition or logical drive you want to create.
| |
| Note: This option is not available when the amount of free space equals
| |
| the size of the request.
| |
| | |
| Specifying Options for the OS/2 Partition 284/3
| |
| | |
| During the Installation program, you can use the Options menu choices to specify
| |
| information about the OS/2 partition or logical drive:
| |
| 1. From the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| 2. Highlight Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
| |
| 3. Type the name you want to assign to this partition or logical drive, and
| |
| press Enter.
| |
| 4. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| 5. Highlight Set installable and press Enter.
| |
| You must select Set installable for this partition or logical drive. By
| |
| selecting Set installable, you indicate which partition or logical drive
| |
| should be used for OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Specifying the Default Operating System 285/3
| |
| | |
| After you create partitions for all of your operating systems, including OS/2,
| |
| you may specify which operating system should be started (by default) every time
| |
| you start your computer. Follow these steps:
| |
| 1. Highlight the line on the FDISK screen that contains the information for
| |
| the operating system you want preselected at startup time. For example,
| |
| if you want OS/2 to be the preselected choice on the Boot Manager startup
| |
| menu, highlight the OS/2 Version 3 line.
| |
| 2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
| |
| 3. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
| |
| 4. With Default highlighted, press Enter. Notice that the name of the
| |
| partition you chose is listed next to Default.
| |
| 5. Press F3.
| |
| If you want to set the timer for how long the Boot Manager menu should be
| |
| displayed and how information on the menu should appear, you can do so
| |
| during the installation of OS/2 or you can do so after installation. To
| |
| set the timer and display mode now, continue with the sections that
| |
| follow, "Setting the Menu Display Time" and "Setting the Menu Mode."
| |
| Otherwise, go to step 6.
| |
| 6. Press F3
| |
| | |
| Setting the Menu Display Time 286/3+
| |
| | |
| To indicate how long you want the Boot Manager startup menu displayed when you
| |
| start your system, follow these steps:
| |
| 1. From the Set startup values menu, you can do one of the following:
| |
| o If you want the menu displayed for a certain period of time before
| |
| the default operating system starts, accept the value of Yes.
| |
| o If you want the menu to be displayed indefinitely (until you
| |
| explicitly select a choice from the menu), highlight Timer and press
| |
| Enter to change the value to No.
| |
| 2. If you selected Yes for Timer, indicate how long you want the menu
| |
| displayed before the default operating system is started. You can do one
| |
| of the following:
| |
| o Accept the value listed next to Timeout.
| |
| o Change the value as follows:
| |
| a. Select Timeout and press Enter.
| |
| b. Type the amount of time (in seconds) that you want the menu
| |
| displayed before the preselected operating system is
| |
| automatically started.
| |
| c. Press Enter.
| |
| | |
| Setting the Menu Mode 287/4
| |
| | |
| You can select either Normal or Advanced for the Boot Manager menu mode. If you
| |
| select Advanced, your Boot Manager menu will include additional information
| |
| about your partitions.
| |
| To change the mode that is currently displayed:
| |
| 1. Highlight Mode on the Set startup values menu.
| |
| 2. Press Enter.
| |
| When you have finished configuring your Boot Manager menu, press F3. Then
| |
| continue with the installation of OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Selecting a File System 288/2
| |
| | |
| If you choose to format an existing partition during the Installation program,
| |
| you will be asked to select a file system. A file system is the part of the
| |
| operating system that provides access to files and programs on a disk. You can
| |
| select either the File Allocation Table (FAT) file system or the High
| |
| Performance File System (HPFS).
| |
| o Select the FAT file system if you intend to share data in the partition
| |
| with a version of DOS that is running independently of OS/2. (For example,
| |
| if you occasionally need to start DOS from a diskette and access the data
| |
| in the OS/2 partition, the partition would have to be formatted for the
| |
| FAT file system.) DOS uses the FAT file system, and does not recognize
| |
| files created by HPFS. Although DOS does not recognize HPFS, this is not
| |
| the case for DOS sessions that are part of OS/2. If you plan to run you
| |
| r DOS programs in the DOS sessions that are part of OS/2, you can format
| |
| for either file system. The only restriction for DOS programs running in
| |
| these DOS sessions is that they will not recognize the longer file names
| |
| in the HPFS partition.
| |
| o HPFS has features that make it a better choice for larger hard disk
| |
| partitions. It puts the directory at the seek center of the partition and
| |
| is designed to allocate contiguous space for files. This feature helps
| |
| prevent disk fragmentation. HPFS also handles write errors by writing to
| |
| alternate space reserved for that purpose.
| |
| HPFS also supports file names up to 254 characters in length.
| |
| If you format an OS/2 partition for the FAT file system and the system memory
| |
| is less than or equal to 6MB, support for HPFS is not automatically installed.
| |
| You can add this support later (for example, if you want to format another
| |
| partition for HPFS) using the Selective Install utility program (located in the
| |
| System Setup folder).
| |
| If you are trying to decide whether to use HPFS, consider that it takes at
| |
| least 200KB of system memory. If your computer has 6MB or less of memory, your
| |
| system performance will be adversely affected.
| |
| | |
| Changing System Options from the OS/2 Setup and Installation Window 289/2+
| |
| | |
| During Advanced Installation, the OS/2 Setup and Installation window appears so
| |
| you can select the features of the operating system that you want to install.
| |
| You can also use the menu bar at the top of the window to indicate an alternate
| |
| drive for your swap file, and to modify your CONFIG.SYS file.
| |
| | |
| Installing the Swap File and WIN-OS/2 Support in a Logical Drive 290/3
| |
| | |
| If you use the Advanced Installation method, you can install the swap file and
| |
| WIN-OS/2 support in another partition or logical drive to save hard disk space
| |
| in your OS/2 partition. When you are setting up your partitions with the FDISK
| |
| utility program, you can create a logical drive just for this purpose.
| |
| When the OS/2 Setup and Installation window appears during the installation
| |
| process, follow these steps:
| |
| 1. Select Software configuration from the menu bar of the OS/2 Setup and
| |
| Installation window.
| |
| 2. Select Change OS/2 parameters.
| |
| 3. Make sure the cursor is in the SWAPPATH field by selecting the field with
| |
| the mouse or the Tab key. Replace the default location of the swap file
| |
| with the desired location. For example, to place the swap file in the
| |
| root directory of logical drive D, type
| |
| d:\.
| |
| 4. Select OK or press Enter.
| |
| 5. Select the More push button next to WIN-OS/2 Support.
| |
| 6. Select the Down Arrow in the Destination drive field to change the drive
| |
| to the desired logical drive (drive D in this example).
| |
| 7. Select OK.
| |
| | |
| Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File during Installation 291/3
| |
| | |
| During Advanced Installation, you can customize your system by modifying the
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file. To do so, follow these steps when the OS/2 Setup and
| |
| Installation window appears during installation:
| |
| 1. Select Software configuration from the menu bar at the top of the window.
| |
| 2. Select either Change OS/2 parameters or Change DOS parameters.
| |
| For example, if you want to change the MINFREE setting for the swap file,
| |
| select Change OS/2 parameters. Then specify the size on the window that
| |
| is displayed. The MINFREE setting is used to specify when the system
| |
| should warn you about the growth of the swap file.
| |
| 3. Select OK when you have finished making all the selections in the window.
| |
| The OS/2 Setup and Installation window will reappear.
| |
| 4. Make your selections in the OS/2 Setup and Installation window to continue
| |
| with the installation of OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Special Hardware Considerations 292/1+
| |
| | |
| This chapter provides information to help you if you are installing OS/2 Version
| |
| 3 on or using the following hardware:
| |
| Gateway 2000
| |
| A system with Phoenix, AMI, or Micronics BIOS
| |
| ATI Graphics Ultra Pro display adapter
| |
| An EISA system with an Adaptec 1742A controller card
| |
| IBM PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette
| |
| IBM PS/2 Model 76
| |
| IBM ThinkPad with a Docking Station
| |
| A system with an Aox upgrade
| |
| Quantum II Hard Card
| |
| Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi, BSR, or Tandy
| |
| non-SCSI CD-ROM drive
| |
| Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination
| |
| IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter
| |
| Sound Blaster
| |
| Pro AudioSpectrum 16
| |
| | |
| Using Gateway 2000 Computers 293/2+
| |
| | |
| If you have an early version of a Gateway 2000 computer that does not work
| |
| properly, your BIOS might be an early version. The company suggests that you
| |
| replace the system board. Contact Gateway 2000, Inc. for information about
| |
| upgrading your computer.
| |
| | |
| 486 Math Coprocessors 294/3
| |
| | |
| If you have a Gateway 2000 computer with a 486 processor and a revision E system
| |
| board, you could experience a divide underflow error. The error can occur when
| |
| you are running software that takes advantage of the 486 math coprocessor. If
| |
| this error occurs, you can upgrade to a revision F system board by contacting
| |
| Gateway.
| |
| | |
| TRAP0002 Errors on Boot or Installation 295/3
| |
| | |
| Gateway computers that cause a TRAP0002 error are caused by one of the
| |
| following:
| |
| o A bad Read Ahead Cache on the system board
| |
| o Bad memory
| |
| When the problem is a bad Read Ahead Cache on the system board, press
| |
| Ctrl+Alt+Del to display a menu from which you can disable the external caching.
| |
| Refer to your Gateway documentation for more information. Contact Gateway when
| |
| this problem is encountered.
| |
| When the problem is bad memory, try moving each memory module to a different
| |
| memory controller. If the problem is not corrected, determine which memory
| |
| module is bad and replace it.
| |
| | |
| Gateway Nomad Notebook 296/3
| |
| | |
| If you receive a message that OS/2 is unable to operate your hard disk or your
| |
| diskette drive, your computer needs a BIOS upgrade.
| |
| If a TRAP error appears when the system is started, or during installation,
| |
| disable caching on the system board. If the problem persists, contact Gateway
| |
| 2000, Inc.
| |
| | |
| Using Phoenix, AMI, or Micronics BIOS 297/2+
| |
| | |
| This section provides information about computers that require a BIOS upgrade to
| |
| support OS/2 Version 3.
| |
| | |
| Phoenix BIOS 298/3
| |
| | |
| For questions about products that use Phoenix BIOS, call the computer
| |
| manufacturer directly. If there are additional questions, contact Phoenix.
| |
| | |
| AMI BIOS 299/3+
| |
| | |
| The later BIOS versions from American Megatrends, Inc. (AMI) provide a screen ID
| |
| code, which is visible at the lower-left corner of the screen during the initial
| |
| random access memory (RAM) count. The code can be made to reappear if you
| |
| restart the system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del, or it can be frozen on screen by
| |
| holding down the Ins key during system startup. This creates a keyboard error,
| |
| which will stop the screen. On a system that uses AMI BIOS or AMI BIOS Plus, the
| |
| message will be in the form:
| |
| aaaa-bbbb-mmddyy-Kc
| |
| On a system than uses AMI HI-Flex BIOS, the message will be in the form:
| |
| ee-ffff-bbbbbb-gggggggg-mmddyy-hhhhhhhh-c
| |
| If the screen ID code is in a form other than those above, one of the following
| |
| is true:
| |
| o The BIOS is a very early version. In this case, contact Washburn & Co.
| |
| o The BIOS was produced by a company with source-code license. In this case,
| |
| the system board manufacturer will be able to provide further information
| |
| or updates. All Everex** 368 BIOS versions are in this category.
| |
| | |
| General Rules 300/4
| |
| | |
| o If an IDE-type hard drive is installed, the date mmddyy should be 040990
| |
| or later for use with any operating system, including DOS. Special timing
| |
| requirements of IDE drives were accommodated on the date noted.
| |
| o If you use any other drive type, such as MFM, RLL, ESDI, or SCSI, the OS/2
| |
| operating system might install and operate correctly if mmddyy is 092588
| |
| or later, provided that the Keyboard Controller revision level is suitable
| |
| for the OS/2 version being used. Also, in the case of SCSI hard drives, a
| |
| driver compatible with the version of OS/2 operating system being
| |
| installed might be provided by the controller manufacturer, and if so, a
| |
| special installation procedure might apply.
| |
| o Keyboard Controller revision level F (represented by "c" in the previous
| |
| screen ID code examples) is expected to produce proper installation and
| |
| operation of OS/2 versions 1.3x and 2.x.
| |
| OS/2 1.0 or 1.1: 8, B, D, or F
| |
| OS/2 1.2x: D or F
| |
| OS/2 1.3x or 2.: F
| |
| o If the Keyboard Controller revision level shows as 0 or M, the Keyboard
| |
| Controller chip is not an AMI chip, even if an AMI license sticker was
| |
| applied to it. If it is not an AMI chip, its performance under the OS/2
| |
| operating system is unknown. It might or might not work correctly. For
| |
| some revision levels (usually "M"), an AMI chip can successfully replace a
| |
| non-AMI chip, but this is not a general rule. Sometimes the nonstandard
| |
| Keyboard Controller (usually "0") was used to combine system board
| |
| functions not normally part of the controller. Substituting a standard
| |
| chip causes the board to not function at all. In this case, there is no
| |
| solution other than to replace the board. A revision level of 9
| |
| accompanied by a nonstandard ID code also indicates a nonstandard
| |
| controller (and BIOS). The system board manufacturer should be contacted
| |
| for further information.
| |
| | |
| BIOS Updates 301/4
| |
| | |
| If a BIOS prior to the previously noted dates requires replacement, note the
| |
| following:
| |
| o AMI BIOS and BIOS Plus series BIOS (16 character ID code) for cached
| |
| system boards are customized for individual system board designs. You can
| |
| obtain updates only from the system board manufacturer, unless you have
| |
| one of the following:
| |
| 1. A BIOS with "aaaa" = E307. This BIOS can be replaced with a standard
| |
| type.
| |
| 2. A BIOS for Northgate** or Motherboard Factory** system boards, except
| |
| the Northgate Slimline**. This BIOS can be replaced by a standard
| |
| type. The Slimline BIOS has the VGA BIOS in the same chips. They can
| |
| be updated to the 040990 release, provided they are identified as
| |
| Slimline, and the speed is specified (20, 25, or 33 MHz). The speed
| |
| must be specified because different VGA code is required for the
| |
| various speeds.
| |
| 3. A BIOS with "aaaa" = DAMI, DAMX, or EDAMI (usually for cached boards
| |
| d esigned or built by AMI). This BIOS can be updated. Mylex or
| |
| Leading Technology** boards with these prefixes can only be updated
| |
| by the board manufacturer.
| |
| o The complete screen ID code is necessary to determine whether a BIOS
| |
| update for other system boards can be provided. In the case of the HI-Flex
| |
| BIOS, the complete second and third lines of the ID code are also
| |
| necessary. If not immediately visible on the screen, they can be viewed
| |
| by pressing the Ins key during system startup.
| |
| o If you have a hard disk drive from another manufacturer, it must be dated
| |
| 092588 or later. If your hard disk drive is an earlier version, contact
| |
| the dealer at your place of purchase, or the hard disk manufacturer, for
| |
| information about upgrading the drive.
| |
| | |
| Micronics BIOS 302/3
| |
| | |
| If you have revision E of a Micronics system board, you might receive a divide
| |
| underflow message, or your computer might not work properly. This board contains
| |
| an early version of BIOS. If you purchased the board from Gateway, contact
| |
| Gateway 2000, Inc. request an upgrade to revision F.
| |
| | |
| Using the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Display Adapter 303/2
| |
| | |
| If you have an ATI Graphics Ultra Pro, you must run the INSTALL.EXE utility
| |
| program provided by ATI before you install OS/2 Version 3. Note that this is a
| |
| DOS program and you must, therefore, start DOS before you run the program.
| |
| Note: If you have a Gateway 2000 system, refer also to "Black Lines on an OS/2
| |
| Logo Screen" in Solving Installation Problems
| |
| 1. Start DOS on your computer.
| |
| 2. Insert the ATI diskette into drive A.
| |
| 3. Type a:install.exe and press Enter. The Set Power-Up Configuration menu
| |
| appears.
| |
| 4. Select Custom for Monitor Type.
| |
| 5. Make sure that VGA Memory Sizeis set to Shared for 1 MB video memory
| |
| boards.
| |
| 6. Make sure that the refresh rate for 640 x 480 resolution is set to IBM
| |
| Default or 60 Hz.
| |
| Note: Later during the installation of OS/2 Version 3, be sure to select
| |
| 8514 as the primary display type.
| |
| | |
| Using an EISA System with an Adaptec 1742A Controller Card 304/2
| |
| | |
| If you have an EISA system with an Adaptec 1742A controller card, you must run
| |
| the Setup Configuration program provided on the Adaptec Card Setup Diskette
| |
| before installing OS/2 Version 3. To set up the Adaptec card in the
| |
| configuration using the Setup Diskette, do the following:
| |
| 1. Set the Enhanced mode setting to OFF.
| |
| 2. Set the Standard mode setting to ON.
| |
| 3. Set the Hex Address setting to C800.
| |
| 4. Set the I/O Port setting to 230H.
| |
| 5. Set the DMA channel setting to 5.
| |
| 6. Set the Parity Check setting to OFF.
| |
| 7. Set the Synchronous Negotiation setting to ON. If CD-ROM is not
| |
| recognized, set this setting to OFF.
| |
| 8. Set the Enabled Disconnect setting to YES.
| |
| 9. Set the IRQ setting to 11 (default is 2).
| |
| | |
| Using an IBM PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette 305/2
| |
| | |
| As part of the setup of your computer, you might have been advised to create a
| |
| Reference Diskette (sometimes called a "Hardware System Program Diskette"). The
| |
| Reference Diskette contains BIOS information (code about how your diskette
| |
| drives, hard drives, and keyboard interact). The OS/2 Version 3 Installation
| |
| program may prompt you to insert this diskette.
| |
| If you have not created the Reference Diskette, do so before you begin the
| |
| installation of OS/2 Version 3. Refer to your PS/2 documentation for
| |
| instructions on creating this diskette.
| |
| | |
| Using an IBM PS/2 Model 76 or IBM ThinkPad with a Docking Station 306/2
| |
| | |
| If you are installing OS/2 Version 3 on an IBM PS/2 Model 76 or an IBM ThinkPad
| |
| 700, 700C, 720, or 720C attached to a 3550 Docking Station, you need to replace
| |
| the ABIOS files on the OS/2 Installation Diskette with files from the Reference
| |
| Diskette. Do the following:
| |
| 1. If you are using a ThinkPad, detach it from the Docking Station.
| |
| 2. Create a Reference Diskette by following the documentation that came with
| |
| your computer.
| |
| 3. Make a copy of the Installation Diskette. Type diskcopy a: a: and press
| |
| Enter. Remove and insert diskettes when prompted to do so.
| |
| 4. Remove the copy from drive A and insert the original Installation
| |
| Diskette.
| |
| 5. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
| |
| to restart it.
| |
| 6. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette, insert
| |
| Diskette 1, and press Enter.
| |
| 7. When the Welcome screen appears, press F3 to display the command prompt.
| |
| 8. Insert the copy of the Installation Diskette into drive A.
| |
| 9. Type a:\del *.bio and press Enter.
| |
| 10. Remove the copy of the Installation Diskette and insert the Reference
| |
| Diskette you created into drive A.
| |
| 11. If your computer has more than one diskette drive, insert the copy of the
| |
| Installation Diskette into drive B. In the next two steps, you will be
| |
| prompted to insert diskettes into both drive A and drive B.
| |
| If you computer has only one diskette drive, when you are asked to insert
| |
| a diskette into drive A, insert the Reference Diskette into your diskette
| |
| drive. When you are asked to insert a diskette into drive B, insert the
| |
| copy of the Installation Diskette into your diskette drive.
| |
| 12. Type copy a:\*.bio b:\ and press Enter.
| |
| 13. Type copy a:\abios.sys b:\ and press Enter.
| |
| 14. Turn off your computer. If you are using a ThinkPad, return it to the
| |
| Docking Station.
| |
| | |
| Using a System with an Aox Upgrade 307/2
| |
| | |
| If you have a system with a 286 processor that has been upgraded to a 386SX with
| |
| an Aox upgrade and you want to install OS/2 Version 3, you must start the system
| |
| with DOS and run the AOX232.EXE. Contact the Aox Technical Support Group to
| |
| request a copy of AOX232.EXE before continuing with the installation of OS/2.
| |
| | |
| Using a Quantum II XL Hard Card 308/2
| |
| | |
| If you have a Quantum hard card, you must make a modification to the
| |
| BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD line in the CONFIG.SYS file. To modify the BASEDEV
| |
| statement, do the following:
| |
| 1. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1.
| |
| 2. Change the BASEDEV statement to:
| |
| BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD /A:1 /IRQ
| |
| (The settings shown are the defaults for the Quantum hard card.)
| |
| 3. Save the CONFIG.SYS file.
| |
| 4. Install OS/2 Version 3.
| |
| | |
| Using a Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi, BSR, or Tandy Non-SCSI CD-ROM Drive 309/2+
| |
| | |
| For the Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi, BSR, or Tandy
| |
| non-SCSI drives to be recognized by OS/2 Version 3, the base port address
| |
| specified on the CD-ROM BASEDEV statement in the CONFIG.SYS file must match the
| |
| base I/O port address specified on the CD-ROM host adapter card.
| |
| Note: If you are installing OS/2 from a CD-ROM, you might first need to modify
| |
| the BASEDEV statement for your CD-ROM device driver in the CONFIG.SYS file on
| |
| the diskette labeled Diskette 1. See also the section called "Using an
| |
| Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination."
| |
| | |
| Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-31A Device Driver 310/3
| |
| | |
| The Sony SONY31A.ADD device driver supports the following CD-ROM drives:
| |
| Sony CDU-31A, CDU-7305
| |
| Sony CDU-33A, CDU-7405
| |
| This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Sony CD-ROM device
| |
| driver. The parameters can be changed by modifying the BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD
| |
| line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode from the default,
| |
| software polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer. The syntax for the
| |
| BASEDEV statement is as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD [/A:d][/AT:dd][/P:nnn][/I:nn][/V]
| |
| where:
| |
| [/A:d] Identifies a specific adapter, d. The adapter is specified as a
| |
| single-digit value which is zero based (for example, the first
| |
| adapter is specified as /A:0).
| |
| [/AT:dd] Sets the adapter type connected to the CD-ROM drive. Supported values
| |
| are:
| |
| 00 = Sony CDB-334 (default)
| |
| 05 = Echo** Speech (with ESC614 chip)
| |
| Orchid** SoundWave 32
| |
| Orchid GameWave 32
| |
| Cardinal DSP16
| |
| 08 = MediaVision** Pro AudioSpectrum 16
| |
| [/P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The port
| |
| address is specified as a four-digit hex value. Leading zeros should
| |
| be specified. The value must be the same number as the port address
| |
| selected by the jumper on the host interface card.
| |
| If this parameter is not specified, the default port address for the
| |
| host adapter is used. For the Sony CDB-334 host interface card, the
| |
| default is 0340. For the Media Vision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 card, the
| |
| default is 1F88.
| |
| [/I:nn] Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must match
| |
| the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface card. If
| |
| this parameter is not specified, the device driver will use software
| |
| polling transfer.
| |
| Note: Some Sony CDB-334 host adapter cards do not include the
| |
| plastic jumper switch to select the IRQ channel on the IRQ jumper
| |
| block. You must obtain and install the plastic jumper switch to
| |
| enable the IRQ channel.
| |
| [/V] Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
| |
| level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
| |
| The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
| |
| common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
| |
| each CD-ROM drive.
| |
| Example 1: The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony
| |
| CDB-334 host adapter.
| |
| The Sony CDB-334 host adapter supports base I/O port addresses of 320h, 330h,
| |
| 340h, or 360h. If the host adapter is set to its default port address of 340h,
| |
| the CONFIG.SYS statement does not need to be modified and should appear as
| |
| follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD
| |
| If the CDB-334 host adapter is set to any port address other than the default
| |
| of 340h, the CONFIG.SYS statement must be modified. For example, if the Sony
| |
| CDB-334 host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 360, the line in the
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P
| |
| If, in the above situation, the driver is operating in interrupt mode at IRQ
| |
| channel 5, the line in your CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P:0360 /I
| |
| Example 2: The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a
| |
| MediaVision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 host adapter.
| |
| In this case, the line in CONFIG.SYS must be modified and should appear as
| |
| follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /AT
| |
| Note: The default port address for the CDU-31A when attached to the PAS-16
| |
| card is 1F88. The Sony Desktop Library model numbers CDU-31A-LL/L and CDU-7305
| |
| include the PAS-16 adapter.
| |
| Example 3: The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a Creative
| |
| Labs Sound Blaster Pro, Sound Blaster 16, or Sound Blaster 16 MultiCD host
| |
| adapter.
| |
| The port address specified on the BASEDEV statement in CONFIG.SYS should be 10h
| |
| above the base I/O port address specified on these adapter cards. For example,
| |
| if the Sound Blaster card is set for a base I/O port address of 220h, the line
| |
| in CONFIG.SYS should appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P
| |
| Example 4: The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to the Echo
| |
| Speech, Orchid SoundWave 32, Orchid GameWave 32, or Cardinal DSP16 host
| |
| adapter.
| |
| In this case, the line in CONFIG.SYS must be modified and should appear as
| |
| follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /AT
| |
| | |
| Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-535 Device Driver 311/3
| |
| | |
| The Sony SONY535.ADD device driver supports the following CD-ROM drives:
| |
| Sony 531 series (CDU-531, 6201, 6205)
| |
| Sony 535 series (CDU-535, 6205, 7205)
| |
| This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Sony CD-ROM device
| |
| driver. The parameters can be changed by modifying the BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD
| |
| line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode from the default,
| |
| software polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer. The syntax for the
| |
| BASEDEV statement is as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD [P:nnn][/I:nn][/U:d,d...][/V]
| |
| where:
| |
| [/P:nnn]. Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The value
| |
| must be the same number as the port address specified by the jumper
| |
| on the host interface card.
| |
| [/I:nn]. Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must match
| |
| the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface card. If
| |
| this parameter is not specified, the device driver will use software
| |
| polling transfer.
| |
| Note: Some Sony host adapter cards do not include the plastic jumper
| |
| switch to select the IRQ channel on the IRQ jumper block. You must
| |
| obtain and install the plastic jumper switch to enable the IRQ
| |
| channel.
| |
| [/U:d,d...]. Specifies the drive unit number which the Sony CD-ROM drive is set
| |
| to. The value of d must be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3. If more than one
| |
| Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to the adapter, this parameter must be
| |
| specified. If only one CD-ROM drive is attached to the adapter, and
| |
| this parameter is not specified, then the default unit ID used by the
| |
| driver is 0.
| |
| [/V]. Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
| |
| level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
| |
| The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
| |
| common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
| |
| each CD-ROM drive.
| |
| Example 1: A Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony CDB-240 series host
| |
| adapter.
| |
| If the Sony host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 360, the line in
| |
| the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:360
| |
| Example 2: A Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony CDB-240 series host
| |
| adapter.
| |
| If the Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to the Sony host adapter at a base I/O
| |
| port address of 360h, and the driver is operating in interrupt mode at IRQ
| |
| channel 5, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:360 /I:5
| |
| Example 3: Multiple Sony CD-ROM drives are daisy-chained to a Sony CDB-240
| |
| series host adapter.
| |
| If two Sony CD-ROM drives are daisy-chained from the Sony host adapter with the
| |
| first drive set to drive unit 0 and the second set to drive unit 1, the line in
| |
| the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:340 /U:0,1
| |
| | |
| Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Panasonic Device Driver 312/3
| |
| | |
| The Panasonic device driver (SBCD2.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:
| |
| o Panasonic CR-521, 522, 523, 562, 563
| |
| o Creative Labs OmniCD
| |
| o IBM ISA CD-ROM drive
| |
| This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Panasonic CD-ROM
| |
| device driver. The parameters can be changed by modifying the
| |
| BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode
| |
| from the default, software polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer.
| |
| The syntax for the BASEDEV statement is as follows: BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD
| |
| [/P:nnn][/T:n][/NS][/V]
| |
| where:
| |
| [./P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The value
| |
| must be the same number as the port address selected by the jumper on
| |
| the host interface card.
| |
| [./T:n] Sets the adapter type connected to the CD-ROM drive. The supported
| |
| value is:
| |
| Creative Labs CD-ROM interface card (not Sound Blaster)
| |
| [./NS] Disables drive select scan. Driver will not scan for more than one
| |
| CD-ROM drive.
| |
| [./V] Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
| |
| level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
| |
| The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
| |
| common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
| |
| each CD-ROM drive.
| |
| Example 1: A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
| |
| attached to a standard Panasonic or IBM ISA CD-ROM host adapter.
| |
| The standard Panasonic or IBM ISA host adapter supports base I/O port addresses
| |
| of 300h, 310h, 320h, or 330h. For example, if the adapter is set to a base I/O
| |
| port address of 300, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:300
| |
| Example 2: A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
| |
| attached to a Creative Labs Sound Blaster Pro, Sound Blaster 16, or Sound
| |
| Blaster 16 MultiCD.
| |
| If the Sound Blaster card is set for a base I/O address of 220h, the line in
| |
| CONFIG.SYS should appears as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:220
| |
| Example 3: A Creative Labs OmniCD is attached to a standard Creative Labs
| |
| CD-ROM host adapter (not Sound Blaster).
| |
| The standard Creative Labs host adapter supports base I/O port addresses of
| |
| 250h or 260h. For example, if the adapter is set to a base I/O port address of
| |
| 250, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:250 /T:2
| |
| Example 4: A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
| |
| attached to a MediaVision Jazz 16 sound card.
| |
| If the MediaVision card is set for a base I/O port address of 300h, the line in
| |
| the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:300 /NS
| |
| Example 5: A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
| |
| attached to a Reveal audio card.
| |
| If the Reveal audio card is set to a base I/O port address of 630h, the line in
| |
| the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:630
| |
| | |
| Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Philips CD-ROM Device Drivers 313/3
| |
| | |
| The Philips device driver (LMS205.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:
| |
| Philips CM205, CM225
| |
| The Philips device driver (LMS206.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:
| |
| Philips CM205MS,CM225MS (multisession photo CD version of CM205)
| |
| Philips CM206, CM226
| |
| Note: If you have installed OS/2 and find that your CD-ROM drive does not
| |
| function, you must copy the LMS206.ADD file from Diskette 1 to the \OS2
| |
| directory and add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file:
| |
| BASEDEV=LMS206.ADD
| |
| This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Philips CD-ROM
| |
| device drivers. The parameters can be changed by modifying the
| |
| BASEDEV=LMS205.ADD (or LMS206.ADD) line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change
| |
| the transfer mode from the default, software polling transfer, to software
| |
| interrupt transfer. The syntax for the BASEDEV statement is as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=LMS205.ADD [/P:nnn][/U:x][/M:y][/V]
| |
| where:
| |
| [./P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The value
| |
| must be the same number as the port address selected by the jumper on
| |
| the host interface card.
| |
| [/U:x] Identifies a specific unit, x. Valid values for x are 0, 1, 2, and
| |
| 3. The default is zero. LMS205 and LMS206 locate all CM250 and
| |
| CM260 host adapters and assign unit numbers based on the order in
| |
| which each was found. This parameter tells LMS205 and LMS206 which
| |
| BASEDEV line it is currently processing.
| |
| [/M:y] Indicates the number of 2500-byte CD frame buffers that should be
| |
| allocated by the LMS205.ADD or LMS2056.ADD driver. Valid values for y
| |
| are 8,...,26. The default is 16. Any value below the minimum (8)
| |
| will be assigned the minimum (8).
| |
| [/V] Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
| |
| level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
| |
| | |
| Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Mitsumi CD-ROM Device Driver 314/3
| |
| | |
| The Mitsumi device driver (MITFX001.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:
| |
| Mitsumi CRMC-FX001D
| |
| Mitsumi CRMC-FX001
| |
| Mitsumi CRMC-LU005S
| |
| Mitsumi CRMC-LU002S
| |
| BSR 6800
| |
| Tandy CDR-1000
| |
| This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Mitsumi CD-ROM
| |
| device driver. The parameters can be changed by modifying the
| |
| BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer
| |
| mode from the default, software polling transfer, to software interrupt
| |
| transfer. The syntax for the BASEDEV statement is as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD [/P:nnn][/I:nn][/V]
| |
| where:
| |
| [/P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. This must
| |
| be the same number as specified by the DIP switch on the interface
| |
| card.
| |
| [/I:nn] Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must match
| |
| the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface card. If
| |
| this parameter is not specified, the device driver will use software
| |
| polling transfer.
| |
| [/V] Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
| |
| level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
| |
| The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
| |
| common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
| |
| each CD-ROM drive.
| |
| Example 1: A Mitsumi CD-ROM drive is attached to a Mitsumi host adapter.
| |
| The Mitsumi host adapter supports I/O port address ranges from 300h to 3FCh.
| |
| If the Mitsumi host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of either 300h or
| |
| 340h, the statement in CONFIG.SYS does not need to be modified and should
| |
| appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD
| |
| If the Mitsumi host adapter is set to an address other than those specified
| |
| above, the BASEDEV statement needs to be modified. For example, if the Mitsumi
| |
| host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 320, the line in the
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:320
| |
| Example 2:A Mitsumi CD-ROM drive is attached to a Creative Labs Sound Blaster
| |
| 16 MultiCD.
| |
| If the Mitsumi CD-ROM port on the Sound Blaster 16 MultiCD is set to an I/O
| |
| port address of 340, the line in CONFIG.SYS should appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:340
| |
| Note: To enable interrupt transfer mode, which improves performance, the /I
| |
| parameter must be specified. For example, to enable interrupt transfer mode
| |
| for IRQ channel 10 at I/O port address of 320h, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file
| |
| should appear as follows:
| |
| BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:320 /I:10
| |
| | |
| Using an Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination 315/2
| |
| | |
| If you find that your drive or combination of CD-ROM drive and SCSI adapter is
| |
| not supported by OS/2 Version 3, you can contact the manufacturer and obtain an
| |
| OS/2 Adapter Device Driver (.ADD) file. Then, after you receive the .ADD file,
| |
| use your current operating system and follow this procedure before you install
| |
| OS/2:
| |
| 1. Make a copy of Diskette 1. At a command prompt, type diskcopy a: a: and
| |
| press Enter.
| |
| 2. Copy the .ADD file to the root directory on the copy of Diskette 1. (The
| |
| root directory is the first directory on the diskette.) If there is not
| |
| enough room, delete the following files from the copy of Diskette 1:
| |
| For an ISA/EISA (non-Micro Channel) computer: IBM2*.*
| |
| For a Micro Channel computer: IBM1*.*
| |
| You will now have room to add device drivers to Diskette 1. However, if
| |
| the .ADD driver is on a diskette, you might have to copy it to your hard
| |
| disk before copying it to the copy of Diskette 1.
| |
| 3. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file located on the copy of Diskette 1:
| |
| a. At the end of the file, add the appropriate BASEDEV= statement for
| |
| your adapter. For example, if your .ADD file is named T128SCSI.ADD,
| |
| add the following BASEDEV= statement shown in capital letters:
| |
| set cdrominst=1
| |
| ifs=cdfs.ifs /q
| |
| BASEDEV=T128SCSI.ADD
| |
| The lowercase letters represent lines that already exist in your
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file, and uppercase letters represent lines you need to
| |
| insert. This ensures proper placement and installation.
| |
| Do not specify a file path for the .ADD file.
| |
| b. Insert the letters REM before any lines in the CONFIG.SYS file that
| |
| refer to the file you deleted in step 2 above.
| |
| 4. Begin the installation by inserting the Installation Diskette into drive A
| |
| and restarting the system. When prompted to insert Diskette 1, insert the
| |
| copy that you modified.
| |
| 5. Install OS/2 Version 3, following the instructions in Using Easy
| |
| Installation or Using Advanced Installation
| |
| When the installation is complete, you must make changes to the CONFIG.SYS file
| |
| located in the root directory of the OS/2 partition in order to make your
| |
| CD-ROM accessible. You must also copy the .ADD that you put on the copy of
| |
| Diskette 1 to the \OS2 directory of the OS/2 drive. The OS/2 Installation
| |
| program does not copy unsupported .ADD files automatically. Do the following
| |
| (in the following examples, X represents the OS/2 partition):
| |
| 1. Open the OS/2 System folder on the Desktop.
| |
| 2. Open Command Prompts.
| |
| 3. Open OS/2 Window.
| |
| 4. At the command prompt, type cd\os2 and press Enter.
| |
| 5. Insert Diskette 1 into drive A. Then type the following, pressing Enter
| |
| after each:
| |
| COPY A:\OS2CDROM.DMD
| |
| COPY A:\CDFS.IFS
| |
| 6. Remove Diskette 1 from drive A and insert the manufacturer-supplied device
| |
| driver diskette (which contains the .ADD file).
| |
| 7. Type the following and then press Enter:
| |
| COPY A:\T128SCSI.ADD
| |
| where T128SCSI.ADD represents the name of the device driver file.
| |
| 8. Using a system editor, add the lines shown in uppercase letters to the
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file as shown below. (Lowercase letters represent lines that
| |
| already exist in your CONFIG.SYS file; uppercase letters represent lines
| |
| you need to insert. This ensures proper placement and installation.)
| |
| basedev=ibm1s506.add
| |
| basedev=os2dasd.dmd
| |
| DEVICE=X:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
| |
| IFS=X:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
| |
| set bookshelf=x:\os2\book . . .
| |
| codepage=437,850
| |
| devinfo=kbd,us,x:\os2\keyboard.dcp
| |
| BASEDEV=T128SCSI.ADD
| |
| devinfo=scr,vga,x:\os2\viotbl.dcp
| |
| 9. Save the CONFIG.SYS file and exit the editor.
| |
| 10. Shut down your system.
| |
| The above procedure is not guaranteed to make your CD-ROM work properly because
| |
| the device drivers are made by manufacturers other than IBM. For further
| |
| assistance, contact the manufacturer or your CD-ROM drive.
| |
| | |
| Using an IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter 316/2
| |
| | |
| TheM -
| |
| AudioadaptercanbeconfiguredtoautomaticallyrouteanyaudiosourceattachedtoitsLINE -
| |
| INjacktotheLINE - OUTjack . ThismightbenecessaryifyourCD -
| |
| ROMdriveisnotattachedinternallytotheaudiocardoutputs .
| |
| ToenablethisfeatureoftheM - Audiocard ,addaPtotheendoftheDEVICE =statementforM -
| |
| AudiointheCONFIG . SYSfile ,asinthefollowingexample :
| |
| DEVICE=d:\MMOS2\ACPADD2.SYS A P
| |
| where d represents the drive letter, which will already appear in your
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file.
| |
| | |
| Using a Sound Blaster Adapter 317/2
| |
| | |
| Before you install the Sound Blaster adapter into your computer, you must know
| |
| the interrupt level, I/O port address, and the DMA channels. These values were
| |
| shown when you installed the adapter into your computer. If you do not know
| |
| these values, you can do the following:
| |
| o On a Micro Channel computer, run the Reference Diskette and look at the
| |
| system configuration.
| |
| o On an ISA/EISA (non-Micro Channel) computer, check the Dip switches on
| |
| your Sound Blaster.
| |
| If your computer has a Token Ring Adapter or a SCSI adapter, you might have
| |
| problems if you set Sound Blaster to use I/O port address 220. Choose a
| |
| different address if you have either of these adapters installed. I/O address
| |
| 240 is a good choice if 220 cannot be used.
| |
| ISA and EISA (non-Micro Channel) computers use Interrupt level 7 for the
| |
| printer (LPT) port. If you have this type of computer with a parallel printer,
| |
| choose a different interrupt.
| |
| o This release of OS/2 does not support MIDI recording.
| |
| o Sound Blaster (non-SB PRO) does not support software volume control. The
| |
| MMPM/2 Volume Control application will, therefore, be ineffective for
| |
| these adapters.
| |
| o If you have an older Sound Blaster (non-SB PRO) card, ensure that you
| |
| upgrade the DSP module to Version 2.0 or higher. Versions 1.0 and 1.5 are
| |
| not supported by the Sound Blaster device drivers.
| |
| | |
| Using a Pro AudioSpectrum 16 318/2
| |
| | |
| The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 is conceptually two sound cards in one adapter. The
| |
| adapter provides support for the MediaVision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 and the Sound
| |
| Blaster 2.0. A Yamaha OPL-3 chip is included for FM MIDI synthesis. It is used
| |
| by the OS/2 device driver for MIDI playback and for MIDI background sound when
| |
| playing games.
| |
| The FM MIDI hardware is the same as used in Creative Labs Sound Blaster adapters
| |
| and is fixed to always respond at a single I/O base address. This commonality
| |
| of hardware is the reason that multiple Pro AudioSpectrum 16 adapters and
| |
| multiple Sound Blaster adapters cannot be used in a single computer.
| |
| The OS/2 physical device driver does not use the Sound Blaster wave audio side
| |
| of the adapter. This is left free for use by WIN-OS/2 sessions or by games
| |
| running in DOS sessions.
| |
| The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 side of the adapter requires one interrupt (IRQ), one
| |
| Direct Memory Access (DMA) channel, and two I/O addresses. The Sound Blaster
| |
| side also uses one interrupt (IRQ), one DMA channel, and two I/O addresses. The
| |
| values for each side of the adapter must be unique just as those selected for
| |
| other hardware adapters must be unique. I/O addresses 388 and 330 will not be
| |
| seen in the device driver statement.
| |
| The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 configurations (DMA and IRQ) are set via software at
| |
| system startup, based on parameters specified on the DEVICE= line of the
| |
| CONFIG.SYS file. The values are set by OS/2 Multimedia installation. An
| |
| example of the DEVICE= line that should appear in your CONFIG.SYS file for the
| |
| Pro AudioSpectrum 16 device driver follows:
| |
| DEVICE=D:\MMOS2\MVPRODD.SYS /I:10 /D:5 /S:1,240,1,5 /N:PAS161$
| |
| where:
| |
| /N:xxxxx Specifies the name of the driver.
| |
| /T:x /T:1 = use on-board oscillator for OPL-3 (the default is /T:0).
| |
| /D:x Sets the DMA channel.
| |
| /Q:x Sets the IRQ channel.
| |
| /I:x Sets the IRQ channel.
| |
| /B:xxx Specifies HEX base board I/O location (the default is /B:388).
| |
| /W:x If /W:1, enables warm boot reset (the default is /W:0).
| |
| /M:x,xxx MPU [enabled,base address]
| |
| /F:x FM synthesis (/F:1 is enabled by default).
| |
| /J:x /J:1 causes a joystick to be enabled (the default is /J:0).
| |
| /S:x,xxx,x,x Sound Blaster [enable,base address,DMA,IRQ]
| |
| The Sound Blaster DMA is fixed at DMA channel 1. The I/O base address and IRQ
| |
| settings are set differently based on the version of the Pro AudioSpectrum 16
| |
| adapter. Older adapters have these values set via jumpers on the card. The
| |
| current versions set the Sound Blaster settings via software on the command
| |
| line to MVPRODD.SYS (or MVSOUND.SYS for DOS).
| |
| As of this release of OS/2, the device driver MVPRODD.SYS does not know how to
| |
| set the Sound Blaster IRQ from software. Only the first two parameters of the
| |
| /S: parameters are used (enable and I/O location).
| |
| | |
| Keyboard and Mouse Use 319/1+
| |
| | |
| The following tables list some of the most common tasks you can do, using either
| |
| the keyboard or a mouse. The plus (+) sign between key names means to press and
| |
| hold down the keys in the order shown and release them together.
| |
| When a column is left blank under the Mouse heading, it means that there is no
| |
| equivalent mouse function. The keyboard must be used.
| |
| The following terms are used to describe actions taken with a mouse:
| |
| Click Press and release a mouse button. Instructions explain whether
| |
| you should click mouse button 1 or 2.
| |
| Double-click Press and release mouse button 1 twice in quick succession.
| |
| Drag Move an object across the computer screen with a mouse.
| |
| Open Point to an item and double-click. Instructions explain which
| |
| item to point to.
| |
| Point Move the mouse pointer.
| |
| Select Point to an item and click mouse button 1. Instructions explain
| |
| which item to point to.
| |
| Note: For a detailed list of specific key assignments, see the Master Help
| |
| Index.
| |
| | |
| System Tasks 320/2
| |
| | |
| ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
| |
| 3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Get help. 3 F1 3 Select the word HELP. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Restart the system. 3 Ctrl+Alt+Del3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Switch to the next 3 Alt+Tab 3 Select the window. 3
| |
| 3 window. 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Switch to the next 3 Alt+Esc 3 Press both mouse buttons at the same 3
| |
| 3 window or full-screen 3 3 time; open the window. 3
| |
| 3 session. 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Display the Window 3 Ctrl+Esc 3 Point to an empty area on the 3
| |
| 3 List. 3 3 desktop; click both mouse buttons at 3
| |
| 3 3 3 the same time. 3
| |
| @DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
| |
| | |
| Object Tasks 321/2
| |
| | |
| ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
| |
| 3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move among objects. 3 , , , or 3 Point to the object. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Select an object. 3 Use the arrow keys to 3 Select the object. 3
| |
| 3 3 move among the objects. 3 3
| |
| 3 3 Press the Spacebar to 3 3
| |
| 3 3 select an object. 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Select more than one 3 Shift+F8 to begin Add 3 Press and hold the Ctrl 3
| |
| 3 object. 3 mode. Use the arrow keys 3 key. Select an object. 3
| |
| 3 3 to move among objects. 3 Repeat as needed. 3
| |
| 3 3 Press the Spacebar to 3 Release the Ctrl key 3
| |
| 3 3 make each selection. 3 when done. 3
| |
| 3 3 Repeat as needed. Press 3 3
| |
| 3 3 Shift+F8 again to end 3 3
| |
| 3 3 Add mode. 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Select all objects. 3 Press Ctrl+/ 3 Press and hold mouse 3
| |
| 3 3 3 button 1; then drag the 3
| |
| 3 3 3 pointer over every 3
| |
| 3 3 3 object. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Deselect all objects. 3 Press Ctrl+\ 3 Select an empty area on 3
| |
| 3 3 3 the desktop. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Open an object. 3 Select it; then press 3 Point to the object; 3
| |
| 3 3 Enter. 3 then double-click. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Delete an object. 3 Select it; then press 3 Point to the object; 3
| |
| 3 3 Shift+F10. Select 3 then press and hold 3
| |
| 3 3 DELETE from the 3 down mouse button 2. 3
| |
| 3 3 pop-up menu. 3 Drag the object to the 3
| |
| 3 3 3 Shredder object. 3
| |
| 3 3 3 Release mouse button 2. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Print an object. 3 Select it; then press 3 Point to the object; 3
| |
| 3 3 Shift+F10. Select PRINT 3 then press and hold 3
| |
| 3 3 from the pop-up menu. 3 down mouse button 2. 3
| |
| 3 3 3 Drag the object to the 3
| |
| 3 3 3 Printer object. 3
| |
| 3 3 3 Release mouse button 2. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move an object. 3 Select it; then press 3 Point to the object; 3
| |
| 3 3 Shift+F10. Select MOVE 3 then press and hold 3
| |
| 3 3 from the pop-up menu. 3 down mouse button 2. 3
| |
| 3 3 3 Drag the object to 3
| |
| 3 3 3 another folder object. 3
| |
| 3 3 3 Release mouse button 2. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Copy an object. 3 Select it; then press 3 Press and hold down the 3
| |
| 3 3 Shift+F10. Select COPY 3 Ctrl key; then point to 3
| |
| 3 3 from the pop-up menu. 3 the object. Press and 3
| |
| 3 3 3 hold down mouse button 3
| |
| 3 3 3 2. Drag the object to 3
| |
| 3 3 3 where you want a copy 3
| |
| 3 3 3 to appear. Release 3
| |
| 3 3 3 mouse button 2; then 3
| |
| 3 3 3 release the Ctrl key. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Change the name of an 3 Select the object; then 3 Press and hold down the 3
| |
| 3 object. 3 press Shift+F10. Press 3 Alt key; select the 3
| |
| 3 3 ; then press Enter. 3 name (title). Release 3
| |
| 3 3 Select the GENERAL tab. 3 the Alt key. Edit the 3
| |
| 3 3 Select the TITLE field; 3 name. Select an area 3
| |
| 3 3 then edit the name. 3 away from the name. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Display the pop-up menu 3 Press Alt+Shift+Tab; 3 Point to an empty area 3
| |
| 3 for the desktop folder. 3 then press Ctrl+\. Then 3 of the desktop folder; 3
| |
| 3 3 press Shift+F10. 3 then click mouse button 3
| |
| 3 3 3 2. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Display the pop-up menu 3 Select it; then press 3 Point to the object; 3
| |
| 3 for an object. 3 Shift+F10. 3 then click mouse button 3
| |
| 3 3 3 2. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Select the first choice 3 Home 3 Select the choice. 3
| |
| 3 in a pop-up menu. 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Select the last choice 3 End 3 Select the choice. 3
| |
| 3 in a pop-up menu. 3 3 3
| |
| @DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
| |
| ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
| |
| 3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Select a choice using 3 Type the underlined 3 3
| |
| 3 the underlined letter. 3 letter. 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Get Help. 3 Select and object; then 3 Point to the object; 3
| |
| 3 3 press F1. 3 then click mouse button 3
| |
| 3 3 3 2. Select HELP. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move between the object 3 Press Alt+F6. 3 Select the window or 3
| |
| 3 and the Help window. 3 3 object. 3
| |
| @DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
| |
| | |
| Window Tasks 322/2
| |
| | |
| ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
| |
| 3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Get Help. 3 F1. 3 Select the word HELP; 3
| |
| 3 3 3 then select the type of 3
| |
| 3 3 3 help you want. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Display the pop-up menu 3 Alt+Spacebar 3 Point to the title-bar 3
| |
| 3 for a window. 3 3 icon; then click mouse 3
| |
| 3 3 3 button 2. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move a window. 3 Alt+F7; then use the 3 Point to the title bar; 3
| |
| 3 3 arrow keys. 3 then press and hold 3
| |
| 3 3 3 down mouse button 2. 3
| |
| 3 3 3 Drag the window to the 3
| |
| 3 3 3 new location. Release 3
| |
| 3 3 3 mouse button 2. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Size a window. 3 Alt+F8; then use the 3 Point to the border; 3
| |
| 3 3 arrow keys. 3 then press and hold 3
| |
| 3 3 3 down mouse button 2. 3
| |
| 3 3 3 Drag the border of the 3
| |
| 3 3 3 window in any direc- 3
| |
| 3 3 3 tion. Release mouse 3
| |
| 3 3 3 button 2. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Set a default size for 3 Press Alt; then press S. 3 Press and hold the 3
| |
| 3 a window. 3 Use the up, down, left, 3 Shift key; then point 3
| |
| 3 3 or right cursor keys to 3 to a corner of the 3
| |
| 3 3 adjust two of the 3 window border. Press 3
| |
| 3 3 borders; then press 3 and hold mouse button 3
| |
| 3 3 Enter. 3 1; then drag the border 3
| |
| 3 3 3 to the desired size. 3
| |
| 3 3 NOTE: If you press the 3 Release mouse button 1; 3
| |
| 3 3 mnemonic key for 3 then release the Shift 3
| |
| 3 3 Hide, Minimize, 3 key. 3
| |
| 3 3 or Maximize, 3 3
| |
| 3 3 instead of the S 3 3
| |
| 3 3 for Size, the 3 3
| |
| 3 3 selected choice 3 3
| |
| 3 3 will become the 3 3
| |
| 3 3 default size of 3 3
| |
| 3 3 the window. 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Minimize a window. 3 Alt+F9 3 Select the Minimize 3
| |
| 3 3 3 button. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Hide a window. 3 Alt+F11 3 Select the Hide button. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Maximize a window. 3 Alt+F10 3 Select the Maximize 3
| |
| 3 3 3 button. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Close a window. 3 Alt+F4 3 Double-click on the 3
| |
| 3 3 3 title bar icon. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move up through the 3 Page Up or PgUp. 3 Select the area above 3
| |
| 3 contents of a window, 3 3 the slider box on the 3
| |
| 3 one page at a time. 3 3 scroll bar. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move down through the 3 Page Down or PgDn. 3 Select the area below 3
| |
| 3 contents of a window, 3 3 the slider box on the 3
| |
| 3 one page at a time. 3 3 scroll bar. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move to and from the 3 F10 3 Select the menu bar or 3
| |
| 3 menu bar. 3 3 the window. 3
| |
| @DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
| |
| | |
| Notebook Tasks 323/2
| |
| | |
| ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
| |
| 3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Get Help 3 F1 3 Select the HELP push 3
| |
| 3 3 3 button. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move to the next page. 3 Alt+Page Down 3 Select a notebook tab. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move to the previous 3 Alt+Page Up 3 Select a notebook tab. 3
| |
| 3 page. 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move the cursor from 3 Alt+Up Arrow 3 Select a notebook tab. 3
| |
| 3 the notebook page to a 3 3 3
| |
| 3 tab. 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move the cursor from a 3 Alt+Down Arrow 3 Select the notebook 3
| |
| 3 tab to the notebook 3 3 page. 3
| |
| 3 page. 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move to the next field. 3 Tab 3 Select the field. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move to the next item 3 Up, Down, Left, or Right 3 3
| |
| 3 within a field. 3 Arrow 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Select an item in a 3 Enter 3 Select the item. 3
| |
| 3 single selection field. 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Select an item in a 3 Spacebar 3 Select the button or 3
| |
| 3 multiple selection 3 3 box next to the item. 3
| |
| 3 field. 3 3 3
| |
| @DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
| |
| | |
| Help Window Tasks 324/2
| |
| | |
| These tasks only work from within a help window.
| |
| ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
| |
| 3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Switch between a help 3 Alt+F6 3 Select the window. 3
| |
| 3 window and the object 3 3 3
| |
| 3 or window for which 3 3 3
| |
| 3 help was displayed. 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Display General help. 3 F2 3 Select HELP; then 3
| |
| 3 3 3 select GENERAL HELP. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Display Keys help. 3 F9 3 Select HELP; then 3
| |
| 3 3 3 select KEYS HELP. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Display Help index. 3 F11 or Shift+F1 3 Select HELP; then 3
| |
| 3 3 3 select to HELP INDEX. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Display Using help. 3 Shift+F10 3 Select HELP; then 3
| |
| 3 3 3 select USING HELP. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Display help for a 3 Use Tab to move the 3 Double-click on the 3
| |
| 3 highlighted word or 3 cursor to the high- 3 highlighted word or 3
| |
| 3 phrase. 3 lighted word or phrase; 3 phrase. 3
| |
| 3 3 then press Enter. 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Display the previous 3 Esc 3 Select the PREVIOUS 3
| |
| 3 help window. 3 3 push button. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Search for a word or 3 Ctrl+S 3 Select SERVICES; then 3
| |
| 3 phrase 3 3 select SEARCH. 3
| |
| @DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
| |
| | |
| Master Help Index Tasks 325/2
| |
| | |
| ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
| |
| 3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Open the Master Help 3 Enter 3 Double-click on the 3
| |
| 3 Index. 3 3 Master Help Index. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move through the 3 3 Select the topic. 3
| |
| 3 topics, one line at a 3 3 3
| |
| 3 time. 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Select the area above 3 3 3
| |
| 3 the slider box on the 3 3 3
| |
| 3 scroll bar. 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move down through the 3 Page Down or PgDn. 3 Select the area below 3
| |
| 3 topics, one page at a 3 3 the slider box on the 3
| |
| 3 time. 3 3 scroll bar. 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move up through the 3 Page Up or PgUp. 3 3
| |
| 3 topics, one page at a 3 3 3
| |
| 3 time. 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Move to the topics 3 Type the letter of the 3 Select the letter of 3
| |
| 3 beginning with a 3 alphabet 3 the alphabet. 3
| |
| 3 letter. 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Switch between an entry 3 Alt+F6 3 Select the window. 3
| |
| 3 and the Master Help 3 3 3
| |
| 3 Index. 3 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Display related infor- 3 Use Tab to move the 3 Double-click on an 3
| |
| 3 mation. 3 cursor to the entry 3 entry listed under 3
| |
| 3 3 listed under related 3 related information. 3
| |
| 3 3 information; then press 3 3
| |
| 3 3 Enter. 3 3
| |
| CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
| |
| 3 Return to the previous 3 Esc 3 Select the PREVIOUS 3
| |
| 3 help window. 3 3 push button. 3
| |
| @DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
| |
| | |
| Notices 326/1+
| |
| | |
| References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not
| |
| imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM
| |
| operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended to
| |
| state or imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any
| |
| functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any
| |
| of IBM's intellectual property rights or other legally protectable rights may be
| |
| used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. Evaluation and
| |
| verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or
| |
| services, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user's
| |
| responsibility.
| |
| IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in
| |
| this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to
| |
| these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director
| |
| of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood NY 10594, U.S.A.
| |
| | |
| Trademarks 327/2
| |
| | |
| The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) in this publication, are
| |
| trademarks or service marks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other
| |
| countries:
| |
| AT IBM
| |
| IBMLink Micro Channel
| |
| Operating System/2 OS/2
| |
| PC/XT Personal System/2
| |
| Presentation Manager Proprinter
| |
| PS/2 Screen Reader
| |
| ThinkPad ValuePoint
| |
| WIN-OS/2 Workplace Shell
| |
| XGA XT
| |
| The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**) in this publication, are
| |
| trademarks of other companies as follows:
| |
| Trademark Owner
| |
| Adaptec Adaptec, Inc.
| |
| Adobe Adobe Systems Incorporated
| |
| Adobe Type Manager Adobe Systems Incorporated
| |
| After Dark Berkely Systems, Inc.
| |
| Allways Funk Software, Inc.
| |
| ALR Advanced Logic Research, Inc.
| |
| AMI American Megatrends, Inc.
| |
| Aox Aox Corporation
| |
| APM Astek International
| |
| ATI ATI Technologies, Inc.
| |
| Borland C++ Borland International, Inc.
| |
| Bubble-Jet Canon, Inc.
| |
| Canon Canon Kabushiki Kaisha
| |
| Central Point Anti-Virus Central Point Software, Inc.
| |
| Central Point Backup Central Point Software, Inc.
| |
| Cirrus Logic Cirrus Logic, Inc.
| |
| Compaq Compaq Computer Corporation
| |
| CompuServe CompuServe Incorporated
| |
| Echo Echo Speech Corporation
| |
| Everex Everex Systems, Inc.
| |
| Flexview Nutmeg Systems
| |
| Freelance Lotus Development Corporation
| |
| Future Domain Future Domain Corporation
| |
| Gateway 2000 Gateway 2000, Inc.
| |
| Graphics Ultra Pro ATI Technologies, Inc.
| |
| Helvetica Linotype Company
| |
| Hewlett-Packard Hewlett-Packard Company
| |
| Hitachi Hitachi Ltd.
| |
| HP Hewlett-Packard Company
| |
| Intel Intel Corporation
| |
| IOMEGA IOMEGA Inc.
| |
| LaserJet Hewlett-Packard Company
| |
| Leading Technology Leading Technology, Inc.
| |
| Legend Sigma Designs Inc.
| |
| Logitech Logitech, Inc.
| |
| Lotus Lotus Development Corporation
| |
| McAfee McAfee Associates
| |
| Media Vision Media Vision, Inc.
| |
| Micronics Micronics Electronics, Inc.
| |
| Microsoft Microsoft Corporation
| |
| Mitsumi Mitsumi Denki Kabushki Kaisha
| |
| Motherboard Factory Motherboard Factory
| |
| Mylex Mylex Corporation
| |
| NetWare Novell, Inc.
| |
| Nomad Gateway 2000, Inc.
| |
| Northgate Northgate Computer Systems
| |
| Orchid Orchid Technology Inc.
| |
| Panasonic Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
| |
| PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International
| |
| Association
| |
| Philips Philips Electronics N.V.
| |
| Phoenix Phoenix Technologies, Ltd.
| |
| PostScript Adobe Systems Incorporated
| |
| Pro AudioSpectrum Media Vision, Inc.
| |
| ProComm Datastorm Technologies, Inc.
| |
| Quantum Quantum Corporation
| |
| Reveal Reveal Computer Products, Inc.
| |
| SlimLine Northgate Computer Systems
| |
| Sony Sony Corporation
| |
| Sound Blaster Creative Labs, Inc.
| |
| Stacker Stac Electronics
| |
| S3 S3 Incorporated
| |
| Times New Roman Monotype Corporation, Limited
| |
| Trident Trident Microsystems, Incorporated
| |
| Toshiba Toshiba Corporation
| |
| Tseng Tseng Laboratories Inc.
| |
| Ventura Publisher Ventura Software, Inc.
| |
| VESA Video Electronics Standards Association
| |
| Video 7 Video Seven, Inc.
| |
| Weitek Weitek Corporation
| |
| Western Digital Western Digital Corporation
| |
| Windows Microsoft Corporation
| |
| WordPerfect WordPerfect Corporation
| |
| Zenith Data Systems Zenith Electronics Corporation
| |
| ZEOS ZEOS International Ltd.
| |
| 1-2-3 Lotus Development Corporation
| |
| | |
| =Glossary 328/1+=
| |
| | |
| | |
| A 329/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| archive 330/3
| |
| | |
| archive
| |
| (1) A flag of files and directories that OS/2 uses to determine which files are
| |
| new or modified. Files with this flag are included when a backup copy is made
| |
| or when all the files are restored on a hard disk. (2) A copy of one or more
| |
| files or a copy of a database that is saved for future reference or for recovery
| |
| purposes in case the original data is damaged or lost.
| |
| | |
| attribute 331/3
| |
| | |
| attribute
| |
| A characteristic or property of a file, directory, or object; for example, its
| |
| size, last modification date, or flag. See also setting.
| |
| | |
| audio 332/3
| |
| | |
| audio
| |
| Pertaining to the portion of recorded information that can be heard.
| |
| | |
| AUTOEXEC.BAT 333/3
| |
| | |
| AUTOEXEC.BAT
| |
| A batch file whose main purpose is to process commands that set up the operating
| |
| system for DOS sessions.
| |
| | |
| audio 334/3
| |
| | |
| audio
| |
| Pertaining to the portion of recorded information that can be heard.
| |
| | |
| audio processing 335/3
| |
| | |
| audio processing
| |
| In multimedia applications, manipulating digital audio; for example, by editing
| |
| or creating special effects.
| |
| | |
| audio segment 336/3
| |
| | |
| audio segment
| |
| A contiguous set of recorded data from an audio track. An audio segment might
| |
| or might not be associated with a video segment.
| |
| | |
| audio track 337/3
| |
| | |
| audio track
| |
| (1) The audio portion of a program. (2) The physical location where the audio is
| |
| placed beside the image. (A system with two audio tracks can have either stereo
| |
| sound or two independent audio tracks.) (3) Synonymous with sound track&per.
| |
| | |
| AudioVisual Connection (AVC) 338/3
| |
| | |
| AudioVisual Connection (AVC)
| |
| An IBM product that enables a user to develop and deliver professional-quality
| |
| audio-visual shows on a PS/2 computer.
| |
| | |
| authoring 339/3
| |
| | |
| authoring
| |
| A structured approach to combining all the media elements in an interactive
| |
| production, assisted by computer software designed for this purpose.
| |
| | |
| authoring system 340/3
| |
| | |
| authoring system
| |
| The software tools necessary to integrate computers and peripherals, such as
| |
| CD-ROMs and laser videodiscs.
| |
| | |
| B 341/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| background 342/3
| |
| | |
| background
| |
| In multiprogramming, the conditions under which low-priority programs run when
| |
| high-priority programs are not using the system resources. A background session
| |
| runs one program step at a time. It does not run interactively with the user;
| |
| processing continues on other sessions in the foreground.
| |
| | |
| back up 343/3
| |
| | |
| back up
| |
| To copy information onto a diskette or hard disk for record keeping or recovery
| |
| purposes.
| |
| | |
| batch file 344/3
| |
| | |
| batch file
| |
| A file that contains a series of commands to be processed sequentially. A batch
| |
| file can have either a CMD or a BAT extension.
| |
| | |
| baud rate 345/3
| |
| | |
| baud rate
| |
| A number representing the speed at which information travels over a
| |
| communication line. The higher the number, the faster communication occurs.
| |
| | |
| bit map 346/3
| |
| | |
| bit map
| |
| A representation of an image by an array of bits.
| |
| | |
| bookmark 347/3
| |
| | |
| bookmark
| |
| A menu choice in online books that is used to save your place in the document
| |
| that you are viewing, by marking the topic that is displayed.
| |
| | |
| border 348/3
| |
| | |
| border
| |
| A visual indicator of a window's boundaries.
| |
| | |
| button 349/3
| |
| | |
| button
| |
| A mechanism on a pointing device, such as a mouse, or an area on the computer
| |
| screen, used to request or initiate an action. See also maximize button, hide
| |
| button, push button, radio button, and restore button.
| |
| | |
| byte 350/3
| |
| | |
| byte
| |
| A group of eight adjacent binary digits that are treated as a unit, and that
| |
| often represent a character.
| |
| | |
| C 351/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| cache 352/3
| |
| | |
| cache
| |
| A storage buffer that contains frequently accessed instructions and data; it is
| |
| used to reduce hard disk access time.
| |
| | |
| cascade 353/3
| |
| | |
| cascade
| |
| A choice in a menu that arranges the secondary windows so that each window is
| |
| offset on two sides from the window it overlaps. The windows appear to be
| |
| stacked, one behind the other.
| |
| | |
| cascading choice 354/3
| |
| | |
| cascading choice
| |
| A menu choice that has an arrow to the right of it. If this arrow is selected,
| |
| a cascaded menu appears. A three-dimensional arrow indicates that a cascaded
| |
| choice is preselected and is the default action when you select the main choice.
| |
| A one-dimensional arrow indicates that additional choices are available;
| |
| however, there is no default action. See also cascaded menu.
| |
| | |
| cascaded menu 355/3
| |
| | |
| cascaded menu
| |
| A menu that appears when the arrow to the right of a cascading choice is
| |
| selected. It contains a set of choices that are related to the cascading
| |
| choice. Cascaded menus are used to reduce the length of a menu.
| |
| | |
| case-sensitive 356/3
| |
| | |
| case-sensitive
| |
| A condition in which entries for an entry field must conform to a specific
| |
| lowercase, uppercase, or mixed-case format in order to be valid.
| |
| | |
| CD-ROM 357/3
| |
| | |
| CD-ROM
| |
| High capacity, read-only memory in the form of an optically read compact disc.
| |
| See also compact disc.
| |
| | |
| character 358/3
| |
| | |
| character
| |
| A letter, digit, or other symbol that is used as part of the organization,
| |
| control, or representation of data.
| |
| | |
| check box 359/3
| |
| | |
| check box
| |
| A square box with associated text that represents one choice in a set of
| |
| multiple choices. When you select a choice, a check mark appears in the check
| |
| box to indicate that the choice is in effect. You can clear the check box by
| |
| selecting the choice again. Contrast with radio button.
| |
| | |
| check mark 360/3
| |
| | |
| check mark
| |
| A symbol that shows that a choice is currently active. This symbol is used in
| |
| menus and check boxes. See also checkbox.
| |
| | |
| chip set 361/3
| |
| | |
| chip set
| |
| An integrated circuit or a set of integrated circuits which provide hardware
| |
| support for a related set of functions, such as generation of video.
| |
| | |
| choice 362/3
| |
| | |
| choice
| |
| Any item that you can select. A choice can appear in a selection field, in a
| |
| menu, or in text (a list of selectable choices), or it might be represented by
| |
| an icon.
| |
| | |
| circular slider control 363/3
| |
| | |
| circular slider control
| |
| A knob-like control that performs like a control on a TV or stereo.
| |
| | |
| click 364/3
| |
| | |
| click
| |
| To press and release the select button on a pointing device without moving the
| |
| pointer off the choice. See also double-click.
| |
| | |
| clip 365/3
| |
| | |
| clip
| |
| A section of recorded, filmed, or videotaped material.
| |
| | |
| clipboard 366/3
| |
| | |
| clipboard
| |
| An area of memory that temporarily holds data being passed from one program to
| |
| another. Data is placed on the clipboard by selecting from a menu.
| |
| | |
| close 367/3
| |
| | |
| close
| |
| A choice in Window List and in those programs that have a system menu. This is
| |
| also a cascading choice from the Windows choice on a pop-up menu. This choice
| |
| ends highlighted programs and objects and their associated windows.
| |
| | |
| command prompt 368/3
| |
| | |
| command prompt
| |
| A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter commands.
| |
| | |
| compact disc 369/3
| |
| | |
| compact disc
| |
| A disc, usually 4.75 inches in diameter, from which data is read optically by
| |
| means of a laser.
| |
| | |
| CONFIG.SYS 370/3
| |
| | |
| CONFIG.SYS
| |
| A file that the operating system adds to the root directory during installation.
| |
| This file contains statements that set up the system configuration each time you
| |
| restart the operating system.
| |
| | |
| configuration 371/3
| |
| | |
| configuration
| |
| (1) The manner in which hardware and software of an information processing
| |
| system are organized and interconnected. (2) The arrangement and relationship of
| |
| the components in a system or network.
| |
| | |
| configure 372/3
| |
| | |
| configure
| |
| To describe to a system the devices, optional features, and programs installed
| |
| on the system.
| |
| | |
| container 373/3
| |
| | |
| container
| |
| An object that holds other objects. A folder is an example of a container
| |
| object.
| |
| | |
| copy 374/3
| |
| | |
| copy
| |
| (1) A reproduction of an original. (2) To make a reproduction of an object in a
| |
| new location. After the copy action, the original object remains in the
| |
| original location and a duplicate exists in the new location. A menu choice that
| |
| places onto the clipboard a copy of what you have selected. This choice is also
| |
| used to make copies of objects from a pop-up menu.
| |
| | |
| cut 375/3
| |
| | |
| cut
| |
| A choice in a menu of a program that removes a selected object, or a part of an
| |
| object, to the clipboard, usually compressing the space it occupied in a window.
| |
| Removes a selected object or a part of an object to the clipboard, usually
| |
| compressing the space it occupied in a window.
| |
| | |
| D 376/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| data 377/3
| |
| | |
| data
| |
| The coded representation of information for use in a computer. Data has certain
| |
| attributes such as type and length.
| |
| | |
| database 378/3
| |
| | |
| database
| |
| A collection of data with a given structure for accepting, storing, and
| |
| providing, on demand, data for multiple users.
| |
| | |
| data-file object 379/3
| |
| | |
| data-file object
| |
| An object that represents a file in the file system. The primary purpose is to
| |
| convey information, such as text, graphics, audio, or video. A letter or
| |
| spreadsheet is an example of data-file objects.
| |
| | |
| default 380/3
| |
| | |
| default
| |
| A value, attribute, or option that is assumed when another is not explicitly
| |
| specified.
| |
| | |
| default action 381/3
| |
| | |
| default action
| |
| An action that is performed when you press Enter while pointing at an object,
| |
| double-click the selection button on an object, or perform a direct-manipulation
| |
| operation. The default action is intended to be the action that you would most
| |
| likely want in the given situation.
| |
| | |
| default choice 382/3
| |
| | |
| default choice
| |
| A selected choice that a program provides for the initial appearance of a group
| |
| of selection choices.
| |
| | |
| deselect 383/3
| |
| | |
| deselect
| |
| The process of removing selection highlighting from one or more choices.
| |
| Contrast with select.
| |
| | |
| desktop 384/3
| |
| | |
| desktop
| |
| A folder that fills the entire screen and holds all of the objects that enable
| |
| you to interact with and perform operations on the system.
| |
| | |
| device driver 385/3
| |
| | |
| device driver
| |
| A program that contains the code needed to attach and use a device, such as a
| |
| display, plotter, printer, or mouse. The driver might also include data such as
| |
| help information.
| |
| | |
| device font 386/3
| |
| | |
| device font
| |
| A font particular to, and loaded in the memory of a device such as a video
| |
| display or printer. Some device fonts have size and language-support
| |
| restrictions.
| |
| | |
| device object 387/3
| |
| | |
| device object
| |
| An object that provides a means of communication between a computer and another
| |
| piece of equipment, such as a printer or disk drive. See also printer object.
| |
| | |
| digital 388/3
| |
| | |
| digital
| |
| Pertaining to data in the form of numeric characters.
| |
| | |
| digital audio 389/3
| |
| | |
| digital audio
| |
| Audible information that has been converted to and stored in digital form.
| |
| | |
| digital video 390/3
| |
| | |
| digital video
| |
| Visual material that has been converted to digital form.
| |
| | |
| direct manipulation 391/3
| |
| | |
| direct manipulation
| |
| The action of using a mouse or another pointing device to work with objects,
| |
| rather than through menus. For example, changing the size of a window by
| |
| dragging one of its edges is direct manipulation. Moving or printing an object
| |
| by dragging it to the printer is another example. See also drag.
| |
| | |
| directory 392/3
| |
| | |
| directory
| |
| (1) A list of the files that are stored on a disk or diskette. A directory also
| |
| contains information about the file such as size and date of last change. (2) A
| |
| named grouping of files in a file system. See also folder.
| |
| | |
| directory tree 393/3
| |
| | |
| directory tree
| |
| An outline of all the directories and subdirectories on the current drive.
| |
| | |
| disk 394/3
| |
| | |
| disk
| |
| A round, flat, data medium that is rotated in order to read or write data. See
| |
| also compact disc, hard disk, and diskette.
| |
| | |
| diskette 395/3
| |
| | |
| diskette
| |
| A removable magnetic disk enclosed in a protective cover used to store
| |
| information. See also diskette drive.
| |
| | |
| diskette drive 396/3
| |
| | |
| diskette drive
| |
| A mechanism used to seek, read, and write data on diskettes.
| |
| | |
| DOS command prompt 397/3
| |
| | |
| DOS command prompt
| |
| A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter commands. The DOS command
| |
| prompt is displayed in a DOS window or DOS full screen. Contrast with OS/2
| |
| command prompt.
| |
| | |
| DOS session 398/3
| |
| | |
| DOS session
| |
| A session created by the OS/2 operating system that supports the independent
| |
| execution of a DOS program. The DOS program appears to run independent of any
| |
| other programs in the system.
| |
| | |
| double-click 399/3
| |
| | |
| double-click
| |
| To press and release the select button on a pointing device twice in rapid
| |
| succession while the pointer is over the intended target of the operation. See
| |
| also click.
| |
| | |
| downloaded font 400/3
| |
| | |
| downloaded font
| |
| A soft font copied (downloaded) to the memory of a printer.
| |
| | |
| drag 401/3
| |
| | |
| drag
| |
| To use a mouse or another pointing device to move an object. The following are
| |
| examples: (1) pointing to an object; then pressing and holding mouse button 2
| |
| while moving to a new location, or (2) pointing to a window border; then holding
| |
| down mouse button 1 or 2 while moving the border to change the size of the
| |
| window. Dragging ends when the mouse button is released.
| |
| | |
| dynamic data exchange 402/3
| |
| | |
| dynamic data exchange
| |
| The exchange of data between programs or between a program and a data-file
| |
| object. Any change you make to information in one program or session is applied
| |
| to the identical data created by the other program. For example, with the
| |
| dynamic data exchange (DDE) feature enabled, you can select the duplicate of a
| |
| spreadsheet that is embedded in a report. Then, if you make changes to the
| |
| spreadsheet copy in the report, the same changes are made to the original
| |
| spreadsheet file.
| |
| | |
| E 403/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| enable 404/3
| |
| | |
| enable
| |
| (1) To make functional. (2) The state of a processing unit that allows the
| |
| occurrence of certain types of interruptions. (3) To initiate the operation of
| |
| a circuit or device.
| |
| | |
| environment variables 405/3
| |
| | |
| environment variables
| |
| A series of commands placed in the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files that
| |
| dictate the way the operating system is going to run and what external devices
| |
| it is going to recognize. These commands also can be specified as settings of
| |
| DOS programs.
| |
| | |
| extended attributes 406/3
| |
| | |
| extended attributes
| |
| Additional information that the system or a program associates with a file. An
| |
| extended attribute can be any format, for example text, a bit map, or binary
| |
| data.
| |
| | |
| F 407/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| field 408/3
| |
| | |
| field
| |
| An identifiable area in a window used to contain data. Examples of fields are:
| |
| an entry field, into which you can type text; and a field of radio buttons, from
| |
| which you can select one choice.
| |
| | |
| file 409/3
| |
| | |
| file
| |
| A collection of related data that is stored and retrieved by an assigned name.
| |
| For example, a file can include information that starts a program, program-file
| |
| object, can contain text or graphics data-file object, or can process a series
| |
| of commands such as a batch file.
| |
| | |
| file allocation table (FAT) 410/3
| |
| | |
| file allocation table (FAT)
| |
| A table used by DOS to allocate disk space for a file. It also locates and
| |
| chains together parts of the file that may be scattered on different sectors so
| |
| that the file can be used in a random or sequential manner. Contrast with High
| |
| Performance File System (HPFS).
| |
| | |
| file name 411/3
| |
| | |
| file name
| |
| (1) The name used by a program to identify a file. (2) When referring to the
| |
| file allocation table (FAT) file system, the file name is the portion of the
| |
| identifying name that precedes the extension. When referring to the high
| |
| performance file system (HPFS), the file name includes an extension (if there is
| |
| one).
| |
| If you are using the HPFS, the file name can be up to 254 characters and can
| |
| include any number of periods. The following is an example of a path and file
| |
| name in the HPFS file system where C: is the drive, the first \ is the root,
| |
| INCOME is the directory, and SALES.FIGURES.SEPTEMBER is the file name:
| |
| C:\INCOME\SALES.FIGURES.SEPTEMBER
| |
| If you are using the FAT file system, the file name can be up to eight
| |
| characters and can be followed by an optional three-character extension. The
| |
| following is an example of a path and file name in the FAT file system where C:
| |
| is the drive, the first \ is the root, INCOME is the directory, TAX is a
| |
| subdirectory, and SALES.TXT is the file name and extension:
| |
| C:\INCOME\TAX\SALES.TXT
| |
| | |
| flag 412/3
| |
| | |
| flag
| |
| A characteristic of a file or directory that enables it to be used in certain
| |
| ways. See also archive, hidden, read-only, and system.
| |
| | |
| folder 413/3
| |
| | |
| folder
| |
| A container used to organize objects, programs, documents, other folders, or any
| |
| combination of these. The folders on the desktop represent the directories in
| |
| the file system. For example, a folder can have other folders within it. This
| |
| is similar to a subdirectory within a directory.
| |
| | |
| font 414/3
| |
| | |
| font
| |
| A particular style (shape), size, slant, and weight, defined for an entire
| |
| character set; for example, 9-point Helvetica italic bold. When applied to
| |
| outline or scalable character sets, which can be scaled to any size, font refers
| |
| to style, slant, and weight, but not to size.
| |
| | |
| foreground 415/3
| |
| | |
| foreground
| |
| In multiprogramming, the environment in which interactive high-priority programs
| |
| run. These programs run interactively with the user.
| |
| | |
| format 416/3
| |
| | |
| format
| |
| To check a hard disk or diskette for defects and prepare it to hold information.
| |
| | |
| Format 0 MIDI file 417/3
| |
| | |
| Format 0 MIDI file
| |
| All MIDI data is stored on a single track.
| |
| | |
| Format 1 MIDI file 418/3
| |
| | |
| Format 1 MIDI file
| |
| All MIDI data is stored on multiple tracks.
| |
| | |
| H 419/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| hard disk 420/3
| |
| | |
| hard disk
| |
| A rigid disk in a hard disk drive that you cannot remove. The hard disk can be
| |
| partitioned into storage areas of variable sizes that are subdivided into
| |
| directories and subdirectories. See also partition.
| |
| | |
| Help 421/3
| |
| | |
| Help
| |
| A choice on a pop-up menu that gives you assistance and information; for
| |
| example, general help about the purpose of the object. (This information is the
| |
| same as highlighting the choice and pressing F1.) If you select the arrow to
| |
| the right of Help, a cascaded menu appears from which you can request further
| |
| help.
| |
| The Help choice also can appear in those programs that have a menu bar.
| |
| | |
| Help Index 422/3
| |
| | |
| Help Index
| |
| A choice in the Help cascaded menu that presents an alphabetic listing of help
| |
| topics for an object.
| |
| The Help index choice also can appear in those programs that have Help on a menu
| |
| bar.
| |
| | |
| Help push button 423/3
| |
| | |
| Help push button
| |
| A push button that, when selected, provides information about the item the
| |
| cursor is on or about the entire window.
| |
| | |
| hidden 424/3
| |
| | |
| hidden
| |
| A flag that indicates that a file or directory should not be displayed in the
| |
| directory tree or the directory window.
| |
| | |
| hide 425/3
| |
| | |
| hide
| |
| To remove a window from the desktop. Hidden windows are displayed in the Window
| |
| List.
| |
| | |
| hide button 426/3
| |
| | |
| hide button
| |
| A small button located in the right-hand corner of the title bar of a window
| |
| that, when selected, removes all of the windows associated with that window from
| |
| the screen and are displayed in the Window List.
| |
| | |
| highlighting 427/3
| |
| | |
| highlighting
| |
| Emphasizing a display element or segment by modifying its visual attributes.
| |
| | |
| high performance file system (HPFS) 428/3
| |
| | |
| high performance file system (HPFS)
| |
| An installable file system that uses high-speed buffer storage, known as a
| |
| cache, to provide fast access to large disk volumes. The file system also
| |
| supports the coexistence of multiple, active file systems on a single personal
| |
| computer, with the capability of multiple and different storage devices.
| |
| File names used with HPFS can have as many as 254 characters.
| |
| | |
| I 429/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| icon 430/3
| |
| | |
| icon
| |
| A graphical representation of an object, consisting of an image, image
| |
| background, and a label.
| |
| | |
| image file 431/3
| |
| | |
| image file
| |
| A file that is created from a DOS startup diskette. The image file is a copy of
| |
| the information on the startup diskette. Just as a DOS session can be started
| |
| from a DOS startup diskette, a DOS session can be started from an image file of
| |
| that same diskette.
| |
| | |
| inactive window 432/3
| |
| | |
| inactive window
| |
| A window you are not currently interacting with. This window cannot receive
| |
| input from the mouse or keyboard. Contrast with active window.
| |
| | |
| install 433/3
| |
| | |
| install
| |
| (1) To physically copy the files from the shipped diskettes of an operating
| |
| system or program to specified areas (directories) of a hard disk. (2)
| |
| Installing a printer driver, queue driver, or port means adding the driver to
| |
| the INI file (and copying to the hard disk only if required). Deleting a
| |
| printer driver, queue driver, or port removes the entry from the INI file, but
| |
| leaves the program file on your hard disk.
| |
| | |
| interrupt request (IRQ) 434/3
| |
| | |
| interrupt request (IRQ)
| |
| A request for processing on a particular priority level. It may be generated by
| |
| the active program, the processing unit, or an I/O device.
| |
| | |
| IRQ 435/3
| |
| | |
| IRQ
| |
| See interrupt request (IRQ).
| |
| | |
| J 436/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| job 437/3
| |
| | |
| job
| |
| A data file sent to a printer to be printed.
| |
| | |
| K 438/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| kernel 439/3
| |
| | |
| kernel
| |
| (1) The part of an operating system that performs basic functions such as
| |
| allocating hardware resources. (2) A part of a program that must be in main
| |
| storage in order to load other parts of the program.
| |
| | |
| keys help 440/3
| |
| | |
| keys help
| |
| A choice in the Help cascaded menu that presents a listing of all the key
| |
| assignments for an object or a product. This choice also can appear in those
| |
| programs that have Help on a menu bar.
| |
| | |
| kilobyte (KB) 441/3
| |
| | |
| kilobyte (KB)
| |
| A term meaning 1024 bytes.
| |
| | |
| L 442/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| LAN 443/3
| |
| | |
| LAN
| |
| Local Area Network. (1) Two or more computing units connected for local
| |
| resource sharing. (2) A network in which communications are limited to a
| |
| moderate-sized geographic area, such as a single office building, warehouse, or
| |
| campus, and that do not extend across public rights-of-way.
| |
| | |
| list box 444/3
| |
| | |
| list box
| |
| A vertical, scrollable list of objects or settings choices that you can select.
| |
| | |
| log in 445/3
| |
| | |
| log in
| |
| (1) To begin a session with a remote resource (2) The act of identifying
| |
| yourself as authorized to use the resource. Often, the system requires a user
| |
| ID and password to check your authorization to use the resource.
| |
| | |
| log out 446/3
| |
| | |
| log out
| |
| (1) To end a session or request that a session be ended. (2) The act of removing
| |
| access to a remote resource from a workstation. Contrast with log in.
| |
| | |
| M 447/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter (M-ACPA) 448/3
| |
| | |
| M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter (M-ACPA)
| |
| An adapter card (for use with the IBM PS/2 product line) that provides the
| |
| ability to record and play back high quality sound. The adapter converts the
| |
| audio input (analog) signals to a digital format that is compressed and stored
| |
| for later use.
| |
| | |
| mark 449/3
| |
| | |
| mark
| |
| A menu choice of a program that you select to highlight text or graphics that
| |
| you want to perform clipboard operations on. The clipboard operations are cut,
| |
| copy, paste, clear, and delete.
| |
| | |
| Master Help Index 450/3
| |
| | |
| Master Help Index
| |
| An object on the desktop that, when selected, presents an alphabetic listing of
| |
| operating system tasks and topics.
| |
| | |
| maximize 451/3
| |
| | |
| maximize
| |
| A menu choice available from the Windows choice on a pop-up menu. Select this
| |
| choice to enlarge the window to its largest possible size.
| |
| | |
| maximize button 452/3
| |
| | |
| maximize button
| |
| A large, square button located in the rightmost corner of the title bar of a
| |
| window that, when selected, enlarges the window to its largest possible size.
| |
| Contrast with hide button. See also restore button.
| |
| | |
| megabyte (MB) 453/3
| |
| | |
| megabyte (MB)
| |
| A term meaning approximately 1000000 bytes.
| |
| | |
| memory 454/3
| |
| | |
| memory
| |
| (1) The storage on electronic chips; for example, random access memory, where
| |
| your programs and data are held while you use them, or read-only memory where
| |
| information is stored that your system can refer to but not change. (2)
| |
| Program-addressable storage; the locations by which the operating system and
| |
| your programs can locate information that is temporarily held in memory. With
| |
| the OS/2 operating system, program-addressable memory might be larger than the
| |
| electronic chip memory in your computer.
| |
| | |
| menu 455/3
| |
| | |
| menu
| |
| A displayed list of available items from which you can make a selection. See
| |
| also popup menu.
| |
| | |
| menu bar 456/3
| |
| | |
| menu bar
| |
| The area near the top of the window, below the title bar and above the rest of
| |
| the window, that contains choices that provide access to other menus.
| |
| | |
| MIDI 457/3
| |
| | |
| MIDI
| |
| Musical Instrument Digital Interface.
| |
| | |
| MIDI Mapper 458/3
| |
| | |
| MIDI Mapper
| |
| Provides the ability to translate and redirect MIDI messages to achieve
| |
| device-independent playback of MIDI sequences.
| |
| | |
| migrate 459/3
| |
| | |
| migrate
| |
| (1) To move to a changed operating environment, usually to a new release or
| |
| version of a system. (2) To move data from one hierarchy of storage to another.
| |
| | |
| minimize 460/3
| |
| | |
| minimize
| |
| To remove a window (using the minimize button) to one of the following:
| |
| o Minimized Window Viewer
| |
| o Window List
| |
| o Desktop Folder.
| |
| See also hide.
| |
| | |
| minimize button 461/3
| |
| | |
| minimize button
| |
| A button, located next to the rightmost button in a title bar, that when
| |
| selected, reduces the window to its smallest possible size and removes all of
| |
| the windows associated with that window from the screen. Contrast with maximize
| |
| button and hide button.
| |
| | |
| Minimized Window Viewer 462/3
| |
| | |
| Minimized Window Viewer
| |
| A folder that contains icons of minimized windows. See also minimize button and
| |
| minimize.
| |
| | |
| mix 463/3
| |
| | |
| mix
| |
| The combining of audio or video sources during postproduction.
| |
| | |
| mixer 464/3
| |
| | |
| mixer
| |
| A device used to simultaneously combine and blend several inputs into one or two
| |
| outputs.
| |
| | |
| modem 465/3
| |
| | |
| modem
| |
| A device that converts digital data from a computer to an analog signal that can
| |
| be transmitted on a telecommunications line and that converts the received
| |
| signal to data for the computer.
| |
| | |
| mouse 466/3
| |
| | |
| mouse
| |
| A pointing device that you move on a flat surface to position a pointer on the
| |
| screen. It allows you to select a choice or function to be performed or to
| |
| perform operations on the screen, such as dragging or drawing lines from one
| |
| position to another.
| |
| | |
| mouse button 467/3
| |
| | |
| mouse button
| |
| A mechanism on a mouse that you press to select choices or initiate actions.
| |
| | |
| move 468/3
| |
| | |
| move
| |
| To change the location of an object. After the move action, the original exists
| |
| in its new location and no longer exists in its original location. Contrast with
| |
| copy.
| |
| | |
| Move 469/3
| |
| | |
| Move
| |
| A choice on the pop-up menu of objects that you select to move the objects to
| |
| other containers. Select to position a window on the screen.
| |
| | |
| multimedia 470/3
| |
| | |
| multimedia
| |
| (1) The combination of different elements of media (for example, text,
| |
| graphics, audio, and still images) for display and control from a personal
| |
| computer. (2) Material presented in a combination of text, graphics, video,
| |
| image, animation, and sound.
| |
| | |
| multimedia system 471/3
| |
| | |
| multimedia system
| |
| A system capable of presenting multiple types and formats of material in their
| |
| entirety.
| |
| | |
| multiple DOS sessions 472/3
| |
| | |
| multiple DOS sessions
| |
| A system service that coordinates the concurrent operation of separate DOS
| |
| sessions.
| |
| | |
| multiple virtual DOS machines 473/3
| |
| | |
| multiple virtual DOS machines
| |
| | |
| See multiple DOS sessions.
| |
| | |
| multitasking 474/3
| |
| | |
| multitasking
| |
| A mode of operation that provides for concurrent performance, or interleaved
| |
| execution of two or more tasks.
| |
| | |
| Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI) 475/3
| |
| | |
| Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI)
| |
| A protocol that enables a synthesizer to send signals to another synthesizer or
| |
| to a computer, or enables a computer to send signals to a musical instrument or
| |
| to another computer.
| |
| | |
| N 476/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| network 477/3
| |
| | |
| network
| |
| A configuration of data-processing devices and software connected for the
| |
| purpose of sharing resources and for information interchange. See also LAN.
| |
| | |
| network administrator 478/3
| |
| | |
| network administrator
| |
| The person responsible for the installation, management, and control of a
| |
| network. The network administrator gives authorization to you for accessing
| |
| shared resources and determines the type of access those users can have.
| |
| | |
| network group 479/3
| |
| | |
| network group
| |
| A folder representing a Local Area Network or a group of objects that you have
| |
| permission to access.
| |
| | |
| notebook 480/3
| |
| | |
| notebook
| |
| A graphical representation that resembles a bound notebook that contains pages
| |
| separated into sections by tabbed divider-pages. It contains a mechanism that
| |
| you can use to turn the pages. For example, you can select a tab to turn the
| |
| page to the section identified by the tab label.
| |
| | |
| O 481/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| object 482/3
| |
| | |
| object
| |
| Something that you work with to perform a task. Text and graphics are examples
| |
| of objects. See also data-file object, folder, program object and device
| |
| object.
| |
| | |
| open 483/3
| |
| | |
| open
| |
| To create a file or make an existing file available for processing or use.
| |
| | |
| operating system 484/3
| |
| | |
| operating system
| |
| Software that controls the processing of programs and that may provide services
| |
| such as resource allocation, scheduling, input/output control, and data
| |
| management. Although operating systems are predominantly software, partial
| |
| hardware implementations are possible.
| |
| | |
| OS/2 command prompt 485/3
| |
| | |
| OS/2 command prompt
| |
| A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter commands. The OS/2 command
| |
| prompt is displayed in an OS/2 window or OS/2 full screen. Contrast with DOS
| |
| command prompt.
| |
| | |
| P 486/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| parallel 487/3
| |
| | |
| parallel
| |
| Pertaining to the simultaneous transmission of individual parts of a whole.
| |
| When a printer is connected to a parallel port, it receives an entire byte
| |
| (character) at a time. See also serial.
| |
| | |
| parameter 488/3
| |
| | |
| parameter
| |
| A variable used in conjunction with a command to affect its result.
| |
| | |
| parity check 489/3
| |
| | |
| parity check
| |
| A mathematical operation on the numerical representation of the information
| |
| communicated between two pieces. For example, if parity is odd, any character
| |
| represented by an even number has a bit added to it, making it odd, and an
| |
| information receiver checks that each unit of information has an odd value.
| |
| | |
| PARSEDB 490/3
| |
| | |
| PARSEDB
| |
| A utility program that creates a similar database to the Migrate Applications
| |
| default database (DATABASE.DAT). The Migrate Applications program uses
| |
| information in this database when migrating programs. The database you create
| |
| with PARSEDB contains similar information to the default database, but for
| |
| different programs.
| |
| | |
| partition 491/3
| |
| | |
| partition
| |
| A fixed-size division of storage. On a personal computer hard disk, one of four
| |
| possible storage areas of variable size; one might be accessed by DOS, and each
| |
| of the others might be assigned to another operating system.
| |
| | |
| password 492/3
| |
| | |
| password
| |
| A string of characters that you, a program, or a computer operator must specify
| |
| to meet security requirements before gaining access to a system and to the
| |
| information stored within it.
| |
| | |
| paste 493/3
| |
| | |
| paste
| |
| (1) A choice in the menu of a program that, when selected, moves the contents
| |
| of the clipboard into a preselected location that you can select in a window.
| |
| (2)Move the contents of the clipboard into a preselected location that you can
| |
| select in a window.
| |
| | |
| path 494/3
| |
| | |
| path
| |
| A statement that indicates where a file is stored on a particular drive. The
| |
| path consists of all the directories that must be opened to get to a particular
| |
| file. The directory names are separated by the backslash (\). The first
| |
| backslash represents the root directory. For example, a file named things that
| |
| is located in the EDIT directory of drive C has a path of:
| |
| c:\edit\things
| |
| A path is sometimes followed by a file name and a file name extension (if there
| |
| is one). It is sometimes preceded by a drive letter and a colon (:).
| |
| | |
| path and file name 495/3
| |
| | |
| path and file name
| |
| The path and file name make up a statement that indicates where a file is stored
| |
| in a particular drive. It consists of all the directories that must be opened
| |
| to get to a particular file. The backslash (\) separates directory names and
| |
| the file name; the first \ indicates the root.
| |
| File names in the HPFS file system can be up to 254 characters and can include
| |
| any number of periods. The following is an example:
| |
| \INCOME\SALES.FIGURES.FOR.SEPTEMBER
| |
| File names in the FAT file system can be up to eight characters and can be
| |
| followed by an optional three-character extension. The following is an example:
| |
| \INCOME\TAX\SALES.TXT
| |
| | |
| plotter 496/3
| |
| | |
| plotter
| |
| An output device that uses multiple pens to draw on paper or transparencies.
| |
| | |
| pointer 497/3
| |
| | |
| pointer
| |
| The symbol displayed on the screen that you move with a pointing device, such as
| |
| a mouse.
| |
| | |
| pop-up menu 498/3
| |
| | |
| pop-up menu
| |
| A menu that, when requested, is displayed next to the object it is associated
| |
| with. It contains choices appropriate for a given object or set of objects in
| |
| their current context. The menu is displayed by clicking mouse button 2 on an
| |
| object or on the desktop.
| |
| | |
| pop-up window 499/3
| |
| | |
| pop-up window
| |
| A movable window, fixed in size, in which you provide information required by an
| |
| application so that the application can continue to process your request.
| |
| | |
| port 500/3
| |
| | |
| port
| |
| A connector on a computer to which cables for devices, such as display stations
| |
| and printers, or communications lines are attached. Ports can be parallel or
| |
| serial.
| |
| | |
| port designation 501/3
| |
| | |
| port designation
| |
| A 4-character identifier (such as LPT1 or COM1) assigned to a printer, plotter,
| |
| or communications device so that the system has a unique way to refer to the
| |
| resource.
| |
| | |
| printer driver 502/3
| |
| | |
| printer driver
| |
| A file that describes the physical characteristics of a printer, plotter, or
| |
| other peripheral device, and is used to convert graphics into device-specific
| |
| data at the time of printing or plotting. A Presentation Manager printer driver
| |
| allows you to print or plot from an application program that creates
| |
| printer-independent files.
| |
| | |
| printer-independent file 503/3
| |
| | |
| printer-independent file
| |
| A file in a format that is independent of a particular printer type. For
| |
| example, with a Presentation Manager spooler, a file in the metafile format is
| |
| printer-independent. See also printer-specific file.
| |
| | |
| printer object 504/3
| |
| | |
| printer object
| |
| An object representing a physical printer or plotter, its printer driver, queue,
| |
| and other settings. See also device object.
| |
| | |
| printer-specific file 505/3
| |
| | |
| printer-specific file
| |
| A file that can be printed on only one type of printer. See also
| |
| printer-independent file.
| |
| | |
| private 506/3
| |
| | |
| private
| |
| When the WIN_CLIPBOARD setting is set to Off, this disables (makes private) the
| |
| sharing of clipboard information among DOS, OS/2 and Windows programs.
| |
| When the WIN_DDE (dynamic data exchange) setting is set to Off, this disables
| |
| (makes private) the sharing of data among OS/2 and Windows programs.
| |
| | |
| program 507/3
| |
| | |
| program
| |
| A sequence of instructions that a computer can interpret and process.
| |
| | |
| program-file object 508/3
| |
| | |
| program-file object
| |
| An object that starts a program. Program files commonly have extensions of
| |
| &per.EXE, .COM, .CMD, or .BAT. Contrast with data-file object.
| |
| | |
| program object 509/3
| |
| | |
| program object
| |
| An object representing the file that starts a program. You can change the
| |
| settings for this object to specify how you want the program to start or where
| |
| the files related to the program are stored. For example, you can specify that
| |
| an editor always starts with the NOTABS option.
| |
| See also program-file object.
| |
| | |
| program title 510/3
| |
| | |
| program title
| |
| A name that you type for a selected program. It is displayed with the icon. It
| |
| can be any name you want to use to refer to the program. For example, My
| |
| Favorite Editor could be used as the program title for an editor whose actual
| |
| title is ABC.
| |
| | |
| program type 511/3
| |
| | |
| program type
| |
| See session.
| |
| | |
| property 512/3
| |
| | |
| property
| |
| (1) Synonym for setting. (2) Like a setting, but used by the OS/2 operating
| |
| system to refer to printer, plotter, or print job set up.
| |
| | |
| public 513/3
| |
| | |
| public
| |
| When the WIN_CLIPBOARD setting is set to On, this enables (makes public) the
| |
| sharing of clipboard information among DOS, OS/2, and Windows programs.
| |
| When the WIN_DDE (dynamic data exchange) setting set to On, this enables (makes
| |
| public) the sharing of data among OS/2 and Windows programs.
| |
| | |
| push button 514/3
| |
| | |
| push button
| |
| A rounded-corner rectangular control containing text or graphics, or both. Push
| |
| buttons are used in windows for actions that occur immediately when the push
| |
| button is selected.
| |
| | |
| Q 515/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| queue 516/3
| |
| | |
| queue
| |
| A line or list formed by items waiting to be processed; for example, a list of
| |
| print jobs waiting to be printed. See also spooling and spooler.
| |
| | |
| queue driver 517/3
| |
| | |
| queue driver
| |
| A software processor that takes a print job from a queue, and sends it to the
| |
| appropriate printer driver to prepare it for printing.
| |
| | |
| R 518/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| radio button 519/3
| |
| | |
| radio button
| |
| A round button on the screen with text beside it. Radio buttons are combined to
| |
| show you a fixed set of choices from which only one can be selected. The circle
| |
| is partially filled when a choice is selected. Contrast with check box.
| |
| | |
| read-only 520/3
| |
| | |
| read-only
| |
| A flag that prevents a file from being modified. The file with this flag set
| |
| can be viewed, copied, or printed.
| |
| | |
| refresh 521/3
| |
| | |
| refresh
| |
| An action that updates changed information to its current status.
| |
| | |
| remote 522/3
| |
| | |
| remote
| |
| Pertaining to a system, program, or device that is accessed through a
| |
| telecommunication line.
| |
| | |
| resolution 523/3
| |
| | |
| resolution
| |
| (1) Density or sharpness of an image. For bit-map material, resolution is
| |
| expressed in dots-per-inch, with higher quality output having more
| |
| dots-per-inch. Resolution can be adjusted for some printers. Low-resolution
| |
| images are printed faster, but appear coarser than high-resolution images. A
| |
| printer's memory size can limit the resolution you can choose. (2) The number of
| |
| lines in an image that an imaging system (for example, a telescope, the human
| |
| eye, or a camera) can resolve. Higher resolution makes text and graphics appear
| |
| clearer.
| |
| | |
| resource 524/3
| |
| | |
| resource
| |
| Any facility of a computing system or operating system needed to perform
| |
| required operations; includes disk storage, input devices, output devices (such
| |
| as printers), a processing unit, data files, and programs.
| |
| | |
| restore button 525/3
| |
| | |
| restore button
| |
| A button that appears in the rightmost corner of the title bar after a window
| |
| has been maximized. When the restore button is selected, the window returns to
| |
| the size it was before it was maximized. See also maximize button and hide
| |
| button.
| |
| | |
| root directory 526/3
| |
| | |
| root directory
| |
| The first directory on a drive in which all other files and subdirectories
| |
| exist, such as C:\.
| |
| | |
| S 527/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| scroll 528/3
| |
| | |
| scroll
| |
| To move a display image vertically or horizontally to view data that is not
| |
| otherwise visible in a display screen or window.
| |
| | |
| scroll bar 529/3
| |
| | |
| scroll bar
| |
| A part of a window, associated with a scrollable area, that you interact with to
| |
| see information that is not currently visible. Scroll bars can be displayed
| |
| vertically and horizontally. The scroll bar can be selected only with a mouse.
| |
| | |
| select 530/3
| |
| | |
| select
| |
| To use the selection button to highlight or choose an item such as an object or
| |
| a menu choice. When you make a selection, there is a subsequent action that
| |
| will apply. Contrast with deselect.
| |
| | |
| serial 531/3
| |
| | |
| serial
| |
| Pertaining to the sequential transmission of one element at a time. Serial
| |
| ports pass one bit at a time. If a port has word length 7, it must pass seven
| |
| separate elements before the receiver can assemble those elements into a single
| |
| recognizable whole unit (character). See also parallel.
| |
| | |
| server 532/3
| |
| | |
| server
| |
| (1) On a local area network (LAN), a workstation that provides facilities to
| |
| other workstations. (2) A computer that shares its resources with other
| |
| computers on a network. An example of a server is a file server, a print
| |
| server, or a mail server.
| |
| | |
| session 533/3
| |
| | |
| session
| |
| (1) A logical connection between two machines on a network. (2) One instance of
| |
| a started program or command prompt. Each session is separate from all other
| |
| sessions that might be running on the computer. The operating system is
| |
| responsible for coordinating the resources that each session uses, such as
| |
| computer memory, allocation of processor time, and windows on the screen. The
| |
| session types are OS/2 window, OS/2 full screen, DOS window, DOS full screen,
| |
| WIN-OS/2 full screen, WIN-OS/2 window, and WIN-OS/2 window separate session.
| |
| | |
| setting 534/3
| |
| | |
| setting
| |
| A unique characteristic of an object that can be changed or modified. The
| |
| setting of an object describes the object. The name of the object is an example
| |
| of a setting.
| |
| | |
| Settings 535/3
| |
| | |
| Settings
| |
| A choice that defines characteristics of objects or displays identifying
| |
| characteristics of objects.
| |
| | |
| shadow 536/3
| |
| | |
| shadow
| |
| A link between duplicate objects. The objects can be located in different
| |
| folders. If you make a change in either the duplicate or the original, the
| |
| change takes effect in the other as well. Or, suppose you have a program on a
| |
| drive other than drive C and want to use it from the desktop. You can make a
| |
| shadow of the program for the desktop. The program is not physically moved or
| |
| copied, which means you save space on your hard disk, but you can use it from
| |
| the desktop.
| |
| | |
| shutdown 537/3
| |
| | |
| shutdown
| |
| The process of selecting the Shut down choice before the computer is powered off
| |
| so that data and configuration information is not lost.
| |
| | |
| slider 538/3
| |
| | |
| slider
| |
| A control that represents a quantity and its relationship to the range of
| |
| possible values for that quantity. In some cases, you can change the value of
| |
| the quantity.
| |
| | |
| soft font 539/3
| |
| | |
| soft font
| |
| Optional fonts shipped as files. Soft fonts must be installed onto the hard
| |
| disk before they can be selected from programs. See also downloaded font.
| |
| | |
| source diskette 540/3
| |
| | |
| source diskette
| |
| In a diskette-copying procedure, the diskette from which information is read.
| |
| Contrast with target diskette.
| |
| | |
| source drive 541/3
| |
| | |
| source drive
| |
| The drive from which information is read. Contrast with target drive.
| |
| | |
| specific DOS 542/3
| |
| | |
| specific DOS
| |
| An actual DOS program product that is purchased independently of the OS/2
| |
| operating system. Examples include IBM DOS Version 3.x, Microsoft DOS Version
| |
| 3.x, Digital Research** Version 5.0. Some programs are dependent on the
| |
| internals of a specific DOS version. You can run these programs with the OS/2
| |
| operating system by starting a DOS session with a specific DOS version.
| |
| Contrast with DOS session.
| |
| | |
| spooler 543/3
| |
| | |
| spooler
| |
| A program that intercepts data going to a device driver and writes it to disk.
| |
| The data is later printed or plotted when the required device is available. A
| |
| spooler prevents output from different sources from being intermixed.
| |
| | |
| spooling 544/3
| |
| | |
| spooling
| |
| The process of temporarily storing print jobs while waiting for an available
| |
| printer or port. Spooling jobs frees system resources from waiting for a
| |
| relatively slow device to provide output, and keeps the contents of each print
| |
| job separated from the contents of every other print job.
| |
| | |
| sticky keys 545/3
| |
| | |
| sticky keys
| |
| An input method that enables you to press and release a series of keys
| |
| sequentially (for example, Ctrl+Alt+Del), yet have the keys behave as if they
| |
| were pressed and released at the same time. This method can be used for those
| |
| who require special-needs settings to make the keyboard easier to use.
| |
| | |
| system 546/3
| |
| | |
| system
| |
| A flag that indicates that a file or directory is part of the operating system.
| |
| | |
| system font 547/3
| |
| | |
| system font
| |
| One of the fonts available for screen display and printing. You can specify any
| |
| size for this font, and it supports any language. Contrast with device font.
| |
| | |
| T 548/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| tab 549/3
| |
| | |
| tab
| |
| (1) An action, achieved by pressing the Tab key that moves the cursor to the
| |
| next field. (2) A graphical representation of a book-like tab on a notebook
| |
| that, when selected, turns the notebook page.
| |
| | |
| target diskette 550/3
| |
| | |
| target diskette
| |
| In a diskette or storage copying procedure, the diskette onto which information
| |
| is written. Contrast with source diskette.
| |
| | |
| target drive 551/3
| |
| | |
| target drive
| |
| The drive to which information is written. Contrast with source drive.
| |
| | |
| template 552/3
| |
| | |
| template
| |
| An object that you can use as a model to create additional objects. When you
| |
| drag a template you create another of the original object, as though you were
| |
| peeling one of the objects off a stack.
| |
| | |
| tile 553/3
| |
| | |
| tile
| |
| A choice in a menu that modifies the size of each window and arranges them so
| |
| that they appear side-by-side and top-to-bottom.
| |
| | |
| title bar 554/3
| |
| | |
| title bar
| |
| The area at the top of each window that can contain the window title and a
| |
| title-bar icon. When appropriate, it also contains the hide, maximize, and
| |
| restore buttons.
| |
| | |
| title-bar icon 555/3
| |
| | |
| title-bar icon
| |
| The mini-icon in the upper-left corner of the title bar that represents the
| |
| object that is open in the window. You can use the object to display the pop-up
| |
| menu or close a window.
| |
| | |
| U 556/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| user interface 557/3
| |
| | |
| user interface
| |
| The hardware, software, or both that allows you to interact with and perform
| |
| operations on a computer.
| |
| | |
| Using Help 558/3
| |
| | |
| Using Help
| |
| A cascaded choice on the Help menu that gives you information about how the help
| |
| function works. This choice is also available on those programs that have Help
| |
| as a choice on a menu bar.
| |
| | |
| V 559/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| value 560/3
| |
| | |
| value
| |
| A quantity assigned to a constant, a variable, or a parameter.
| |
| | |
| videodisc 561/3
| |
| | |
| videodisc
| |
| A disc on which programs are recorded for playback on a computer (or a
| |
| television set); a recording on a videodisc.
| |
| | |
| view 562/3
| |
| | |
| view
| |
| The appearance of the contents of an open object (for example, a folder can be
| |
| displayed in icon view, tree view, settings view or details view.
| |
| | |
| virtual device driver 563/3
| |
| | |
| virtual device driver
| |
| A type of device driver used by DOS programs running in a DOS virtual machine,
| |
| in order to access devices such as the screen or mouse which must be shared with
| |
| other processes in the system. The virtual device driver maps DOS device
| |
| commands to the normal (physical) device driver under OS/2 Version 3.
| |
| | |
| virtual DOS machine 564/3
| |
| | |
| virtual DOS machine
| |
| See DOS session.
| |
| | |
| W 565/2+
| |
| | |
| | |
| waveform 566/3
| |
| | |
| waveform
| |
| (1) A graphic representation of the shape of a wave that indicates the wave's
| |
| characteristics, such as frequency and amplitude. (2) A digital method of
| |
| storing and manipulating audio data within a computer. (3) A series of digital
| |
| samples of the audio input stream taken at regular intervals over the duration
| |
| of the audio event.
| |
| | |
| wildcard character 567/3
| |
| | |
| wildcard character
| |
| Either a question mark (?) or an asterisk (*) used as a variable in a file name
| |
| or file name extension when referring to a particular file or group of files.
| |
| | |
| WIN-OS/2* 568/3
| |
| | |
| WIN-OS/2*
| |
| WIN-OS/2 is a feature of OS/2 that enables OS/2 to run supported Windows
| |
| programs. See supported Windows programs.
| |
| | |
| WIN-OS/2 session 569/3
| |
| | |
| WIN-OS/2 session
| |
| A WIN-OS/2 session created by the OS/2 operating system that supports the
| |
| independent processing of a Windows program. The Windows program can run in a
| |
| WIN-OS/2 full-screen, WIN-OS/2 window, or WIN-OS/2 window separate session.
| |
| | |
| window 570/3
| |
| | |
| window
| |
| An area of the screen with visible boundaries within which information is
| |
| displayed. A window can be smaller than or the same size as the screen.
| |
| Windows can appear to overlap on the screen.
| |
| | |
| Window List 571/3
| |
| | |
| Window List
| |
| A menu choice that displays a list of all of the open windows in a product. Use
| |
| the Window List choice to switch to an active program, to tile or cascade open
| |
| program windows, to surface hidden windows, or to close a program.
| |
| | |
| Windows program 572/3
| |
| | |
| Windows program
| |
| A program written for the Microsoft Windows application programming interface.
| |
| | |
| workarea 573/3
| |
| | |
| workarea
| |
| A folder setting that enables you to organize your desktop by grouping together
| |
| objects for a specific task. For example, you could group a plotter object with
| |
| data-file objects that contain charts and documents.
| |
| | |
| working directory 574/3
| |
| | |
| working directory
| |
| A specified directory that becomes the current directory when a program is
| |
| started. The current directory is the first directory in which the operating
| |
| system looks for programs and files and stores temporary files and output. Some
| |
| programs require a working directory.
| |
| | |
| Workplace Shell 575/3
| |
| | |
| Workplace Shell
| |
| A graphical user interface that makes working with your computer easier. The
| |
| Workplace shell lets you manage your work without having to learn the
| |
| complexities of the operating system.
| |
| | |
| [[Category:Information]] | |